UEE11 Electrotechnology Training Package

UEENEEG107A
UEENEEG103A
Select and arrange equipment for
general electrical installations

Learner Workbook
Version 1

INDUSTRY SKILLS UNIT

MEADOWBANK
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Acknowledgments
The TAFE NSW Training and Education Support Industry Skills Unit, Meadowbank
would like to acknowledge the support and assistance of the following people in
the production of this learner workbook:

Weston Rofe

John Kemp

Warren McPherson

Writer:
Phillip E Chadwick

South Western Sydney Institute

Reviewers:

TAFE NSW

Project Manager:
TAFE NSW

Enquiries
Enquiries about this and other publications can be made to:

Training and Education Support Industry Skills Unit, Meadowbank

Meadowbank TAFE
Level 3, Building J,
See Street,
MEADOWBANK NSW 2114

Tel: 02-9942 3200 Fax: 02-9942 3257

© The State of New South Wales, Department of Education and

Training, TAFE NSW, Training and Education Support Industry Skills
Unit, Meadowbank, 2009.

Copyright of this material is reserved to TAFE NSW Training and Education

Support Industry Skills Unit, Meadowbank. Reproduction or transmittal in
whole or in part, other than for the purposes of private study or research, and
subject to the provisions of the Copyright Act, is prohibited without the written
authority of, TAFE NSW. Training and Education Support Industry Skills Unit,
Meadowbank.

ISBN

Developed by Training & Education Support Industry Skills Unit, Meadowbank

@ TAFE NSW 2009
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Developed by Training & Education Support Industry Skills Unit, Meadowbank

@ TAFE NSW 2009
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Table of contents
Introduction ............................................................................................. 9

1. General introduction ........................................................................... 9

2. Using this learner workbook ................................................................. 9

3. Prior knowledge and experience ......................................................... 11

4. Unit of competency overview ............................................................. 12

5. Assessment ..................................................................................... 14

Section 1 - Performance requirements - Design and safety .................... 16

Topic 1 - Protection against harmful effects ............................................ 21

Topic 2 - A correctly functioning electrical installation. ............................. 22

Topic 3 - Supply characteristics ............................................................ 23

Topic 4 - Methods of determining maximum demand .............................. 27

Topic 5 - Voltage drop limitations. ......................................................... 28

Topic 6 - Arrangement into circuits........................................................ 33

Topic 7 - External Factors .................................................................... 35

Topic 8 - Protection against direct contact (basic protection). ................... 36

Topic 9 - Protection against indirect contact (Fault protection). ................. 37

Topic 10 - Protection against thermal effects. ......................................... 41

Topic 11- Protection against over current ............................................... 43

Topic 12 - Protection against earth fault current. ..................................... 45

Topic 13- Protection against sources of abnormal voltages........................ 45

Topic 14 - Protection against injury from mechanical movement. ............... 48

Topic 15 - Integrity of fire rated construction. ......................................... 50

Tutorial - Section 1 .......................................................................... 52

Developed by Training & Education Support Industry Skills Unit, Meadowbank

@ TAFE NSW 2009
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Section 2 - Final sub-circuit arrangements ............................................. 59

Topic 1 - Maximum demand of final sub-circuits ...................................... 60

Topic 2 - Number and type of final sub-circuits ....................................... 62

Topic 3 - Current requirements of final sub-circuits .................................. 66

Topic 4 - Final sub-circuit schedules and layouts. .................................... 80

Section 3 - Factors Affecting the Suitability of Wiring Systems .............. 90

Topic 1 - Construction Methods ............................................................. 92

Topic 2 - Installation conditions ............................................................ 93

Topic 3 - External Influences ................................................................ 94

Topic 4 - Selecting Wiring Systems ....................................................... 95

Tutorial - Section 3 ........................................................................ 107

Section 4 - Maximum demand on consumers mains ............................. 112

Topic 1 - Methods of determining the maximum demand ........................ 114

Topic 2 - Determining the maximum demand of consumers mains ........ 115

Tutorial - Section 4 ........................................................................ 127

Section 5 - Maximum demand on consumers mains and sub mains...... 132

Topic 1 - Calculation of maximum demand ........................................... 133

Topic 2 - Calculation the maximum demand of sub mains ....................... 143

Tutorial - Section 5 ........................................................................ 151

Section 6 - Cable selection based on current carrying capacity

requirements ...................................................................... 156

Topic 1 - Installation conditions .......................................................... 157

Topic 2 - De-rating Factors ................................................................ 161

Topic 3 - Current carrying capacity tables in AS/NZS3008.1.1 ................. 164

Topic 4 - Cable selection ................................................................... 169

Tutorial - Section 6 ........................................................................ 187

Developed by Training & Education Support Industry Skills Unit, Meadowbank

@ TAFE NSW 2009
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 7 - Cable selection based on voltage drop requirements .......... 197

Topic 1 - Voltage drop tables in AS3008.1.1 (2009) ............................... 200

Topic 2 - Voltage drop calculations using AS3008.1.1............................. 202

Topic 3 - Cable selection based on voltage drop. ................................... 208

Topic 4 - Maximum length of cable based on voltage drop. ..................... 217

Tutorial - Section 7 ........................................................................ 221

Section 8 - Cable selection based on earth fault loop impedance

requirements ...................................................................... 228

Topic 1 - Cable impedance tables in AS/NZS3008.1.1 ............................ 230

Topic 2 – Earth loop impedance calculations ......................................... 233

Topic 3 - Cable selection based on earth loop impedance. ....................... 239

Topic 4 - Maximum length based on earth loop impedance. .................... 241

Tutorial - Section 8 ........................................................................ 251

Section 9 - Selecting protection devices ............................................... 256

Topic 1 - Selection of overload devices ................................................ 259

Topic 2 - Short Circuit Hazards ........................................................... 266

Topic 3 - Selecting Short Circuit Protection Devices ............................... 275

Topic 5 - AS3000 requirements. ......................................................... 286

Tutorial - Section 9 ........................................................................ 292

Section 10 - Selecting devices for isolation and switching ................... 298

Topic 1 - Requirements for provision of isolation .............................. 299

Topic 2 - Need for protection against mechanical movement ............. 310

Topic 3 - Selecting Devices ........................................................... 313

Tutorial 10 ..................................................................................... 327

Developed by Training & Education Support Industry Skills Unit, Meadowbank

@ TAFE NSW 2009
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Section 11 - Switchboards .................................................................... 332

Topic 1 - AS3000 and local requirements ........................................ 333

Topic 2 - Tariff Structures ............................................................ 343

Topic 3 - Main Switchboard Equipment ........................................... 347

Topic 4 - Layout Diagrams for Whole Current Metering ..................... 349

Tutorial 11 ..................................................................................... 358

Section 12 - Selecting equipment for damp situations and ELV

installations ...................................................................... 364

Topic 1 – Delineation of damp situations .............................................. 365

Topic 2 – Selection of equipment for damp situations. ............................ 373

Topic 3 – Voltage range of ELV installations .......................................... 383

Topic 4 – Selecting equipment for ELV installations ................................ 384

Tutorial 12 ..................................................................................... 390

Section 13 - Special situations (Construction and demolition sites;

Caravan parks) ................................................................. 396

Topic 1 - Other requirements and standards ............................................................. 426

Topic 2 - AS/NZS 3012 Electrical Installations Construction and demolition

sites) ................................................................................ 398

Topic 3 - AS/NZS 3001 Electrical installations—Relocatable premises

(including caravans and tents) and their site installation........... 403

Tutorial 13 ..................................................................................... 408

Section 14 - Special situations (Marinas, Shows and Carnivals) ........... 414

Topic 1 - AS 3004 Electrical installations—Marinas and Recreational boats 415

Topic 2 - AS 3002 Electrical installations – Shows and Carnivals ............ 422

Tutorial 14 ..................................................................................... 426

Developed by Training & Education Support Industry Skills Unit, Meadowbank

@ TAFE NSW 2009
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 15 - Special situations (HV installations; Hazardous areas) and

documenting .................................................................... 430

Topic 1 – High Voltage Installations ..................................................... 431

Topic 2 – Hazardous Locations ............................................................ 435

Topic 3 – Responsibilities ................................................................... 445

Topic 4 – Mandatory Documentations .................................................. 447

Tutorial Answers ................................................................................. 453

Resource Evaluation Form .................................................................... 488

Introduction

1. General introduction
Welcome to UEENEEG1O7B, Select and arrange equipment for general electrical
installations

This national unit of competence is part of the UEE11 Electrotechnology Industry

Training Package.

2. Using this learner workbook

This learner workbook may be used on its own, or it may be used as additional
material to support the development of knowledge and skills required to achieve
this unit of competence.

Group learning
If you are studying this unit of competency as part of a group of learners your
teacher will guide you in how to use these materials, including which learning
topics and activities should be completed.

Self-directing learning
If you are studying this unit of competency as a self-directed learner you will
have a facilitator assigned to you. This person will be available to support you as
you work through this material. To study this unit effectively, learners who are
working without facilitated group sessions should work through the materials in

Developed by Training & Education Support Industry Skills Unit, Meadowbank

@ TAFE NSW 2009
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

the order that they appear in the learner workbook, completing all the readings
and all the activities.

Learning strategies
This learner workbook contains a variety of different learning activities to support
the skills required to achieve this unit of competency. In addition to the activities
described in this workbook, it is important that you discuss the issues raised with
others such as your colleagues, friends, practitioners working in the field and
other learners. Discussion plays an important role in understanding and
remembering new information.

To promote active learning:

1 Come up with your own answers first, before you attempt any readings

2 Compare and discuss your answers with others.

3 Research the topic and access readings, videos, etc.

4 Ask yourself, ‘What do I think about the subject material now that I have
studied it in depth? What have I learned?’

The learner workbook is designed for you to work at your own pace and at a time
convenient for you. It also allows you to self-direct and control your learning.

There may be some tutorials, practical sessions or workshops which you are
required to attend. If this is required you will be notified of the times and dates
of these activities at the commencement of the unit.

You also have access to tutorial support. This is an additional support service that
can help you with time management, study skills, editing of your work,
organisation and even literacy skills. It is important for you to contact your
facilitator and ask for this support if you require it. Normally this service is
accessed at your nearest TAFE College.

You may also need to access resources at a TAFE college or library. These
resources may include computer facilities and software, books, library material
and videos. The resources are listed under the ‘resources’ heading for this unit
and references to these resources are made at the relevant sections of the
workbook.

When working through the material there may be reference to legislation or

regulations. Over time legislation and regulations may change. It is important
that you access the most current version. Refer to your facilitator if you are
unsure.

Four steps to learn new skills

This learner workbook is based on four main learning activities.

Page 10 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

1. Thinking – Reflecting on the subject, your own experience and ideas, and
what you hope to achieve from this learning process. Reflective thinking
prepares you to learn new skills.

2. Attending – Reading the contents of this workbook carefully, with

understanding. This may involve asking questions, rewriting material in
your own words, discussing the material with other people, or reading
additional reference materials. Attending provides you with the
information you need to carry out a new skill.

3. Doing – Putting new skills into practice. This may involve following
specific activities or assessment tasks in this workbook, or putting the new
skill directly into practice in your workplace. Using new information in a
practical way will help you to remember and understand.

4. Reviewing – Did the new skill achieve what you expected to achieve?
Seek feedback from your workplace supervisor, teacher, clients or
colleagues. Ask more questions if you need to. Complete the review
activities in this workbook. When you have achieved competency, keep a
record of your completed tasks as evidence of your skill.

If you have difficulties

If you have any difficulties while working through this material you should ask
your facilitator for help. For example you may have trouble understanding a
concept or accessing a resource that is required.

Your TAFE College has a range of support services available to help you through
your course.

If you have a disability which may affect your ability to learn or to complete the
assessment events you should talk with your teacher or college ‘Disabilities
Consultant’ about your right to reasonable adjustment to the way you are
assessed.

In order to be successful with this type of learning it helps if you:

 can apply self-discipline

 stay motivated and focused on achieving your goal
 manage your time to include time for study and to complete assessments
 can take responsibility for your own learning

3. Prior knowledge and experience

You may already have knowledge, skills and experience relevant to this unit of
competency that you have gained due to your work, life experience or from a
previous course. If this is the case ask your teacher about having this learning
recognised. You will need to produce evidence to demonstrate that you have the
skills, knowledge and competency level required for this unit of competency. Your
teacher can advise you as to what types of evidence you could provide.

Page 11 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

4. Unit of competency overview

Unit description
The following information is summarised from the national UEE11
Electrotechnology Industry Training Package.
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG107A

These units covers selecting equipment for electrical installations operating at

voltages up to 1,000V a.c. or 1,500 V d.c. to meet performance standards. These
encompass schemes for protection of persons and property, correct function,
compatibility with the supply, arrangement of circuits and selection of switchgear,
control gear, protection devices and wiring based on calculated and deemed-to-
comply solutions.

The skills and knowledge described in this unit do not require a license to practice
in the work place. However practice in this unit is subject to regulations directly
related to occupational health and safe and contracts of training such as new
apprenticeships.

For full details please go to www.training.nsw.gov.au and go to UEE 308011

Critical aspects for assessment and evidence required

A representative body of performance criteria demonstrated within the

timeframes typically expected of the discipline, work function and industrial
environment. In particular this shall incorporate evidence that shows a candidate
is able to select and arrange equipment for general electrical installations
including:

A Arranging electrical installations to comply with safety and other

regulatory and functional requirements.

B Selecting appropriate type and size of cables.

C Selecting protection methods and devices that meet co-ordination

requirements for overload and short-circuit protection.

D Selecting switchgear and control gear that meet current, voltage and
l.P. ratings and functional requirements.

E Selecting appropriate earthing components.

F Documenting installation arrangement, specification for items selected

and reasons for the selections made.

G Dealing with unplanned events by drawing on essential knowledge and

skills to provide appropriate solutions incorporated in the holistic
assessment with the above listed items.

Page 12 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Access and equity considerations

 All workers in electrotechnology should be aware of access, equity and human

rights issues in relation to their own area of work
 All workers should develop their ability to work in a culturally diverse
environment
 In recognition of particular issues facing Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander
communities, workers should be aware of cultural, historical and current
issues impacting on Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people
 Assessors and trainers must take into account relevant access and equity
issues, in particular relating to factors impacting on Aboriginal and/or Torres
Strait Islander clients and communities

Context of and specific resources for assessment

This unit should be assessed as it relates to normal work practice using procedures,
information and resources typical of a workplace.

This should include:

 WHS policy and work procedures and instructions.

 Suitable work environment, facilities, equipment and materials to undertake actual
work as prescribed by this unit.
These should be part of the formal learning/assessment environment.

Note:
Where simulation is considered a suitable strategy for assessment, conditions must be
authentic and as far as possible reproduce and replicate the workplace and be consistent with
the approved industry simulation policy.

The resources used for assessment should reflect current industry practices in relation to
selecting and arranging equipment for general electrical installations.

Method of assessment

Assessment methods must be appropriate to the situation. Learners can be encouraged to

use these methods for self-assessment. Combinations of these methods will be required for
most situations, eg observations and oral questioning. The recommended assessment
methods for collecting evidence required to determine the candidate’s competency are:

 oral questioning
 structured observation of work
 indirect supporting evidence (supervisor’s reports)

It is recommended that assessors use open questions in conjunction with direct

 observations to assess the candidate’s ability to:

 apply relevant knowledge to the particular task
 perform the required tasks safely and efficiently

Page 13 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

 handle unforeseen contingencies and circumstances

 recognise and solve problems associated with the whole job (which may not
necessarily occur during the assessment).
Supervisor’s reports or verified calculations should be used to confirm that workplace job
activities have been completed on time and meet the required specifications. This is
particularly relevant when the assessor may not be present for the total duration of the
workplace job activity and/or the learner/candidate works as part of a team. For more
information see Section 3.10 of training package “Guide to assessment methods and items”.

Direct observation. Observe the learner carrying out their usual practical tasks in the
workplace. This may be accompanied by questions. Direct observation is probably the easiest
and most convenient method of assessment.

Third party reports. Information is provided by the immediate supervisor or other

appropriate person(s). An external assessor may not have the opportunity to make multiple
observations of a candidate over a period of time, unlike an internal (in-house)

Employability skills

By successfully completing this unit of competency you will also be demonstrating

a range of Employability Skills that are addressed under the Employability Skills
Framework identified as appropriate for the UEE07 Electrotechnology Training
Package. These skills apply generally to work in the electrotechnology industry
and are specifically customised to address work at different levels and sectors of
the industry.

5. Assessment
How you will be assessed

A number of assessment tasks have been identified to ensure that you are
adequately assessed in relation to all the elements, essential knowledge and skills
and critical aspects of assessment associated with this national unit of
competency. Your facilitator will ensure the assessment tasks suit your learning
situation, and the amount of access you have to a workplace environment for any
“on the job” assessment.

Your facilitator will provide you with a Student Assessment Guide that details the
requirements of the unit of competency. You will also receive the required
assessments and evidence guides and any grading criteria if relevant to the unit.
Due dates for the assessments will also be discussed with you. Talk to your
facilitator if you are unsure about any of the requirements. Once you understand
the assessment requirements and what is expected you will need to sign the
Student Assessment Guide as proof of this.

This unit may be assessed in conjunction with other units of competency. Your
facilitator will advise you if this is relevant to the unit you are studying.
Check with your college or facilitator to find out the requirements associated with
the handing in of assessments. If you are studying in NSW you should refer to the
TAFE NSW Assessment Policy.

Page 14 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

This page is intentionally blank

Page 15 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

This page is intentionally blank

Page 16 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

This page is intentionally blank

Page 17 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

This page is intentionally blank

Page 18 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 1 - Performance requirements

Design and safety
Topics

• Protection against harmful effects

• Correct functioning

• Supply characteristics

• Determining maximum demand

• Voltage drop limitations

• Arrangement into circuits

• External factors

• Protection against

 Direct contact

 Indirect contact

 Thermal effects

 Over current

 Earth fault current

 Abnormal voltages

 Mechanical movement

• Integrity of fire rated construction

Aim
Learners will be introduced to basic electrical design considerations when
selecting electrical equipment to meet safety and performance standards.

References:- AS 3000:2018

Page 19 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 Outline the harmful effects against which the design of an electrical

installation must provide protection.

 Outline the acceptable performance standards of a correctly functioning

electrical installation.

 Explain each of the supply characteristics that shall be considered when

designing an electrical installation.

 Describe the acceptable methods for determining the maximum demand in

consumer's mains and sub-mains.

 State the AS/NZS 3000 requirements limiting voltage drop in an

installation.

 State the reason for dividing electrical installations into circuits and the
factors that shall determine their number and type.

 List typical external factors that may damage an electrical installation and
that shall be considered in the installation design.

 Describe the methods for protecting persons and livestock against direct
contact with conductive parts.

 Describe the methods for protecting persons and livestock against indirect
contact and the typical application of each.

 Describe acceptable methods of protection against the risks of ignition of

flammable materials and injury by burns from the thermal effects of
current, in normal service.

 Describe the acceptable methods for protecting persons and livestock

against injury and property against damage from the effects of over
current.

 Outline the requirement for protection against earth fault current.

 Describe the likely sources of abnormal voltages and the methods for
dealing with this potential hazard.

 Outline the requirement for protection against the harmful effects of faults
between live parts of circuits supplied at different voltages.

 Explain the need for protection against injury from mechanical movement
and how this may be achieved.

 Describe the features of 'fire rated construction' and how the integrity of
the fire rating can be maintained in relation to electrical installations.

Page 20 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Introduction.
As an electrical tradesman, especially in the contracting industry, you are
required to make design decisions about various parts of an installation. This may
be as simple as selecting the correct current rating of a circuit breaker to protect
the circuit for a piece of equipment, or as complex as the complete design of an
installation.

Topic 1 - Protection against harmful effects

Risk management has three parts.

 Identification, what is the risk?

 Assessment, what danger and how often the risk will occur?

 Mitigation, what actions and processes can be used to eliminate or control

the risk?

Activity - 1 - Protection against dangers and damage

Read AS 3000 clause 1.5.1

1. What 3 items require protection? a) ______________________________

b) ______________________________

c) ______________________________

2. What are the 3 major risks? a) ______________________________

b) ______________________________

c) ______________________________

Now the risks have been identified, it is obvious that assessment will show the
dangers are catastrophic and frequent. Designing an electrical installation to the
appropriate Australian standards will mitigate the risks to an acceptable level.

Page 21 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Topic 2 - A correctly functioning electrical installation.

So how do we select the correct equipment so that we do not cause electric
shock and or potentially burn the installation to the ground? Section 1.6 of
AS3000 gives guidance.

Activity - 2 - Design of an Electrical Installation.

Read AS 3000 clause 1.6.1

1. List 5 functions that a electrical

installation must be able to do. a) __________________________________

__________________________________

b) __________________________________

__________________________________

c) __________________________________

__________________________________

d) __________________________________

__________________________________

e) __________________________________

__________________________________

Page 22 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 3 - Supply characteristics

The electrical equipment and the wiring systems installed must be compatible
with the characteristics of the supply. Most installations are supplied by large
electrical distributors such as Energy Australia, Integral Energy and Country
Energy. However it is not uncommon for private supply sources to be in use. In
remote areas solar, wind and small internal combustion generators are common.
Larger factories may have their own steam turbines as a source of supply.

Overseas countries such as the United States use a 110 V 60 Hz system,

equipment to suit the American supply will not be compatible with Australia’s 230
V 50 Hz system.

Activity - 3 - Design of an Electrical Installation.

Read AS 3000 clause 1.6.2

1. List 9 characteristics of the supply a) ______________________________

system that must be compatible
with the electrical installation b) ______________________________
connected to it.
c) ______________________________

d) ______________________________

e) ______________________________

f) ______________________________

g) ______________________________

h) ______________________________

i) ______________________________

(a) Generally the supply in Australia is A.C.

(b) If an installations maximum demand is greater than that of the supply

available it is normal for the supply distributor to ask for a financial
contribution to any upgrades in infrastructure.

Page 23 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

The number of supply phases will depend on the maximum demand and load
types. Small installations up to 100 A will be connected only to 1 phase and a
neutral. If the load exceeds 100 A or a 3 phase motor is installed 3 phases
and a neutral will be connected. Known as a 4 wire 3 phase supply it is show
in figure 1.

Service and Installation Rules of New South Wales October 2019 rule
1.12.3.3 gives guidance on the number of phases connected to an
installation.

A
A

MEN N

B
E
C

N
MEN B

E
figure 1. figure 2.

Outside metropolitan areas 3 phase supply is not always available. Many rural
distributors use a 3 wire 2 phase supply as shown in figure 2. Heavy loads are
wired across A and B phases but are connect to 480 volts single phase, not 415
volts. A 3 phase 415 V motor would not be compatible with the 2 phase 480 volt
supply
(c) The nominal supply voltage is 230 volts for single phase supply and 400 volts
for three phase supply, not 240/415 Volts. All calculations for this subject are
to be performed at 230/400 V.

It is important to ensure the supply voltage is within tolerance. If the voltage

is ether too high or low damage to electrical wiring and equipment will occur.

Page 24 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 4 - Supply characteristics

Use AS 3000 2018 rule 1.6.2 (C) to Complete

the following activities:

1. Calculate the maximum

permissible supply voltage
for a single phase 230 V
installation.

2. Calculate the minimum

permissible supply voltage
for a single phase 230 V
installation.

3. Calculate the maximum

permissible supply voltage
for a three phase 400 V
installation.

4. Calculate the minimum

permissible supply voltage
for a three phase 400 V
installation.

(d) The standard frequency in Australia is 50 Hz. Operation at any other

frequency will cause three phase induction motors to run at speeds different
to rated values and cause changes in characteristics of other inductive
devices.

(e) The maximum current that is supplied to the installation can be set to limit at
the electricity distributors discretion. Maximum demand will be covered in the
next objective.

(f) The prospective short circuit current is the maximum possible current that
could flow under short circuit conditions. Protection devices must be capable
of interrupting this current without damage.

Page 25 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Service and Installation Rules of New South Wales October 2019

Section 1.17.4 gives guidance on prospective short circuit current
values at various locations.

(g) The MEN system is used. Many countries in Europe and Asia do not ground
the neutral conductor, this is not compatible with our Multiple Earthed Neutral
(M.E.N.) system

(h) Limits on the use of equipment. Devices such as motors can draw large
currents when starting, this in turn will cause disruptions such as low voltage
and distortion to the supply itself.

Service and Installation Rules of New South Wales October 2019

Section 1.17.2 gives guidance on Limits on the Connection and
Operation of Equipment.

(i) Harmonic current or other limitations. Modern electronic equipment such as

computers, inverters, electronic ballasts and variable speed drives cause
harmonics. Harmonics can cause transformers and neutral conductors to over
heat.

Page 26 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 4 - Methods of determining maximum demand

Activity - 5 - Maximum demand consumers and sub

mains

Read AS 3000 clause 2.2.2

1. List 4 methods for determining the

a) ______________________________
maximum demand of consumer’s
mains and sub-mains.
b) ______________________________

c) ______________________________

d) ______________________________

Service and Installation Rules of New South Wales October 2019

Section 1.12 gives guidance on minimum size of consumers mains.

Maximum demand is the highest current expected to flow in a conductor at any

given time. It is not necessarily the total of the connected load on the conductor.
“Diversity” is the term used to describe the difference between the actual
connected load and the current assigned for maximum demand described in
activity 5. Take an example of a power circuit with say 8 x 10A outlets. The
maximum expected current to be drawn by this circuit will not be 80 amperes. It
is very unlikely that all 8 socket outlets will operate at the 10A maximum current
all of the time, some will be lightly loaded or have no load.

The most commonly used methods of determining maximum demand are, for;

 Consumers mains _________________________

 Sub mains _________________________

 Final sub-circuits _________________________

Page 27 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Topic 5 - Voltage drop limitations.

Activity - 6 - Limiting Voltage Drop

Read AS 3000 clause 3.6.2

1. What permissible percentage of the nominal supply

voltage is permitted as voltage drop between the
point of supply and electrical equipment in a 230
volt installation?

2. What permissible percentage of the nominal supply

voltage is permitted as voltage drop between the
point of supply and electrical equipment in a 400
volt installation?

3. What is the maximum value of voltage drop is

permitted for a single phase 230 volt installation?

4. What is the maximum value of voltage drop is

permitted for a three phase 400 volt installation?

This percentage of voltage drop is spread across the whole installation, from the
point of supply to the load. Not applied separately to consumer’s main, sub-main
and final sub-circuit. It is a general rule of thumb that approximately a 3% / 2%
split is made between the consumer mains and the final sub-circuit.

Consumers Final
point of Mains Main Switch Sub-Circuit
supply Load
Board

figure 3.

Page 28 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

If an installation contains both consumers and sub-mains, the consumers and

sub-mains are combined together. The 3% / 2% split is then made between the
combination of consumer / sub-main and the final sub-circuit.

Consumers Sub Final

point of Mains Main Switch Mains Sub Dist Sub-Circuit
supply Load
Board Board

figure 4.

Long runs of cable anywhere in the installation will cause the voltage drop to
increase about the permissible amount. This will cause electric motors to over
heat and fail. A simple solution to the problem is to increase cable size.

The voltage drops on each section of cable are series connected; therefore the
total voltage drop is the sum of each individual cable.

Activity - 7 - Permissible Voltage Drop

1. Figure 5 is a 230 V single phase installation.

Determine the total conductor voltage drop.

2. Does the circuit of figure 5 comply with Australian

standards (yes/No) why?

Consumers Final
Mains Main Switch Sub-Circuit
Load
Board
Vd = 8 V Vd = 3 V

figure 5.

Page 29 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Activity - 8 - Permissible Voltage Drop

1. Figure 6 is a 400 V three phase installation.

Determine the total conductor voltage drop.

2. Does the circuit of figure 6 comply with Australian

standards (yes/No) why?

Consumers Final
Mains Main Switch Sub-Circuit
Load
Board
Vd = 12 V Vd = 10 V

figure 6.

Activity - 9 - Permissible Voltage Drop

1. Figure 7 is a 400 V three phase installation. What

is the permissible voltage drop on the f.s.c.?

Consumers Final
Mains Main Switch Sub-Circuit
Load
Board
Vd = 15 V Vp = ? V

figure 7.

Page 30 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 10 - Permissible Voltage Drop

1. Figure 8 is a 400 V three phase installation. What

is the permissible voltage drop on the f.s.c.?

Consumers Final
Mains Main Switch Sub-Circuit
Load
Board
Vd = 22 V Vp = ? V

figure 8.

Activity - 11 - Permissible Voltage Drop

1. Figure 9 is a 230 V single phase installation.

Determine the total conductor voltage drop.

2. Does the circuit of figure 9 comply with Australian

standards (yes/No) why?

Consumers Sub Final

Mains Mains Sub-Circuit
Main Switch Sub Dist
Load
Board Board
3V 3.5 V 4V

figure 9.

Page 31 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Activity - 12 - Permissible Voltage Drop

1. Figure 10 is a 400 V three phase installation.

Determine the total conductor voltage drop.

2. Does the circuit of figure 10 comply with Australian

standards (yes/No) why?

Consumers Sub Final

Mains Mains Sub-Circuit
Main Switch Sub Dist
Load
Board Board
8V 3V 6V

figure 10.

Activity - 13 - Permissible Voltage Drop

1. Figure 11 is a 400 V three phase installation.

What is the permissible voltage drop on the f.s.c.?

Consumers Sub Final

Mains Mains Sub-Circuit
Main Switch Sub Dist
Load
Board Board
4V 10 V ?V

figure 11.

Page 32 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 6 - Arrangement into circuits.

It is simply not practical to place all of the electrical load on just one circuit.
Consider topic 2 of the lesson, Design of an installation, to satisfy all of these
requirements it is necessary to split the installations load into a number of
circuits.
Consumers mains - are used to connect the entire installation to the street
supply at only one point for ease of isolation.

Sub-mains - connect between switchboards, no load is connected

directly to a sub-main.

Final Sub-Circuits - connect the load to the switch board, figure 12 shows an
example.

Consumers Sub Final

Mains Mains Sub-Circuit
Main Switch Sub Dist
Load
Board Board
Point of
Supply
Final
Sub-Circuit
Load

Sub Final
Mains Sub Dist Sub-Circuit
Board Load

Final
Sub-Circuit
Load
figure 12.

Activity - 14 - Separate Circuits.

Read AS 3000 clause 1.6.5

Page 33 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Activity - 15 - Separate Circuits.

Read AS 3000 clause 2.2.1.1

1. List 6 Typical groups of load

a) ___________________________________
that are divided in to
separate final sub-circuits.
b) ___________________________________

c) ___________________________________

d) ___________________________________

e) ___________________________________

f) ____________________________________

Once separated into appropriate circuits a suitable circuit protection device and
cable can be selected for each circuit. The protection device (H.R.C. fuse or C.B.)
is selected to supply the load and protect the cable.
The cable size is to have a current rating lager than or equal to the circuit protect
device selected. The type of cable used should suit the environment in which to
which is to be installed and be cost effective. In most cases the Thermo Plastic
Sheathed (T.P.S.) cables are commonly used. More detailed selection of cable
types will be discussed in following lessons.
The number of points per final sub-circuit ranges from one single point to many.
In industrial and commercial installations the number of points is restricted to
ensure correct operation of the circuit.
Australian Standard AS3000 gives guidance to number of points per
final sub-circuit in table C9.

In domestic installations “diversity” is applied to the circuits to allow the number

of points to be increased to reduce costs. Diversity simply means that not all load
will be on at the same time.

Page 34 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 7 - External Factors

Activity - 16 - External Factors.

Read AS 3000 rule 1.5.14

1. List 16 External factors that a) ______________________________

need to be considered in the
design of an electrical b) ______________________________
installation.
c) ______________________________

d) ______________________________

e) ______________________________

f) ______________________________

g) ______________________________

h) ______________________________

i) ______________________________

j) ______________________________

k) ______________________________

l) ______________________________

i) ______________________________

j) ______________________________

k) ______________________________

l) ______________________________

Page 35 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Topic 8 - Protection against direct contact (basic

protection).

Direct contact is when persons and or livestock come in contact with electrical
conductors which are “live” under normal use.

Activity - 17 - Direct Contact.

Read AS 3000 clause 1.4.38

Activity - 18 - Protection against direct contact.

Read AS 3000 clause 1.5.4

1. List 4 methods of protect against

direct contact. a) ______________________________

b) ______________________________

c) ______________________________

d) ______________________________

Page 36 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 19 - Arms reach

Read AS 3000 clause 1.4.16

1. What distance is considered arms reach above

a surface?

2. What distance is considered arms reach below

a surface?

Topic 9 - Protection against indirect contact (Fault

protection).

Activity - 20 - Indirect Contact.

Read AS 3000 clause 1.4.39

Indirect contact is a very important concept to understand. When a fault to earth

occurs large currents will flow back to the supply via the protective earthing
conductor. As the protective earthing conductor is made from copper it will have
resistance. Ohms law tells us that when we have both current flow and resistance
in a circuit the result is a voltage drop or difference. This voltage drop know as
“touch voltage“ is now present between the exposed metal of the equipment
under fault and the rest of the earthing system as shown in figure 13. A risk now
occurs of a person touching the exposed metal of the equipment under fault and

Page 37 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

another healthy part of the earthing system simultaneously (at the same time). A
current called a shock current will flow through that person. The degree of risk of
electric shock that person receives depends on three factors;
 the value of touch current.
 the time the person is exposed to the touch current.
 and the path the touch takes through the persons body.
C.B.

A
Exposed
metal

load

N
PE RPE

V V

figure 13.
Methods used to protect against indirect contact are called fault protection.
They reduce the risk of electric shock to an acceptable level by reducing the value
and time of that touch current. DONOT CONFUSE WITH DIRECT CONTACT!

Activity - 21 - Protection against indirect contact

(fault protection).

Read AS 3000 clause 1.5.5.2

1. List 4 methods of protect against

a) ______________________________
indirect contact.
b) ______________________________

c) ______________________________

d) ______________________________

Page 38 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Please note the most commonly used method is automatic disconnection of

supply.

Activity - 22 - Protection by automatic

disconnection of supply.

Read AS 3000 clause 1.5.5.3

1. At what maximum values of touch

voltage must automatic
disconnection occur? A.C. ___________ D.C. ____________

2. What is the maximum

disconnection time for circuits that
supply socket outlets not
exceeding 63A, hand held class I
equipment, or portable
equipment?

3. What is the maximum

disconnection time for circuits that
supply other circuits including
sub-mains and final sub-circuits
supplying fixed or stationary
equipment?

4. Does a R.C.D. satisfy the

requirements of automatic
disconnection of supply
(Yes / No)?

Page 39 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Activity - 23 - Disconnection times.

Examine AS 3000 figure B4

(appendix B)

1. What is the maximum duration of

touch voltage under normal
conditions at 100 Volts?

2. What is the maximum duration of

touch voltage under normal
conditions at 50 Volts?

When the circuit under fault is examined, it effectively becomes a series circuit as
shown in figure 14. The active and the protective earthing conductors form a
voltage divider. Typically approximately 80% (0.8) of the supply voltage is
available at the circuit protection device in the active.

Circuits wired in 1.0, 1.5 and 2.5 mm2

have the same size active and protective A
earthing conductors. This means there
resistance will be similar; in turn they will
RA
share the total voltage across them
fault to earth
equally. Under active to earth fault
conditions the touch voltage can be high
as 230 x 0.8 x 0.5 = 92 volts. As these
size conductors are used in final sub-
circuits which supply socket outlets or RPE
V
other equipment which may be hand
held, the user will be in very good contact
with the exposed metal of the equipment E
under fault. Disconnection times are
required to be short (0.4 seconds) to figure 14.
decrease the risk of electric shock

Circuits wired in conductors larger than 2.5 mm2, 4.0 mm2 and above have
smaller protective earthing conductors than the active. The protective earthing
conductor’s resistance will be higher than the active conductor. Under active to

Page 40 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

earth fault conditions the same current passes though both active and protective
earthing conductors, because the protective earth’s resistance is higher, so the
touch voltage across the protective earthing will be larger than the voltage drop
in the active. Fortunately these larger conductors are generally used to connect
fixed or stationary appliances. By nature of their use, the user will not make as
good a contact with the appliance as if it were hand held. A longer disconnection
time of 5 seconds is allowed.

Topic 10 - Protection against thermal effects.

Activity - 24 - Protection against thermal effects

Read AS 3000 clause 1.5.8

Activity - 25 - Protection against thermal effects

Read AS 3000 Rule

4.2.2.3

1. List 3 methods of
protecting adjacent a) _______________________________________
materials against high
temperatures.
b) _______________________________________

c) _______________________________________

Page 41 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Activity - 26 - Protection against burns

Read AS 3000 rule 4.2.3

List the maximum temperature limits in normal service for parts of electrical
equipment with in arms reach for metallic and non-metallic surfaces for;

1. Hand held operation

2. Parts intended to be touched

but not hand-held

3. Parts that need not be touched

for normal operation

Page 42 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 11- Protection against over current

Activity - 27 - Protection against over currents.

Read AS 3000 clause 1.4.41 - 43

There are three over currents;

Fault current – current flowing due to insulation failure/damage from Active to

Earth. This current is the cause of touch voltage.
Overload – current flowing due to additional connection of load in an undamaged
circuit. The conductors will eventually over heat and be damaged without
operation of the circuit protection device.
Short Circuit – this is the largest possible current flow due to a fault of almost
zero impedance. The circuit protection must operate very quickly as cable
damage and fire is certain.

Activity - 28 - Protection against the effects of over

current

Read AS 3000 Rule 1.5.9

1. List 2 methods of
protecting against over a) _______________________________________
current.

b) _______________________________________

Page 43 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Activity - 29 - Devices for protection against the

effects of over current

Read AS 3000 Rule 2.5.2

1. List 4 devices suitable as

protection against both
a) ____________________________________
short circuit and overload
currents
b) ____________________________________

c) ____________________________________

d) ____________________________________

2. What device is not suitable

as protection against both
short circuit and overload
currents?

3. Is a RCD a suitable device

to protect against over
current?

Page 44 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 12 - Protection against earth fault current.

Activity - 30 - Protection against earth fault current.

Read AS 3000 Rule 1.5.10

Topic 13- Protection against sources of abnormal

voltages.

Activity - 31 - Protection against abnormal voltages.

Read AS 3000 Rule 1.5.11

1. List 3 sources of
abnormal voltages. a) _______________________________________

b) _______________________________________

c) _______________________________________

Page 45 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Activity - 32 - Protection against abnormal voltages.

Read AS 3000 Rule 1.5.11.4

1. What precautions must

be taken with unused _______________________________________
conductors to protect
against abnormal
voltages? _______________________________________

_______________________________________

Activity - 33 - Protection against the harmful effects

of circuits operating at different
voltages.

Read AS 3000 Rule 1.4.128

1. List the voltage range of extra-low voltage

2. List the voltage range of low voltage

3. List the voltage range of high voltage

Page 46 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 34 - Protection against the harmful effects

of circuits operating at different
voltages.

Read AS 3000 Rule 1.5.11.2

1. List two methods of

protection against the a) __________________________________
harmful effects of circuits
operating at different
voltages. b) __________________________________

Page 47 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Topic 14 - Protection against injury from mechanical

movement.

Activity - 35 - Protection against injury from

mechanical movement.

Read AS 3000 Rule 1.5.13

1. List two situations where

protection against a) __________________________________
mechanical injury would be
required.
b) __________________________________

Activity - 36 - Emergency Switching.

Read AS 3000 Rule 2.3.5.1

1. List 3 situations where an

emergency stop would be a) __________________________________
required.

b) __________________________________

b) __________________________________

Page 48 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 37 - Shutting down for mechanical

maintenance.

Read AS 3000 Rule 2.3.6.1

1. List 3 types of electrical

equipment that require a a) __________________________________
means of shutting down for
mechanical maintenance.
b) __________________________________

c) __________________________________

Activity - 38 - Shutting down for mechanical

maintenance.

Read AS 3000 Rule 2.3.6.3

1. List three devices that may

be used as a means of a) __________________________________
shutting down for
mechanical maintenance.
b) __________________________________

c) __________________________________

Page 49 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Topic 15 - Integrity of fire rated construction.

Activity - 39 - Fire rated construction and integrity.

Read AS 3000 Rule 1.5.12

1. Electrical equipment shall

be selected, installed and a) __________________________________
protected such that the
equipment will not—.
b) __________________________________

c) __________________________________

d) __________________________________

Activity - 40 - Fire protective measures

Read AS 3000 Rule 2.10.7

1. What should be done with

openings greater than 5 mm
of free space in switch
boards?

Page 50 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 41 - Penetration of fire barriers.

Read AS 3000 Rule 3.9.9.3

1. Where a wiring system passes through

elements of building construction, that is
required to be fire-rated, what is the
maximum permitted size of the opening for a
circular cable?

2. What must be done internally to conduits

that pass through elements of building
construction?

Activity - 42 - Building Code Australia

Read AS 3000 clause E2.1

Page 51 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Tutorial - Section 1
In the following statements one of the suggested answers is best.

1. What maximum disconnection time does AS/NZS 3000 specify for a final sub-
circuit supplying a fixed cooking appliance (free-standing range)?
(a) 30 milliseconds.
(b) 40 milliseconds.
(c) 0.4 second.
(d) 5 seconds.

2. Which of the following methods provides protection against indirect contact?

(a) Obstacles.
(b) Secure barriers.
(c) Placing out of reach.
(d) Automatic disconnection of the supply.

3. Arms reach is what vertical distance (↕) above a surface that a person may
stand on:

(a) 0.5m
(b) 0.75.
(c) 1.25m
(d) 2.5m

4. Arms reach is what horizontal distance (↔) from a surface that a person may
stand on:

(a) 0.5m
(b) 0.75.
(c) 1.25m
(d) 2.5m

5. The minimum permissible voltage measured at the load terminals of a 230V

appliance is:

(a) 218.5V
(b) 230V
(c) 11.5V
(d) 225V

Page 52 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

6. A method of protecting against direct contact is:

(a) using Class 1 equipment

(b) installing an RCD
(c) automatic disconnection of supply
(d) placing equipment out of arms reach

7. The maximum disconnection time specified for protection against indirect

contact for a final sub circuit supplying socket outlets is:

(a) unspecified.
(b) 100ms.
(c) 400ms.
(d) 5s.

8. What is the maximum allowable prospective touch voltage before a protective

device must automatically disconnect the supply for circuits supplying hand
held equipment?

(a) 32Vac.
(b) 50Vac.
(c) l00Vac.
(d) 240V ac.

9. It is normal to divide an electrical installation into a number of circuits. One

reason for this is to:

(a) Maximise the number of cables used.

(b) Minimise the number of cables used.
(c) Allow for the use of a single cable size.
(d) Minimise the inconvenience in the event of a fault.

10. One method for determining the size of consumer’s mains and sub-mains of
an electrical installation is:

(a) Location of points.

(b) Safe design and construction.
(c) Demand of devices for isolation.
(d) Measuring the highest rate of electricity in any 15 minute period.

Page 53 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

11. The two points in an electrical installation from where the maximum
permissible voltage drop is considered:

(a) Is between any two points in the installation.

(b) Is between the point of supply and the main switchboard.
(c) Is between the point of supply and any other point in the installation.
(d) Is between the main switchboard and the furthermost final sub-circuit.

12. The term ‘direct contact’ refers to:

(a) touching a live uninsulated conductor or busbar.

(b) contact with an exposed conductive part which is not normally live,
but is live due to a fault.
(c) touching another person who is in contact with the supply.
(d) contact with exposed metal which is earthed.

13. The limit to circuit lengths, as set down in AS 3000, is required:

(a) to keep the cost of electrical installations as low as possible.

(b) to limit the voltage drop in the circuit.
(c) because shorter cable runs are the easier to install
(d) for protection against the danger of indirect contact

14. Which of the following methods does not provide protection against direct
contact?

(a) obstacles.
(b) secure barriers.
(c) placing out of reach.
(d) circuit breakers and fuses.

15. An example of a situation where a emergency stop is required is a:

(a) Lathe
(b) Hot Water System
(c) Sub main
(d) Lighting circuit

Page 54 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

16. Specify the four (4) acceptable methods of protection against indirect contact.

(a) _______________________________________________

(b) _______________________________________________

(c) _______________________________________________

(d) _______________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________)

17. List three factors to consider when designing an electrical installation.

(a) ________________________________________________

(b) ________________________________________________

(c) ________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

18. Live parts are to be protected against direct contact by enclosures or barriers.

(a) What is the minimum degree of protection that must be provided by

the enclosures or barrier?
________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

(b) What is the maximum size of an object that is allowed to enter the
enclosure or barrier?

_________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

Page 55 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

19. List three factors that aid in determining the number and type of circuits
needed in an electrical installation.

(a) ________________________________________________

(b) ________________________________________________

(c) ________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

20. List four methods of determining the maximum demand of a consumer main.

(a) ________________________________________________

(b) ________________________________________________

(c) ________________________________________________

(d) ________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

21. List two of the essential requirements for the selection and installation of
electrical equipment.

(a) ________________________________________________

(b) ________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

22. What are the requirements regarding protecting a redundant cable against
induced voltages?

______________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

Page 56 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

23. List two of methods of protecting against the harmful effects of abnormal
voltages for electrical equipment of different rated voltages.

(a) ________________________________________________

(b) ________________________________________________

AS/NZS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

24. When protecting electrical actuated equipment against injury from mechanical
movement, what is the protection device required to do?

______________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

25. What is the maximum size hole aloud to be made if a single cable is required
to penetrate a fire rated wall?

____________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

Page 57 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Page 58 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 2 - Final sub-circuit arrangements

Topics

• Daily and seasonal demand

• Factors determining number and type of

circuits

• Circuit layouts/schedules

Aim
Learners will plan the cable arrangements for final sub-circuits in a variety of
installations.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 Determine the daily and seasonal demand for lighting,

power, heating and other loads in a given installation.

 Determine the number and types of circuits required

for a particular installation.

 Determine the current requirements for given final

sub-circuits.

 Prepare a layout/schedule of circuits for given

installations.

Page 59 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations. installations.

Topic 1 - Maximum demand of final sub-circuits

Maximum demand is the maximum expected current that may be drawn by a
particular circuit at any given time. For single items of equipment it is set by
assessment of the connected load. In light and power circuits, or other circuits
with more than one point per final sub-circuit, the maximum demand of a final
sub-circuit is set by limitation (clause C2.5.1). The purpose of the final sub-
circuit will determine the number of points that may be connected to that final
sub-circuit.

In section 1 we learned that load in an installation is divided into a number of

circuits logically arranged to group loads of a similar type onto the same circuit.
The more load connected to a single circuit the higher the demand will be, light
and power circuits tend to have a large number of points connected to a single
circuit. This reduces the cost of the installation. If too much load is connected at
the same time the circuit protection device will operate, automatically
disconnecting the circuit. Circuits for appliances such air conditioning, hotplates
and hot water systems are arranged so that each appliance is on its own separate
final sub-circuit for maintenance and testing purposes.

The key to circuit design is to limit the number of lights or socket outlets on the
one circuit so the circuit protection device does not trip, while still using the
minimum number of circuits to keep installation cost to a minimum. Table C9
gives guidance to the recommended number of points per final sub-circuit.

Daily Demand - different types of installations will use power in different ways.
For example socket outlets installed in a domestic installation may rarely ever be
used, but in a non-domestic installation such as a factory, the socket outlet is
probably installed for a purpose and will most likely be in use frequently. For the
circuit to function correctly as intended the number of points per final sub-circuit
will be less in the factory.

Seasonal Demand - the demand of circuits that supply appliances such as air
conditioner will very throughout the year. Most A/C units use more current to
heat than to cool. The higher current must be taken as the maximum demand.

Connected load - is the actual current drawn by the circuit with no “diversity”
applied. It can be found on the compliance plate of an appliance or calculated
using the power equation transposed to find current;

Single phase appliances use Three phase appliances use

where
I = Current in Amperes IL = Line current in Amperes
V = Voltage in Volts VL = Line voltage in Volts
λ = power factor λ = power factor

Page 60 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

In circuits with only one point per circuit this current becomes the maximum
demand of the circuit.

Activity - 1 – Calculating current from power

Determine the current drawn by a 230 Volt, 2.0 kW

single HID luminare operating at a rated power factor of
0.85.

_______________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________

Activity - 2 – Calculating current from power

Determine the line current drawn by a 400 Volt, 40 kW

three phase kiln.(resistive load)

_______________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________

Page 61 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations.

Topic 2 - Number and type of final sub-circuits

Activity - 3 - Number of points per f.s.c.

Read AS3000 2018
 Rule C.5.1
 Table C9
 footnotes to Table C9

1. A House wired using T.P.S. cable has the following

load installed.
32 lights (10A C.B.)
24 Double 10A Socket Outlets (20A C.B.)
1 25A A/C (25A C.B.)
1 4.4 kW Hot Water System (20A C.B.)
Complete the table below

Circuit Purpose Protection Number of

number Device / points per
Rating (A) circuit

Page 62 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 4 - Number of points per f.s.c.

1. A shop is wired using T.P.S. cable has the following
load installed
44 - lights (20A C.B.)
21 - 10A Socket Outlets (20A C.B.)
Complete the table below

Circuit Purpose Protection Number of

number Device / points per
Rating (A) circuit

Page 63 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 5 - Number of points per f.s.c.

1. A 3 phase factory unit is wired using T.P.S. cable has
the following load installed
10 Hi-bay MV lights rated at 1.85 A each (16A C.B.)
12 10A Socket Outlets (20A C.B.)
3 three phase 32 A Socket Outlets (32A C.B.)
Complete the table below

Circuit Purpose Protection Number of

number Device / points per
Rating (A) circuit

Page 64 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Domestic Cooking Appliances

Cook tops, stoves ovens and hotplates in domestic installations are allowed some
diversity in calculation of their maximum demand. When the elements of are
energised they heat up, within a couple of minutes the temperature controllers
operate and begin to cycle the elements on and off. Not all of the elements will be
on or off at the same time the current drawn by the appliance will be less than
the rating on the name plate. A lower current is given for the maximum demand
to reduce installation cost. Even if all elements are switched on at the same time
the circuit protection device will take time to operate. The current flowing is only
a small overload in relation to the nominal rating of the protection device and the
cable it protects. In other words by the time the circuit breaker is about to trip
the temperature controllers start to cycle the elements and current drops to a
value that will not operate the protection or damage the conductors.

Activity - 6 - Maximum demand of cooking

appliances

Using Table C5 of AS 3000

List the assessed maximum demand from table C5 and calculate the current from
the connected load for each load below.

1. Not greater than 5000W.

2. 5000W to 8000W

3. 8000W to 10000W

Note Table C5 does not apply to cooking appliances in non-domestic installations.

Page 65 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 3 - Current requirements of final sub-circuits

To protect conductors from overload and short circuit faults protection devices
such as circuit breakers or H.R.C. fuses are used. They must be able to carry the
maximum demand continuously without operation, and still be able to detect an
overload or short circuit and disconnect the circuit before the circuit conductors
are damaged.

Activity - 7 - Devices for protection against both

overload and short circuit.

Read AS 3000 Rule 2.5.2

List 4 circuit protection devices

suitable to protect against both a) _________________________________
overload and short circuit
conditions
b) _________________________________

c) _________________________________

d) _________________________________

Can a rewireable fuse to protect

against overload and short circuit
conditions? Yes/No

Page 66 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

When selecting the circuit protection device (C.B.) it is important to remember

the protection device protects the cable not the load. Clause 2.5.3.1 provides the
statement;

where
IB = the maximum demand current in Amperes
IN = the nominal current of the protective device
Iz = the current capacity of the conductor.

Activity - 8 - Coordination between conductors

and protective devices

Read AS 3000 Rule 2.5.3.1

Below are a number of load, circuit breaker and cable rating

combinations. Do the following circuits comply with clause 2.5.3.1?

Maximum Protective Conductor current Complies

demand device rating carrying capacity
Yes/No
IB IN IZ

10A 10A 10A

18A 10A 13A

32A 25A 33A

40A 63A 40A

Page 67 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

If the circuit satisfies the equation IB≤IN≤IZ it will not operate the circuit
protection under normal load. (Will it work?) See figure 1.

To ensure the circuit protection will operate in the case of an over current we use
the equation;

where
I2 = the current ensuring effective operation of the protective
device (operates in 1 hour) as shown in figure 1.
C.B.’s 1.45 x IZ, fuses 1.6 x IZ
Iz = the current capacity of the conductor.

Where the protection is a circuit breaker, if the equation IB≤IN≤IZ is true, so will
this equation and the circuit will trip under over current conditions.

I2

figure 1.- source www.clipsal.com

If a H.R.C. fuse is the protection device, the cable rating (IZ) must be de-rated to
90% of its original capacity eg. if the cable was originally rated at 20 Amperes the

Page 68 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

cable would only have a current caring a capacity of 18 Amperes (IZ x 0.9) after it
had been de-rated. Once de-rated IN is not less than IZ.
To ensure the fuse will operate in the case of an over current we use the
equation;

where
IB = the maximum demand current in Amperes
IN = the nominal current of the protective device
Iz = the current capacity of the conductor.

Page 69 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 9 - Coordination between conductors

and protective devices (fuse)

Below are a number of load, fuse and cable rating combinations. Do

the following circuits comply with clause 2.5.3.1?

Maximum Protective Conductor current Complies

demand device rating carrying capacity
Yes/No
IB IN IZ

10A 10A 10A

18A 20A 21A

32A 32A 36A

16A 12A 16A

To determine the minimum current carrying capacity of a conductor protected by

a H.R.C. fuse use the equation;

where
Iz = the current capacity of the conductor.

Page 70 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

IN = the nominal current of the protective device.

D.R = the de-rating factor that applies to fuse protection (0.9)
Note: the de-rating factor for a C.B. is 1

Activity - 10 - De-rating factors

List the required current carrying capacity of conductors protected by the

following protection devices

Protection (IN) De-rating Current carrying capacity (IZ)

1. 20A C.B.

2. 20A H.R.C. fuse

3. 32A C.B.

4. 32A H.R.C. fuse

5. 40A H.R.C. fuse

Cable Selection
When a conductor carries an electric current work is done to overcome the
resistance of the conductor, as a result heat is produced. If the temperature rise
in the cable exceeds safe limits the insulation of the cable will be permanently
damaged.

Page 71 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 11 - Current Carrying Capacity

Read AS 3000 clause 3.4.1

Activity - 12 - Operating temperature limits

Read AS 3000 Rule 3.4.2 and Table 3.2

Normal Maximum

1. What is the normal and maximum use

temperature for V75 cable?

2. What is the normal and maximum use

temperature for V90 cable?

3. What is the normal and maximum use

temperature for X90 cable?

A simplified cable and protection device selection process is shown in tables C6

and C7 of AS 3000. These tables show how to select cables and circuit breakers
to suit a number of installation conditions, for cables ranging from 1.00 mm2 to
25.0 mm2. In later sections we will examine AS 3008.1.1 (2017) which provides
more detailed current ratings for a large range of cables and cross sectional
areas.

Installation Conditions - the environment into which a cable is installed will

affect the current carry capacity of that cable. Cables installed in thermal
insulation will be unable to transfer heat into the air, as a result the cable will
retain heat and have a much lower current rating that that of cable installed in air
or in underground situations.

Page 72 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 13 - Circuit protection and cable selection

Using Table C6 AS 3000

1. What is the maximum rating of a C.B. protecting a

2.5mm2 cable installed in air?

2. What is the maximum rating of a C.B. protecting a

2.5mm2 cable installed partially surrounded by
thermal insulation?

3. What is the maximum rating of a C.B. protecting a

2.5mm2 cable installed enclosed in an underground
conduit?

4. What is the maximum rating of a C.B. protecting a

4.0 mm2 cable installed enclosed in air.

5. What is the maximum rating of a C.B. protecting a

6.0 mm2 cable installed completely surrounded by
thermal insulation?

Page 73 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 14 - Circuit protection and cable selection

Using Table C7 AS 3000

1. What is the maximum rating of a C.B. protecting a

2.5mm2 four core and earth, circular cable installed
enclosed in air?

2. What is the maximum rating of a C.B. protecting a

4.0 mm2 four core and earth, circular cable installed
in air?

3. What is the maximum rating of a C.B. protecting a

6.0 mm2 four core and earth, circular cable installed
enclosed in the ground?

4. What is the maximum rating of a C.B. protecting a

4.0 mm2 cable installed enclosed in air?

5. What is the maximum rating of a C.B. protecting a

10.0 mm2 cable installed completely surrounded by
thermal insulation?

When selecting cable cross sectional areas (c.s.a) the size must be both cost
effective and practical. A power circuit wired in 6.0 mm2 will be impossible to
terminate. Table C6 is used to select the cable c.s.a. and circuit protection. Table
C9 is then used to determine the number of points per final sub-circuit.

For 3 phase circuits table C7 is used to select circuit protection ratings for given
cable cross sectional areas.

Page 74 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 15 - Final sub-circuit design

A single phase house is wired using T.P.S.
cable has the following load installed

 Complete the table below

22 - Light points wiring installed clipped to timbers in the roof

24 - Double 10A Socket Outlets wiring installed clipped to timbers in the roof
1 - 15A socket outlet for a split system A/C wiring installed clipped to
timbers in the roof.
1 - 6.0 kW cook top wiring installed clipped to timbers under the floor
1 - 3.9 kW wall oven wiring installed clipped to timbers under the floor
1 - 4.4 kW storage H.W.S. wiring installed enclosed in conduit in air.

Circuit Purpose Cable Protection Number of

number C.S.A. Device / points per
Rating (A) circuit

Page 75 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 16 - Final sub-circuit design

A three phase house is wired using T.P.S. cable
and orange circular has the following load
installed
 Complete the table below

48 - Light points wiring installed clipped to timbers in the roof.

30 - Double 10A Socket Outlets wiring installed clipped to timbers in the roof.
2 - 3 in one Fan/heat lamps (4 x 275 W) clipped to timbers in the roof.
1 - 18A 3 Φ ducted A/C wiring installed enclosed in conduit in air.
1 - 7.8 kW 1 Φ range wiring installed clipped to timbers under the floor
1 - 22.0 kW 3 Φ spa heater, wiring installed enclosed in conduit in air.
1 - 3.6 kW Sauna wiring installed clipped to timbers in the roof
1 - 4.4 kW storage H.W.S. wiring installed enclosed in conduit in air.

Circuit Purpose Cable Protection Number of

number C.S.A. Device / points per
Rating (A) circuit

Page 76 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 16 - Final sub-circuit design (cont’d)

Circuit Purpose Cable Protection Number of

number C.S.A. Device / points per
Rating (A) circuit

10

Page 77 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 17 - Final sub-circuit design

A three phase factory unit is wired using T.P.S.
and orange circular cable, has the following
load installed
 Complete the table below

16 - MH Hi-bay Lights (1.25A each) split over two circuits unenclosed in air.
24 - Twin 36W Fluorescent lights (0.333 A each) unenclosed in air.
15 - 10A double socket outlets wiring installed enclosed in conduit in air.
3 - 32A 3 Φ socket outlets wiring installed enclosed in conduit in air.
1 - Hard wired machine 54A / phase installed enclosed in conduit in air.
2 - Hard wired machines 34A / phase enclosed in conduit in air.
1 - 4.4 kW H.W.S. wiring installed enclosed in conduit in air.

Circuit Purpose Cable Protection Number of

number C.S.A. Device / points per
Rating (A) circuit

Page 78 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 17 - Final sub-circuit design (cont’d)

Circuit Purpose Cable Protection Number of

number C.S.A. Device / points per
Rating (A) circuit

10

Page 79 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations.
Topic 4 - Final sub-circuit schedules and layouts.
Circuit schedules are used to detail which protection device controls which circuit. An
example is shown in figure 2.
Installation By: Electric Electricians
Phone: 0414 123 456
Sub Board No.: DB-Garage (60 pole)
Fed From: Main Switchboard C.B.20
Cable Size: 25mm 4 x 1c XLPE/PVC + E
Pos. Amps Designation Pos. Amps Designation
1 32 Lighting Distribution Board No. 01 (Kitchen Pantry) 2 20 Spare
3 32 Lighting Distribution Board No. 01(Kitchen Pantry) 4 20 Spare
5 32 Lighting Distribution Board No. 01 (Kitchen Pantry) 6 20 Spare
7 32 Lighting Distribution Board No. 02 (First Floor Study) 8 20 Kitchen – Dishwasher GPO (RCD)
9 32 Lighting Distribution Board No. 02(First Floor Study) 10 20 Kitchen – Steam Oven GPO (RCD)
11 32 Lighting Distribution Board No. 02 (First Floor Study) 12 20 Kitchen – Microwave GPO (RCD)
13 25 10 HP Daikin Air Conditioning Unit No. 01 14 20 Kitchen – Bench GPO’s (RCD)
15 25 10 HP Daikin Air Conditioning Unit No. 01 16 20 Spare
17 25 10 HP Daikin Air Conditioning Unit No. 01 18 20 Ground Floor – General GPO’s (RCD)
19 25 10 HP Daikin Air Conditioning Unit No. 02 20 20 Ground Floor – General GPO’s (RCD)
21 25 10 HP Daikin Air Conditioning Unit No. 02 22 20 Ground Floor – Home Theatre GPO’s (RCD)
23 25 10 HP Daikin Air Conditioning Unit No. 02 24 20 Ground Floor – Garage GPO’s (RCD)
25 20 Sauna Heater – Squash Area 26 20 Ground Floor – Squash GPO’s (RCD)
27 20 Sauna Heater – Squash Area 28 20 Spare
29 20 Sauna Heater – Squash Area 30 20 First Floor – General GPO’s (RCD)
31 20 Spare TP MCB 32 20 First Floor – General GPO’s (RCD)
33 20 Spare TP MCB 34 20 Spare
35 20 Spare TP MCB 36 20 Front Gate – GPO (RCD)
37 20 1 x 3.6kW Heat Pump Hot Water Unit (Squash) 38 20 Pool – GPO’s (RCD)
39 32 Kitchen – Electric Induction Cook-top 40 20 First Floor – Spa GPO (RCD)
41 25 Kitchen – Electric Wall Oven 42 20 Tennis Court Future – GPO’s (RCD)
43 44 20 Spare
45 10 Dimmer 1 (RCD) 46 20 Spare
47 10 Dimmer 2 (RCD) 48 20 Spare
49 10 Dimmer’s 3 & 4. (RCD) 50
51 10 Dimmer’s 5 & 15. (RCD) 52
53 10 Relay 1 (RCD) 54
55 10 Relay 2 (RCD) 56
57 10 Relay 3 (RCD) 58
59 10 Relay’s 7, 8 & 9. (RCD) 59

figure 2.

Page 80 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 18 - Final sub-circuit schedule

Complete a schedule of circuits for the
house used in activity 15.

Pos. Amps Designation Pos. Amps Designation

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

24 26

25 28

Page 81 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 19 - Final sub-circuit schedule

Complete a schedule of circuits for the
house used in activity 16.

Pos. Amps Designation Pos. Amps Designation

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

25 26

27 28

Page 82 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial - Section 2
1. Which of the following considerations is not necessary in determining the number
and type of circuits within an electrical installation?

(a) Load on the various circuits.

(b) Location of the points or load.
(c) Exposure to external influences.
(d) Seasonal and daily variations of demand

2. A final sub-circuit of 230 volt 10 ampere socket outlets is wired in 2.5mm2 two
core and earth TPS cable installed laid flat on the ceiling of a domestic installation
covered by thermal insulation batts. The maximum current rating of the type C
circuit breaker protecting the circuit would be:

(a) 10A.
(b) 16A.
(c) 20A.
(d) 25A.

3. When selecting a circuit breaker for a water heater final sub-circuit, its current
rating should be:

(a) equal to or less than the demand of the final sub-circuit and equal to or
less than the cable rating
(b) equal to or greater than the demand of the final sub-circuit and equal to or
less than the cable rating
(c) equal to or less than the demand of the final sub-circuit and equal to or
greater than the cable rating
(d) equal to or greater than the demand of the final sub-circuit and equal to or
greater than the cable rating.

4. A separate final sub-circuit is recommended for any single point of load

exceeding;

(a) 16A.
(b) 20A.
(c) 25A.
(d) 32A.

Page 83 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

5. What is the term used in AS/NZS 3000 to describe the maximum demand current
for which a circuit is designed?

(a) IN
(b) IZ
(c) ISC
(d) lB

6. Under normal operating conditions, what is the maximum permissible

temperature of a V75 insulated, 2.5mm2, TPS cable?

(a) 90° C
(b) 160° C
(c) 75° C
(d) 250° C

7. Under normal operating conditions, what is the maximum permissible

temperature of a V90 insulated, 2.5mm2, TPS cable?

(a) 90° C
(b) 160° C
(c) 75° C
(d) 250° C

8. What de-rating factor is applied to a cable protected by a HRC fuse?

(a) 0.707.
(b) 0.8.
(c) 0.9.
(d) No de-rating required.

9. The recommended number of lighting points that can be connected to a circuit

wired in 1.0 mm2 TPS cable and protected by a 6A type C circuit breaker in a
domestic installation is:

(a) 10
(b) 12
(c) 20
(d) unlimited

Page 84 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

10. The recommended number of double 10A socket outlets that can be connected to
a circuit wired in 2.5 mm2 TPS cable and protected by a 20A type C circuit breaker
in a factory without air conditioning is:

(a) 5
(b) 10
(c) 20
(d) unlimited

11. A house contains

 22 x lighting points protected by a 10 A C.B

 16 x double 10 A S/O’s protected by a 20 A C.B.
 1 x 15 A S/O for a clothes drier protected by a 20 C.B.
 1 x 13 A A/C unit protected by a 20 C.B
 1 x 800 W heat pump HWS. protected by a 20 C.B

Determine the number of circuits and the number of point per final sub-circuit
required.

Circuit Purpose / load Protection Number of

number Device / points per
Rating circuit
(A)

Page 85 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

12. For the house in tutorial question 11 complete a circuit schedule;

Pos. Amps Designation Pos. Amps Designation

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

Page 86 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

13. A factory unit contains

 10 x 400 W hi-bay lights rated at 2.08 A each protected by 16 A C.B.’s

 12 x single 10A S/O’s protected by 20 A C.B.s
 4 x 15A 3 phase S/O protected by 20 A C.B.’s.
 4 x 20A 3 phase S/O protected by 20 A C.B.’s.
 2 x 32A 3 phase S/O protected by 32 A C.B.’s.
Determine the number of circuits and the number of point per final sub-circuit
required.

Circuit Purpose / load Protection Number of

number Device / points per
Rating circuit
(A)

Page 87 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

14. For the factory in tutorial question 13 complete a circuit schedule;

Pos. Amps Designation Pos. Amps Designation

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

31 32

33 34

35 36

Page 88 of 489
UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 89 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 3 - Factors Affecting the Suitability of

Wiring Systems

Topics
• Construction methods

• Installation conditions

• External influences

• Selecting wiring systems

Aim
Learners will plan the cable arrangements for final sub-circuits in a variety of
installations.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 Identify wiring systems typically used with various

construction methods and particular environments.

 Describe the installation conditions that may affect the

current-carrying capacity of cables.

 Explain the external influences that may affect the

current-carrying capacity and/or may cause damage to the
wiring system.

 Apply the AS/NZS 3000 requirements for selecting wiring systems for a range
of circuits, installation conditions and construction methods into which the
wiring system is to be installed.

Note: Wiring systems include cable enclosures, underground wiring, aerial

wiring, catenary support, safety services, busbar, trunking and earth sheath
return.

Page 90 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Introduction
When selecting a wiring system (which includes cabling and enclosures or supports)
consideration must be given to:-
 the degree of support present or required in the building;
 fire protective measures, in lift or fire fighting equipment;
 reliability of connections, or ease of changing connections or position of
equipment;
 mutual detrimental influences, ie the effect of one cable on another cable;
 the protection required against external influences,
 selection of cable sizes to suit

o current requirements of the circuit,

o voltage drop considerations,

o and fault loop impedance;

 cost.

Activity - 1 - Cable selection and installation.

Read AS 3000 clause 3.1.2

Page 91 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 1 - Construction Methods

Whether the building is timber, steel, aluminium or concrete, and what its function is,
will affect the wiring system chosen. As an example, the type of wiring used in a
prefabricated steel structure, such as a temporary field maintenance workshop would
differ from that supplying similar equipment permanently installed in a concrete
building.

The method of construction used will be set by the purpose and budget of the building
under construction. Typical construction methods are;

Domestic

 timber / steel frame

o brick veneer

o PVC or aluminium clad

 cavity or double brick

 Steel re-enforced concrete slab.

The cavity between frame and cladding or brickwork offers a suitable a medium for
cables such as T.P.S. and orange circular. The cavity provides both a path and
mechanical protection for cables, minimising installation cost and improving the
finished appearance. In double brick construction it will be necessary to “chase” cables
into walls.

Industrial and commercial (non-domestic)

 pre cast - the steel re-enforcing is tensioned prior to pouring concrete into
removable formwork. Tensioning gives the structure strength.

 post cast - the steel re-enforcing is tensioned after pouring concrete into
removable formwork.

 prefabricated - sections or panels of construction are formed off site and

assembled to suit.

Steel re-enforced beams and column support walls and floors. Walls are; concrete,
brick or besser block. Floors are typically post cast concrete. This method construction
requires careful planning. Conduits must be installed prior to the concrete pour.
Provisions for “cable risers” must be included in the buildings initial design. A wiring
system should be selected to take advantage of any mechanical protection or
concealment the building construction method has to offer.

Page 92 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 2 - Installation conditions

The method used to install wiring must be suitable to the type of wiring selected and
the environment in which it is installed. Naturally not all wiring systems are suitable
for any environment; reductions in current carrying capacities (de-ratings) may also
result of the installation method. If more than 1 circuit is grouped with other
circuits de-rating of all cables in the group is required.

Activity - 2 - Installation conditions.

Read AS 3000 Table 3.1

Give examples of cables installed;

Unenclosed
 On a surface
 On a surface partly surrounded
by thermal insulation
 On a surface fully surrounded
by thermal insulation
 Buried direct in the ground

In an enclosure
 On a surface
 On a surface and partly
surrounded by thermal
insulation
 Fully surrounded by thermal
insulation
 Underground,

Supported on a catenary system

Supported on insulators

Page 93 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 3 - External Influences

Activity - 2 - External Factors.

Read AS 3000 section 3.3

1. List 12 External factors that need

to be considered in the design of a) ______________________________
an electrical installation.
b) ______________________________

c) ______________________________

d) ______________________________

e) ______________________________

f) ______________________________

g) ______________________________

h) ______________________________

i) ______________________________

j) ______________________________

k) ______________________________

l) ______________________________

2. What is the ambient temperature

for cables installed in air?

3. What is the ambient temperature

for cables installed underground?

Page 94 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

All equipment including wiring systems, must comply with the requirements of Clause
1.7 of AS/NZS 3000; that is, the equipment itself must be safe in design and
construction, including its proper assembly and installation. Equipment must also be
able to function properly in the environment in which it is installed and not cause any
damaging effect on the electrical installation, or the premises in which it is installed.
There is no universal wiring system for all applications, but there is usually one
system that is the best, or most suitable for a particular application, after considering
all technical and economic aspects.

Topic 4 - Selecting Wiring Systems

Wiring systems are a combination of the cable type, supports and were required the
enclosure that protects the cable. Table 3.1 AS3000 shows common combinations. Not
all cable types are suitable for use with all enclosures/supports.

Activity - 3 - Wiring system selection

Read AS 3000 table 3.1

1. List 6 commonly used

cable types a) _____________________________________

b) _____________________________________

c) _____________________________________

d) _____________________________________

e) _____________________________________

f) _____________________________________

Table 3.2 AS 3000 shows a selection of insulation types for commonly used cable
types.

Page 95 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 4 - Wiring system selection

Read AS 3000 section 3.10.1

Enclosed Cables

Clause 3.10.1 AS3000 states, “insulated, unsheathed cables shall be enclosed in a

wiring enclosure throughout their entire length.” TPI cables (building wire) must be
enclosed in conduit or similar enclosure, to provide double insulation, mechanical
protection, and cable support.

Activity - 5 - Wiring system selection

Read AS 3000 section 3.10.1

1. List 5 exceptions where

unsheathed (single a) _____________________________________
insulated) cables may be
installed without a wiring
enclosure b) _____________________________________

c) _____________________________________

d) _____________________________________

e) _____________________________________

Page 96 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Applications

 TPI cables enclosed in conduit in cement slabs and walls.

 TPI cables enclosed in conduit or trunking on surfaces.

Activity - 6 - types of wiring enclosures

Read AS 3000 section 3.10.2.1

1. List 3 wiring enclosures

suitable for use with single
a) ___________________________________
insulated cable.

b) ___________________________________

c) ___________________________________

2. List 4 types of conduit.

a) ___________________________________

b) ___________________________________

c) ___________________________________

d) ___________________________________

While TPI cables in most cases always require some form of enclosure T.P.S. cables in
most cases do not. However where T.P.S. cables are “likely to be disturbed”
mechanical protection is required when they are run on the surface of a wall or on the
underside of a ceiling or roof.

Page 97 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 7 - Wiring systems likely to be disturbed

Read AS 3000 clause 3.9.3.3

Activity - 8 - Protection against mechanical damage

Read AS 3000 clause 3.9.4.1

Read AS 3000 clause 3.3.2.6

Do T.P.S. cables installed in an area likely to

be disturbed and where they are subject to
mechanical damage, need to be enclosed?

Cables installed within a ceiling are not expected to be subject to mechanical damage
and do not require additional mechanical protection (enclosure).

Un-enclosed Cables

Only cables which are double insulated are suitable for un-enclosed installation.
Cables such as S.D.I. T+E and multicore are suitable for use. As there is no wiring
enclosure, to provide support for the cable devices such as clips, cleats, ladders and
cable tray are used as support. The type of support will depend on the building
construction, where the cables are being installed and the number of cables requiring
support.

Page 98 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 9 - Wiring system support

Read AS 3000 section 3.3.28

Underground cables
Underground cables may be installed either buried direct or in an enclosure. Smaller
conductors are normally enclosed for mechanical protection. The enclosure also allows
for repair or upgrades to larger size or additional number of phases. Larger cables
such as street distribution mains are direct buried to reduce cost. It is unlikely
because of their size that another cable will be “pulled in” as a replacement. Single
insulated or unsheathed cables are not permitted to be installed buried direct.

Activity - 10 - Underground wiring systems

Read AS 3000 rule 3.11.1

Page 99 of 489
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 11 - Underground wiring systems

Read AS 3000 section 3.11.2. Name the category of wiring

system described below

1. The wiring system is inherently suitable for installation below

ground and no further mechanical protection is required.

2. The wiring system is suitable for installation below ground

only with additional mechanical protection provided for the
cable or cable enclosure.

3. The wiring system is laid within a channel chased in the

surface of rock.

Activity - 12 - Underground wiring systems

Read AS 3000 table 3.5

Activity - 13 - Underground wiring systems

Read AS 3000 table 3.6

Page 100 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Aerial cables
To cover large distances at minimal cost an aerial wiring system is used. The types of
cable which are suitable as aerials are listed in AS300 rule 3.12.1.

Activity - 14 - Aerial wiring systems

Read AS 3000 rule 3.12.1

Catenary Wiring Systems

Catenarys are used to support the mass of cables not suitable for aerial wiring. An
orange circular strung between two supports of any distance will not be able to
support its own weight. Depending on the distance it will stretch and possibly even
break. The solution is the catenary support. The requirements for cables in catenary
system are listed in AS300 rule 3.13.1.

Activity - 15 - Catenary wiring systems

Read AS 3000 rule 3.13.1

Is it permissible to use building wire (TPI) in a Catenary

wiring system?

Safety Service Wiring Systems

Formally known as emergency systems electrical safety services supply such
apparatus as;

 fire detection
 warning and extinguishing systems
 smoke control systems
 evacuation systems
 lifts.

Page 101 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Any electrical wiring system what could be described as “emergency equipment” or an

“essential service” is required to maintain supply when exposed to fire. Normal
organic based insulations will fail in a very short period of time in such conditions
cutting power to the safety services when they are most needed. Cables such as
M.I.M.s or Radox are required.

Activity - 16 - Safety services

Read AS 3000 rule 7.2.1.1

Activity - 17 - Safety service wiring systems

Read AS 3000 rule 7.2.2.2.1 and

7.2.2.2.2

What are the requirements for Mains, or

submains, for Safety Services if they do
not have a WS classification?

Activity - 18 - Safety services

Read AS 3000 Tables H1 and H2

Page 102 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 19 - Safety service wiring systems

Read AS 3000 section H2

What is the required WS classification for a wiring system that supplies;

1. Fire and smoke control in buildings.

2. Fire rated ‘fire detection, warning and control circuits’.

3. Sound systems and intercom systems required for

emergency purposes.

Busbar Trunking (Busway) Systems

Busbar trunking has several key advantages over conventional wiring systems. On-
site installation times are reduced compared to hard-wired systems, thus leading to
cost savings. It provides increased flexibility in design and versatility with regard to
future modifications.

Activity - 20 - Busbar Trunking (Busway) Systems

Read AS 3000 Section 3.15

Distribution busbar distributes power along its length through tap-off points along the
busbar at typically at 0.5 or 1 m centres. Tap-off units are plugged in along the length
of the busbar to supply a load; this could be a sub distribution board or, in a factory,
to individual machines. Tap-offs can normally be added or removed with busbar live,
eliminating production down time.

Page 103 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Installed vertically the same systems can be used for rising-mains applications, with
tap-offs feeding individual floors. Certified fire barriers are available at points where
the busbar passes through a floor slab. Protection devices such as fuses, combination
switch fuses or circuit breakers are located along the busbar run, reducing the need
for large distribution boards and the large quantities of distribution cables running to
and from installed equipment.

Busbar trunking systems are used in a variety of applications, including production

plants, workshops, assembly lines, warehouses, distribution centres, supermarkets,
retail outlets etc.
Earth Sheath Return (ESR) Systems
Used with M.I.M.’s cable, a substantial installation cost saving is made by combining
the protective earthing (PE) conductor and the neutral (N) conductor into a single
protective earth neutral (PEN) conductor.

Activity - 21 - Earth Sheath Return wiring systems

Read AS 3000 section 3.16

1. What is a PEN conductor?

2. If unserved ESR conductors

are not run in a trefoil
formation, at what distance
must the sheaths of the
conductors be bonded
together?

3. Is it permissible once an ESR

wiring system has been split
into a protective earthing and
neutral conductor to
recombine the two conductors
back to a ESR system again?

4. Is it possible to protect ESR

circuits with a R.C.D.

Page 104 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Summary of common wiring systems:-

 ‘Aerial conductors’, either bare or insulated, chosen mainly for low cost
reticulation of power over long distances as a cheaper alternative to
underground wiring or catenary systems. Aerial cables used outdoors may be
subject to lightning strike, damage from motor vehicle collisions, termites etc.
and have a poor visual impact on the environment. Section 3.12 and Appendix
D relates to aerial conductors.

 ‘Catenary systems’ use multi-stranded double insulated cables supported on

steel catenary wire. It is commonly used for temporary installations, such as
building sites, to distribute power, or in permanent installations, such as large
exhibition halls, to support cables and luminaires above the ground, or to
support cables in roof spaces above suspended ceilings. Section 3.13 relates to
catenary systems.

 ‘Cable trays’ and ladders are open enclosures, used to support double insulated
and MIMS cables, normally in industrial installations, where other support is
not available (used extensively behind the scenes in the opera house for
example).

 ‘Cable trunking’, which are closed enclosures larger than a conduit which often
form hidden cableways in floors or on walls or ceilings. There are several
proprietary brands of trunking systems available, though the "miniduct" is
really a troughing system (it has a removable lid).

 ‘Troughing’, similar to trunking but with removable lid.

 ‘Busbar trunking systems’, or ‘busways’, is popular in factories or other

installations requiring the flexibility to move equipment around within an
installation without rewiring circuits. Plug in busway forms a type of submain,
with plug in points fitted with protective devices situated above the equipment
they supply. If equipment is moved it is simply unplugged from the old position
and plugged back in at the new location.

 ‘Track systems’, like a mini plug in busway, is often used for flexible lighting
design (track lighting). Section 3.9.7.5 relates to low voltage track systems.

 ‘Underground wiring systems’ are used for the underground distribution of

power in areas where aerial or catenary conductors are not allowed or where
they are considered unsightly. Section 3.11 relates to the three categories of
underground wiring systems and the cable types and enclosures required.

 ‘Under carpet wiring systems’ (Section 3.9.7.6) is installed between the floor
and carpet. It is expensive but requires little disturbance of the building
structure.

 ‘Modular wiring systems’ use pre-connected sections of cables which plug

together on the job, allowing large commercial jobs to be wired and terminated
quickly with minimum use of tools.

 ‘Thermo plastic sheathed’ (TPS) cables are probably the most used wiring
system as it incorporates conductors, insulation and a protective layer in one
convenient, easy to install package. It is used in most domestic installations

Page 105 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

concealed in wall and ceiling spaces, in industrial and commercial installations

on cable tray, catenary support, in ceiling spaces or in troughing systems.

 ‘Conduit systems’, can be either non-metallic or metallic, of the rigid, flexible

or corrugated types, are used to support and protect single or double insulated
cables where the building structure does not provide the support or protection
required. Non-metallic conduit has a high expansion rate. Expansion joints
must be made fitted during installation to allow for the movement of the
conduit with changes in temperature. Steel conduit is more expensive and
takes longer to install but gives better mechanical protection and requires less
support than non-metallic conduit. Steel conduit enclosing single insulated
cables must be earthed.

 ‘MIMS’ (Pyrotenax) and fire rated cables (Radox cable) may be used in higher
temperature areas or for the supply of power to firefighting equipment etc.
(safety services). MIMS cable is sometimes used as a quality wiring system
which is required to have a long life. These cables may be operated at higher
temperatures than other cables but must be segregated from cables of a lower
temperature rating.

Page 106 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial - Section 3
In the following statements one of the suggested answers is best.

1. A cable / wiring system suitable for installation in a concrete slab would be:

(a) Unenclosed TPI cable

(b) Bare MIMS cable
(c) TPI cable enclosed in rigid PVC conduit
(d) Unenclosed TPS cable

2. A suitable wiring system used as sub-mains to a site shed on a construction site

is:

(a) Thermoplastic sheathed cables with catenary.

(b) Flexible insulated conductors.
(c) Polymeric insulated cable
(d) Annealed copper conductors

3. A suitable wiring system used to supply machinery on a factory production line is;

(a) Thermoplastic sheathed cables with catenary.

(b) Busbar trunking (busway)
(c) MIMS cables on a cable tray
(d) TPI conductors in medium duty conduit.

4. A suitable wiring system used as aerial cable without further support is:

(a) Thermoplastic sheathed cables

(b) Flexible insulated conductors
(c) Polymeric insulated cable
(d) Annealed copper conductors

5. A suitable wiring system for supply to a lift is:

(a) V90 SDI cables on cable tray

(b) V75 TPI cables in PVC rigid conduct
(c) MIMS cables on a cable tray
(d) TPS cables sharing the same conduit as power and light circuits.

Page 107 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

6. A suitable wiring system for smoke detectors connected to a fire indicator panel
is:

(a) TPS cable

(b) TPI in steel conduit
(c) Radox cable
(d) XLPE on cable tray

7. A suitable wiring system for sub-main in a factory is:

(a) TPS cable

(b) TPI in steel conduit
(c) Radox cable
(d) XLPE on cable tray

8. A suitable wiring system for light fitting in suspended ceiling of a shopping centre
is:

(a) TPS cable

(b) TPI in steel conduit
(c) Radox cable
(d) XLPE on cable tray.

9. A suitable wiring system for vandal proof light fitting in bus shelter is:

(a) TPS cable

(b) TPS in steel conduit
(c) Radox cable
(d) XLPE on cable tray

10. A suitable wiring system for a sub-main to a detached garage in a domestic

installation is:

(a) TPS cable.

(b) TPI in steel conduit.
(c) TPI in heavy duty conduit.
(d) TPI suspended on a Catenary.

Page 108 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

11. A suitable and cost effective wiring system for irrigation pump on a rural
property is:

(a) Aluminium aerials

(b) TPI in steel conduit.
(c) TPI in heavy duty conduit.
(d) 4 core + earth XLPE orange circular buried direct.

12. What is the minimum depth of cover of a Category A underground wiring system,
external to a building, below natural ground:

(a) 300mm
(b) 500mm
(c) 600 mm
(d) Not permitted

13. A TPS wiring system installed within a PVC conduit in a concrete floor on, or above
the ground would be deemed to have the same current carrying capacity as cables
installed:

(a) Enclosed in air

(b) Buried direct in the ground
(c) Unenclosed in air
(d) Enclosed in underground enclosure.

14. Cables enclosed in heavy-duty conduit, and chased into rock to a depth of not less
than 50 mm, fall into the underground wiring system category of:

(a) Category A
(b) Category B
(c) Category C
(d) Not permitted as underground wiring.

15. When single-insulated wire is installed in trunking / troughing that has a

removable lid:

(a) the cables must be taped together and held in position

(b) the lid must be held in position with cable ties
(c) building wire is not permitted in a duct which has a lid
(d) the lid shall not be removed without a special tool if the duct is readily
accessible.

Page 109 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

16. The minimum height above ground for insulated live aerial conductors over a
roadway is:

(a) 3.0m
(b) 4.6 m
(c) 5.5m
(d) Insulated conductors are not permitted over a roadway

17. Mineral insulated metal sheathed (MIMS) cables, which are buried in the ground
without further enclosure, must be:

(a) protected by a suitable serving

(b) classed as a category A wiring system
(c) protected by a type ‘D’ circuit breaker
(d) buried at a depth of not less than 0.75 metre.

18. In the expression IB ≤ IN ≤ Iz used when co-ordinating cables with circuit

protective devices, the variable IZ is the:

(a) calculated maximum demand current.

(b) continuous current capacity of the cable.
(c) current which gives a maximum 5% voltage drop in the circuit.
(d) 1.45 times the rated current of the circuit breaker.

19. The maximum current rating for a HRC fuse protecting a circuit with a maximum
demand of 20 A and wired with a cable rated at 28 A would be:

(a) 18A.
(b) 20 A.
(c) 25 A.
(d) 28 A.

20. The de-rating factor applied a cable protected by a C.B is:

(a) 1.6
(b) 1.45
(c) 1
(d) 0.9

Page 110 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

21. The minimum current (I2) which would ensure operation of a 20 A single pole
circuit breaker:

(a) 18A.
(b) 20A.
(c) 29A.
(d) 32A.

22. A wiring system for a safety service has a WS classification of WS52. This means
the wiring system can maintain its integrity under fire conditions for;

(a) 52 minutes.
(b) 60 minutes.
(c) 5 hours.
(d) 120 minutes.

23. In Australia the ambient temperature for cables installed in air is;

(a) 90○ C
(b) 75○ C
(c) 40○ C
(d) 25○ C

24. The maximum permitted operating temperature of a V90 insulated conductor in

normal use is;

(a) 90○ C
(b) 75○ C
(c) 40○ C
(d) 25○ C

25. Protection against mechanical damage to a wiring system is provided by:

(a) the location selected.

(b) an R.C.D.
(c) a circuit breaker
(d) a H.R.C. fuse.

Page 111 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 4 - Maximum demand of consumers

mains
Topics

• Determining maximum demand for

domestic consumers mains

Aim
Learners will determine the maximum demand of the consumer’s mains in single and
multiple domestic installations.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 Describe the acceptable methods for determining the maximum demand on an

installation’s consumer’s mains.

 Calculate the maximum demand for the consumer's

mains for given installations up to 400 A per phase.

Page 112 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Introduction
When designing a new electrical installation it is necessary to predict the performance
requirements for all parts of the installation. This is especially so for consumers mains
and sub-mains in an installation, which will have some diversity as all loads may not
be connected at the same time. The methods of determining maximum demand of
consumers mains and sub-mains are outlined in AS/NZS 3000. Figure 1 shows an
example of a typical installation.

Consumers Sub Final

Mains Mains Sub-Circuit
Main Switch Sub Dist
Load
Board Board
Point of
Supply
Final
Sub-Circuit
Load

Sub Final
Mains Sub Dist Sub-Circuit
Board Load

Final
Sub-Circuit
Load

figure 1.

Activity - 1 - Consumers mains definition

Examine N.S.W.S.R Figures 1.1 and 1.2

Figures 1.1 and 1.2 of the NSWSR show various arrangements for overhead and
underground consumer’s mains.

Electrically unprotected consumers mains do not have either a fuse or circuit

breaker fitted at the connection point, or point of supply. These are the vast majority
of installations. Electrically protected consumers mains do have either a fuse or a
circuit breaker fitted at the connection point, or point of supply.

Page 113 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 1 - Methods of determining the maximum demand

The maximum demand of consumers mains (from the consumers terminals to the
main switchboard in the installation) and sub mains (between the main or other
switchboard to distribution boards) is the subject of Clause 2.2.2of AS/NZS 3000 and
may be determined by:-

 measurement (only possible in existing installations);

 calculation, using Appendix C of AS/NZS 3000;

 limitation by fixed current circuit breaker (inconvenient if the c/b trips);

 assessment (used for unusual loads, or installations where the number and
type of loads is not known) (See Table C3)

The supply authority may set minimum cable sizes and types and installation
conditions for consumer’s mains.

Activity - 2 - Underground consumer’s mains

Read N.S.W.S.R 2.3.1 and 2.6.1

What is the minimum C.S.A. and type of insulation

required for unprotected consumer’s mains installed U/G?

Activity - 3 - Over head consumer’s mains

Read N.S.W.S.R 3.3.1, 3.3.2 and 3.4

What is the minimum C.S.A. and type of insulation

required for unprotected consumer’s mains installed O/H?

Page 114 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 2 - Determining the maximum demand of

consumers mains
Calculation of Maximum Demand.

Calculation of maximum demand in consumer mains and sub-mains is the simplest

method of ensuring that minimum adequate cable sizes can be used.

NOTE: For installations supplied by two or three phases:-

 The maximum demand must be calculated for each active conductor

separately;

 The single phase loads must be arranged so that the loads in each phase are
balanced to within specified limits (25 A is the maximum difference allowed by
Clause 1.17.3 of NSW Service & Installation Rules).

 The maximum demand in the consumer’s mains (or sub-mains) is the

maximum demand of the highest loaded active conductor.

Many loads in an installation are not always turned on at the same time or only for
short periods. This means that some 'diversity' can be applied in determining the
maximum demand in consumer mains and sub-mains, allowing mains and sub-mains
to have a maximum demand much less than the total current of all the individual
loads, and cables smaller than that required to carry the total current for all loads.

Load groups and contribution to maximum demand.

When calculating maximum demand in consumer mains and submains:-

 Individual loads are allocated to load groups such as lighting, socket outlets,
cooking ranges etc.;

 Each load group is assessed as contributing a value of current to the maximum

demand, which may be less than the total load ('diversity allowance');

 The assessed contribution to the maximum demand of each load group is given
in Table C1 (domestic installations), Table C2 (non-domestic installations) and
Clause C2.5.2 (welding machines);

 The maximum demand per phase is the sum of the assessed contributions by all
the load groups on that phase supplied by that active conductor.

Note: Determining the maximum demand in consumer’s mains and sub-mains is

different from determining it for the final sub-circuit. Be careful not to get the two
confused. DO NOT USE TABLES C1 or C2 FOR FINAL SUB CIRCUITS. Use Tables C5
and C9.

Page 115 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

The following questions will help you to calculate maximum demand in mains and sub-
mains.

o Is installation domestic or non-domestic:-

 Use Table C1 for domestic installations;

 Use Table C2 for non-domestic installations.
o What loads are to be supplied?

 This information is obtained from job specification and or job plans.

o What equipment is in each load group?

 Equipment in each load group is specified in column 1 of Tables C1 &

C2.
 Footnotes to the tables give additional information on the equipment in
the various load groups
o Is the installation to be supplied with single, two or three phase?

 Local supply authorities stipulate the maximum total load for single and
two phase supplies. For example, single phase for total loads up to
100A, two phase for total load greater than 100A and up to 200A (
maximum 100A per phase) and three phase for total load over 200 A
(split over three phases). An installation is supplied with three phase
where individual three phase loads are installed such as a three phase
motors (multi-phase supply may not be available in some rural areas).

Activity - 4 - Number of phases

Read N.S.W.S.R 1.12.3.3 Table 1.1

What is the minimum kilowatt rating of a motor to require

three phase supply?

o Is the load to be arranged on more than one phase?

 Distribute the loads evenly across all phases.

 This is a preliminary arrangement and may need adjusting after
calculating the maximum demand in each phase.
o What is the contribution of each load group connected to each active
conductor?

Page 116 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

 Calculations must be done separately for each conductor and only for
the loads connected to it. You do not calculate the contribution for all
phases once then divide by three.
 Follow the instructions in column 2 of Table C1 for each load group in
single domestic installations, that is individual houses (consumers
mains) or individual home units in a block (sub mains).
 Follow the instructions in column 3, 4 or 5 of Table C1 for each load
group in multiple domestic installations that is for consumer’s mains in
blocks of home units.
 Follow the instruction in Column 2 of Table C2 for each load group in
non-domestic residential installation such as hospital, hotels etc.
 Follow the instruction in column 3 of Table C2 for each load group in
non-domestic installation such as factories, shops, offices.
o What is the maximum demand in each active conductor?

 Add together the contribution of each load group supplied through the
same active conductor.
o Is the load across all conductors balanced to satisfy the local supply authority?

 If there is a large difference in the maximum demand between any two

active conductors of a multiphase supply, rearrange single phase loads
to balance the load across all active conductors.

Activity - 5 - Balancing of load

Read N.S.W.S.R 1.17.3

What is the maximum difference in current between

phases of a multiphase consumer’s mains?

Page 117 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Single Domestic.

The maximum demand of consumers mains in single domestic premises, or of

individual units (townhouses or villas) in blocks of home units (townhouses or villas) is
calculated using column 2 of Table C1.

Example Calculation 1

Calculate the maximum demand of the single phase consumer’s mains for a single
domestic dwelling (house) with the following loads:-

15 - lighting points;

16 - double 10A sockets outlets (doubles count as 2);

4 - single 10A socket outlets;

1 - 4.4 kW storage type hot water system;

1 - 11.4kW cooking range.

Solution 1

Using Table C1 Column 2:-

Load Load Calculation Demand

Group

A(i) 15 x lights 3A 3.0A

36 x 10A socket
B(i) 10 + 5 = 15A 15.0A
outlets

C 11.4kW range 11,400/230 x 0.5 24.8A

F 4.6kW hot water 4600/230 = 20A 20A

Maximum Demand 62.8A

Page 118 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 6 - Calculation of consumer’s mains

maximum demand
Calculate the maximum demand for the single
domestic installation from section 2
 Complete the table below

22 - Light points
24 - Double 10A Socket Outlets
1 - 15A socket outlet
1 - 6.0 kW cook top
1 - 3.9 kW wall oven
1 - 4.4 kW storage H.W.S.

Load Load Calculation Demand

Group

Maximum Demand

Page 119 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 7 - Calculation of consumer’s mains

maximum demand
Calculate the maximum demand for the single
domestic installation
 Complete the table below

16 - lighting points;
15 - double 10A socket outlets;
2 - single 10A socket outlets;
1 - 4.4 kW controlled load water heater;
1 - 6.0kW oven.

Load Load Calculation Demand

Group

Maximum Demand

Page 120 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 8 - Calculation of consumer’s mains

maximum demand
Calculate the maximum demand for the single
domestic installation
 Complete the table below

38 - lighting points;
6 - 200W exterior lights;
20 - double 10A socket outlets;
3 - single 10A socket outlets;
1 - 230V x 4.4kW twin element, 24 hour off peak hot water system;
1 - 15A socket outlet for a room air conditioner;
1 - 13.5kW cooking range;
1 - 1.1kW 240V pool filter pump rated at 10.5A.

Load Load Calculation Demand

Group

Maximum Demand

Two and three phase installations are calculated in a similar fashion, but the load is
‘balanced’ to within 25A difference between the highest and lowest loaded phases.

Page 121 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 9 - Calculation of consumer’s mains

maximum demand (3 phase)
Calculate the maximum demand for the single domestic
installation from section 2
 Complete the table below

48 - Light points (2 circuits)

30 - Double 10A Socket Outlets (3 circuits)
2 - 3 in one Fan/heat lamps 4 x 275 W heat lamps (1 circuit)
1 - 18A 3 Φ ducted A/C
1 - 7.8 kW 1 Φ range
1 - 22.0 kW 3 Φ spa heater
1 - 3.6 kW sauna
1 - 4.4 kW storage H.W.S.

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

Page 122 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Multiple Domestic.

The maximum demand of consumer mains in multiple domestic premises (blocks of

home units) is calculated using columns 3, 4 or 5 of Table C1. Column 3 is used where
there are between 2 and 5 units per phase in the installation. Column 4 is used for
between 6 and 20 units per phase and column 5 is used for 21 or more units per
phase.

Unit Loads.

Notice in load groups A to C and E to G there is no reference to the number or rating

of loads in individual units in columns 3 to 5, the loading being assigned as either a
fixed value (e.g. 15A total for ranges in load group C, column 3) or assigned values
per unit (e.g. 2.8A/unit for load group C column 4). In load group D (fixed space
heating or air conditioning) the full connected load per phase is required to calculate
the maximum demand component for this load as 0.75 times connected load per
phase (don't forget to multiply by the number of units).

Example Calculation 2

A block of 24 home units is connected across three phases but each unit is supplied
with single phase only. Each unit has the following loads:-

11 - lighting points;

7 - double socket outlets;

3 - single socket outlets;

1 - 15A socket outlet;

1 - 9.2kW range;

1 - 4.4 kW storage water heater.

There is no communal load

Page 123 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Using Table C1 Column 4 (24/3 = 8 units per phase):-

Load Load Calculation Demand

Group

A(i) 11 - lights 5 + (0.25 x 8) 7.0A

B(i) 17 - 10A socket outlets 15 + (3.75 x 8) 45.0A

B(ii) 1 - 15A Outlet 10A 10.0A

C Ranges 2.8 x 8 22.20A

F Hot Water 6x8 48.0A

Maximum demand 132.2A

per phase

As the load is identical on each phase the load is balanced. The c.s.a. of the
consumer’s mains can now be determined using AS 3008.1. Table C6 of AS 3000 does
not specify cable sizes above 25mm2.

Community Loads.

Loads in common areas (foyers, stairwells, community laundries, garages, common

recreational or outdoor areas etc.) are covered in load groups H to M. In large blocks
the community loads may be connected over three phases (due to lifts, fire pumps, air
conditioning in common areas etc.) but in smaller blocks, where the common area
loads are only single phase the supply authority may allow connection of these loads
to single phase only, to reduce the metering required. If this is the case the
number of units per phase may need to be assigned to allow for community loads.

If the communal load is greater than 25A and is to be connected to a single phase,
the number of units per phase cannot be split evenly across the phases. The
communal load is added to the phase with the least number of units connected.

Example.
A block of 24 home units, with 8 units connected per phase, and a community load of
35 amperes would have an out of balance in the maximum demands per phase of 35
amperes, outside the maximum of 25A. If the number of units per phase were
reassigned as 9 units per phase on A and B phases, then 6 units plus community loads
on C phase the balance would be closer.

Page 124 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 10 - Calculation of consumer’s mains

maximum demand (multiple domestic)
Calculate the maximum demand for the multiple domestic
installation.
A group of 4 townhouses are to be connected to a 2 phase
supply, 2 units per phase. Each contains the following load;

18 - Light points
6m - Track lighting
11 - Double 10A Socket Outlets
1 - 6.0 kW 1 Φ range
1 - 15A socket for a clothes dryer
1 - 4.4 kW storage H.W.S.

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

Page 125 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 11 - Calculation of consumer’s mains

maximum demand (multiple domestic)
Calculate the maximum demand for the multiple domestic
installation.
A block of 22 units are to be connected to a 3 phase supply,
the communal load is greater than 25 A. Complete the table
below.

Each contains the following load Community load;

16 - Light points 20 - fluorescent (0.33A each) Car park
16 - Double 10A Socket Outlets 50 - 60W lamps house lights
1 - 6.0 kW cook top 15 - single 10A socket outlets house power
1 - 3.0 kW oven 2 - 15A socket outlets clothes dryers
1 - 4.4 kW storage H.W.S.

No of Units A phase ________ B phase ________ C phase ________

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

Page 126 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial - Section 4
In the following statements one of the suggested answers is best.

1. ONE (1) method for determining the size of consumer mains and sub-mains of an
electrical installation is:

(a) location of points

(b) safe design and construction
(c) demand of devices for isolation
(d) calculation

2. The maximum demand of a final sub-circuit supplying 10A socket outlets in a

domestic installation is set by

(a) location of points

(b) limitation
(c) demand of devices for isolation
(d) calculation

3. The maximum permitted difference between the highest and lowest maximum
demand current flowing in consumers mains is;

(a) 10A
(b) 100A
(c) 25A
(d) 50A

4. The minimum conductor permitted for use as an unprotected consumers main is;

(a) 16mm2 XLPE insulated Cu

(b) 16mm2 PVC insulated Cu
(c) 10mm2 XLPE insulated Cu
(d) 25mm2 PVC insulated Cu

5. The appropriate load group for “house lights” in a block of home units is;

(a) A(i)
(b) A(ii)
(c) B(i)
(d) H

Page 127 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

6. For the purpose of calculating maximum demand, lighting track is regarded as

______ point/s per meter of track

(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4

7. For the purpose of calculating maximum demand of consumers mains, a 96 W

ceiling fan installed 2.3m above the floor is considered as a;

(a) lighting point

(b) Socket outlet
(c) motor
(d) fixed space heating or air condition equipment.

8. For the purpose of calculating maximum demand of consumers mains, 4 x 275W

heat lamps are considered as;

(a) lighting points

(b) a socket outlet
(c) a motor
(d) fixed space heating or air condition equipment.

9. For the purposes of maximum demand of consumers mains, a double 10A socket
outlet is considered as;

(a) a single point.

(b) 2 points.
(c) 3 points.
(d) 4 points.

10. If an installation contains no three phase load, additional phases are not
permitted by the supply authority until the maximum demand exceeds;

(a) 40A
(b) 63A
(c) 80A
(d) 100A

Page 128 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

11. Calculate the maximum demand for the single domestic single phase installation.

32 - lighting points;
3 - 500W flood lights
27 - double 10A socket outlets;
5 - single 10A socket outlets;
1 - 4.4 kW controlled load water heater;
1 - 10.2 kW Range.
1 - 8 A split system Air conditioner

Load Load Calculation Demand

Group

Maximum Demand

Page 129 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

12. 63 town houses are to be connected to a 3 phase supply, Calculate the maximum
demand for the multiple domestic installation.

Each contains the following load Community load;

12 - Light points 48 - Compact fluorescent (0.22A each) for
Car park lighting
11 - Double 10A Socket Outlets
10 - Bollard lights (0.15A each)
1 - 8.0 kW Range
2 - single 10A socket outlets house power
1 - 4.4 kW storage H.W.S.

No of Units A phase ________ B phase ________ C phase ________

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

Page 130 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 131 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 5 - Maximum demand on consumers

mains and sub mains
Topics

• Determining maximum demand for

consumers mains in non-domestic
installations

• Determining maximum demand for sub

mains in domestic and non-domestic
installations

Aim
Learners will be able to determine the maximum demand of the consumer’s mains and
sub mains in a range of installations.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 Describe the acceptable methods for determining the maximum demand on an

installation’s consumer’s mains.

 Calculate the maximum demand for the consumer's

mains for given installations up to 400 A per phase.

 Describe the acceptable methods for determining the maximum demand on

sub mains.

 Calculate the maximum demand for given sub mains

Page 132 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 1 - Calculation of maximum demand

Non Domestic Maximum Demand

When calculation non domestic installations such as factories, shops and offices, table
C2 of AS3000 is used. The load that is installed is more likely to be use more
frequently than in a domestic installation, therefore less diversity is applied. The
contribution to the maximum demand of each load group will be closer to the
connected load.

Example Calculation 1.

Determine the maximum demand of an industrial installation comprising:-

6 - twin x 36W fluorescent lights rated at 0.46A each;

12 - mercury vapour high bay lights rated at 1.8A each;

21 - single phase double 10A socket outlets;

2 - three phase 10A socket outlets;

2 - 15A single phase socket outlets;

2 - three phase 20A socket outlets;

1 - single phase 2.2kW instantaneous water heater;

1 - single phase 3.6kW storage water heater;

1 - three phase 5 kW, 9A compressor;

1 - three phase 4.1 kW, 8A milling machine;

1 - three phase 2.2 kW, 5A lathe;

1 - three phase 370W, 1A pedestal drill;

1 - three phase 560W, 3A grinder;

1 - single phase, 400V electric arc welder rated at 14A.

Page 133 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Solution.

Using Table C2 Column 3 and balancing loads over all phases as much as possible:-

Load Load Calculation A Phase B Phase C Phase

Group

A 6 x 0.46A Fl Lts (C ) 6 x 0.46 = 2.76A (2.8A) 2.8A

A 12 x MV Lts (A & C ) 6 x 1.8 = 10.8A 10.8A 10.8A

12 x 2 x 1 10A S/Os 1000 + (750 x 15)

B(i) 53.3A 53.3A 53.3A
(14/) 230

B(i) 2 x 3 10A S/Os add extra 2 points above

B(iii) 2 x 3 20A S/Os 20 + (0.75 x 20) = 35A 35.0A 35.0A 35.0A

B(iii) 2 x 1 15A S/Os (A & B) (0.75 x 15) = 11.25A (11.3A) 11.3A 11.3A

C 1 x 1 2.2kW Inst HW(B) 2,200/230 = 9.6A 9.6A

D 1 x 9A motor 19.5A 19.5A 19.5A

D 1 x 8A motor

9 + (0.75 x 8) + 0.5(5 + 3 + 1)
D 1 x 5A motor
= 19.5A

D 1 x 3A motor

D 1 x 1A motor

G 1 x 1 3.6kW storage HW 3600/230 = 15.7A 15.7

H 1 x 400V 14A welder 14.0A 14.0A

Demand 137.3A 142.7A 137.1A

Page 134 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 1 - Calculation of consumer’s mains

maximum demand (non domestic)
Use AS3000 to calculate the maximum demand in the
consumer’s mains for a factory with the following load;

36 - high bay MV luminaries rated at 2.6A each (12/phase)

21 - 10A double single phase socket outlets (7/phase)
4 - 20A three phase socket outlets
2 - lathes with three phase induction motors rated at 28A
3 - 400V single phase spot welders with a rated primary current of 40A and a
duty cycle of 40%.

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

Page 135 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 2 - Calculation of consumer’s mains

maximum demand (non domestic)
Use AS3000 to calculate the maximum demand in the
consumer’s mains for a factory with the following load;

30 - twin 36W fluorescent lights rated at 0.5 amperes each;

12 - single 36W fluorescent lights rated at 0.25 amperes each;
3 - 500W floodlights;
6 - 100W incandescent lamps;
9 - 10 ampere single phase socket outlets
12 - three phase 15 ampere socket outlets;
1 - 2.3kW 230V quick recovery water heater;
1 - 1.102kW 230V food warmer;
2 - three phase motors rated at 42 amperes each;
3 - three phase motors rated at 16.8 amperes each;
4 - three phase motors rated at 2.8 amperes each.

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

Page 136 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 3 - Calculation of consumer’s mains

maximum demand (non domestic)
Use AS3000 to calculate the maximum demand in the
consumer’s mains for a factory with the following load;

28 - single 36W fluorescent lights rated at 0.25 amperes each (2 circuits);

1 - three phase rectifier rated primary current 72 amperes per phase;
20 - double 10 ampere single phase socket outlets;
7 - three phase 20 ampere socket outlets;
2 - three phase exhaust fan motors rated at 5.2 amperes each;
3 - three phase exhaust fan motors rated at 6.3 amperes each.

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

Page 137 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 4 - Calculation of consumer’s mains

maximum demand (non domestic)
Use AS3000 to calculate the maximum demand in the
consumer’s mains for a shop with the following load;

36 - single 36W fluorescent lights rated at 0.25 amperes each;

20 - double 10 ampere single phase socket outlets;
2 - single 10 ampere single phase socket outlets;
1 - 15 ampere single phase socket outlet;
1 - 4.4 kW quick recovery water heater;
1 - 10.5 kW single phase range.

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

Page 138 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Non Domestic Energy Demand Method

In some cases the installing electrician will not know the exact load details of
equipment being installed in a non domestic installation. Installations such as factory
units, shops and offices are mostly rental properties. The electrical demand will vary
from tenant to tenant. In these cases an estimate based on experience gained from
other similar installations can be made using table C3 of AS3000.
The maximum demand is assessed depending on the area, use and climate control
(air conditioning) of the installation. The demand is given in VA and is converted to
current using the equation;

where
IL = the line current /maximum demand current in Amperes
S = the energy demand in VA
VL = the line voltage of the supply in volts.

Example Calculation 2.
A small retail complex consisting of 3 shops at street level (280m2 each) and 3 offices
(250m2 each) on the first floor. All shops and offices have reverse cycle air
conditioning. Determine the maximum demand of this commercial installation.

Type of Occupancy Energy Demand

Load Area Average Demand

VA/m2

Shops Light and power 840 m2 70 58800 VA

Air conditioning 840 m2 30 25200 VA

Offices Light and power 750m2 50 37500 VA

Air conditioning 750m2 25 18750 VA

Total 140250 VA

S 140250
Maximum demand IL    203A per phase
3  VL 3  400

Page 139 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 5 - Assessment of consumer’s mains

maximum demand (non domestic)
Use AS3000 table C3 to determine the maximum demand in
the consumer’s mains for a shop with the following load;

A retail complex consisting of 5 shops at street level (330m2 each) and 3 offices
(300m2 each) on the first floor. All shops and offices have reverse cycle air
conditioning. Determine the maximum demand of this commercial installation.

Type of Occupancy Energy Demand

Load Area Average Demand

VA/m2

Total

Maximum demand =

Page 140 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 6 - Assessment of consumer’s mains

maximum demand (non domestic)
Use AS3000 table C3 to determine the maximum demand in
the consumer’s mains for a complex with the following load;

A complex consisting of
 2200m2 of ventilated warehouse,
 250 m2 of reverse cycle air conditioning offices
 500 m2 of open air car park.

Type of Occupancy Energy Demand

Load Area Average Demand

VA/m2

Total

Maximum demand =

Page 141 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 7 - Assessment of consumer’s mains

maximum demand (non domestic)
Use AS3000 table C3 to determine the maximum demand in
the consumer’s mains for a factory unit complex with the
following load;

A complex consisting of
 1200m2 of ventilated light industrial units,
 850 m2 of reverse cycle air conditioning offices
 500 m2 of open air car park.

Type of Occupancy Energy Demand

Load Area Average Demand

VA/m2

Total

Maximum demand =

Page 142 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 2 - Calculation the maximum demand of sub mains

The methods used to calculate the maximum demand of sub are exactly the same as
consumer’s main as stated in AS 3000 clause 2.2.2;

 Calculation

 Assessment

 Measurement

 Limitation

The only variation is that only the load connected to the sub-main is included in the
calculation of the sub-main.

Consumers Sub Final

Mains Mains Sub-Circuit
Main Switch Sub Dist
Load
Board Board
Point of
Supply
Final
Sub-Circuit
Load

Sub Final
Mains Sub Dist Sub-Circuit
Board Load

Final
Sub-Circuit
Load

figure 1.

Sub-mains in Single domestic installations

In modern domestic installations the space available on the customer’s main

switchboards has decreased, supply authorities are requiring larger “foot prints” for
metering equipment. There has also been an increase in the number of final sub-
circuits and protection devices such as 2 pole combination R.C.D / M.C.B and voltage
surge diverters fitted in main switch boards. It now common practice in larger
installations, to run a sub-main to a location such as the garage or kitchen. A
distribution board placed in the kitchen shortens the runs of a majority of the final
sub-circuits, reducing cost and provides the convenience to customer of not having to
go outside to reset a tripped circuit breaker. Sub-mains are also used to supply out
buildings such as granny flats or garages.

Unlike consumer’s mains, sub-mains are electrically protected at their origin. The
nominal rating of the protection device is set by the sub-mains maximum demand.

Page 143 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Colum 2 of Table C1 AS 3000 is used to calculate the maximum demand.

Activity - 8 - Calculation of sub-main maximum

demand
Calculate the maximum demand for a granny
flat in a single domestic installation
 Complete the table below

8 - lighting points;
5 - double 10A socket outlets;
1 - single 10A socket outlets;
1 - 3.3 kW heat pump storage H.W.S;
1 - 4.4 kW Range.
1 - 15A socket outlet for a split system air conditioner

Load Load Calculation Demand

Group

Maximum Demand

Page 144 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 9 - Calculation of sub-main maximum

demand
Calculate the maximum demand for the
garage of a single domestic installation
 Complete the table below

12 - lighting points;
1 - 1100W flood light
6 - double 10A socket outlets;
1 - single 10A socket outlet;

Load Load Calculation Demand

Group

Maximum Demand

In cases such as the one in activity 8 where the demand is low, it is not cost effective
to run sub-mains and distribution board. A simpler alternative is to wire the garage as
a mixed circuit supplied from a C.B. at the house main switch board.

Note clause 3.5.1 requires a minimum C.S.A. of 2.5mm2 in circuits supplying

socket outlets.

Page 145 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Sub-mains in Single domestic installations

To determine the maximum demand of the sub-main Colum 2 of table C1 AS3000 is

used. Below is the example of 4 town houses from the previous section. In this case
the load within the unit not the number of units per phase will set the maximum
demand of the sub-main.

Activity - 10 - Calculation of sub-main maximum

demand (multiple domestic)
Calculate the maximum demand for the sub-main of a single
unit in a multiple domestic installation.
A group of 4 townhouses are to be connected to a 2 phase
supply, 2 units per phase. Each contains the following load;

18 - Light points
6m - Track lighting
11 - Double 10A Socket Outlets
1 - 6.0 kW 1 Φ range
1 - 15A socket for a clothes dryer
1 - 4.4 kW storage H.W.S.

Load Load Calculation Demand

Group

Page 146 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 11 - Calculation of sub-main maximum

demand (multiple domestic)
Calculate the maximum demand for the sub-main of a single
unit in a multiple domestic installation.
A block of 22 units are to be connected to a 3 phase supply,
the communal load is greater than 25 A. Complete the table
below.

Each contains the following load Community load;

16 - Light points 20 - fluorescent (0.33A each) Car park
16 - Double 10A Socket Outlets 50 - 60W lamps house lights
1 - 6.0 kW cook top 15 - single 10A socket outlets house power
1 - 3.0 kW oven 2 - 15A socket outlets clothes dryers
1 - 4.4 kW storage H.W.S.

Load Load Calculation Demand

Group

Page 147 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Sub-mains in non-domestic installations

Once again the procedure to determine the maximum demand of sub-mains in a non-
domestic installation is the same as consumer’s mains, but only the load in that
section of the building is included.

Activity - 12 - Calculation of sub-mains maximum

demand (non domestic)
Use AS3000 to calculate the maximum demand in the sub
mains for a factory unit with the following load;

6 - high bay MV luminaries rated at 2.6A each (1 circuit)

30 - twin 36W fluorescent lights 0.333A each (1 circuit)
20 - 10A double single phase socket outlets (5 circuits 4 points per)
4 - 20A three phase socket outlets
4 - three phase induction motors rated at 32A
1 - 400V single phase arc welding machines with a rated primary current of 40A
1 - 4.4 kW 230V HWS
-

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

Page 148 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Non Domestic Energy Demand Method

Example Calculation.
From the previous section, recall the small retail complex consisting of 3 shops at
street level (280m2 each) and 3 offices (250m2 each) on the first floor. All shops and
offices have reverse cycle air conditioning. In the previous section the maximum
demand of the entire complex was calculated at 203A per phase. Determine the
maximum demand of the sub-main supplying the individual shops and offices.

Type of Occupancy Energy Demand

Load Area Average Demand

VA/m2

Shops Light and power 280 m2 70 19600 VA

Air conditioning 280 m2 30 8400 VA

Total 28000 VA

Offices Light and power 250m2 50 12500 VA

Air conditioning 250m2 25 6250 VA

Total 18750 VA

S 28000
Shop Maximum demand IL    41A per phase
3  VL 3  400

 A 50A H.R.C. fuse or circuit breaker would be selected as the protection device.

 A cable size is then selected to that it has a current carrying capacity higher
than or equal to 50A after any applicable de-ratings have been applied.

S 18750
Office Maximum demand IL    28A per phase
3  VL 3  400

 A 32A H.R.C. fuse or circuit breaker would be selected as the protection device.

 A cable size is then selected to that it has a current carrying capacity higher
than or equal to 32A after any applicable de-ratings have been applied.

Page 149 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 13 - Assessment of consumer’s mains

maximum demand (non domestic)
Use AS3000 table C3 to determine the maximum demand in
the sub mains for the shops and offices with the following
load;

A retail complex consisting of 5 shops at street level (330m2 each) and 3 offices
(300m2 each) on the first floor. All shops and offices have reverse cycle air
conditioning. Determine the maximum demand of the sub mains for this
commercial installation.

Type of Occupancy Energy Demand

Load Area Average Demand

VA/m2

Total

Maximum demand =

Page 150 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial - Section 5
In the following statements one of the suggested answers is best.

1. ONE method for determining the size of sub-mains of an electrical installation is:
(a) location of points
(b) safe design and construction
(c) demand of devices for isolation
(d) calculation

2. When selecting a cable for a sub-main, its continuous current carrying capacity
should be:
(a) greater than the demand of the sub-main and at least equal to the circuit
breaker rating.
(b) greater than the demand of the sub-main and less than the circuit breaker
rating.
(c) less than the demand of the sub-main and greater than the circuit breaker
rating
(d) less than the demand of the sub-main and less than the circuit breaker
rating

3. Sub-mains and final sub-circuits having a rating exceeding 100 A per phase must:
(a) not able to be isolated in the event of over-current
(b) have over-voltage protection installed on the originating switchboard
(c) be controlled by a separate isolating switch on the originating switchboard
(d) have residual current protection installed on the originating switchboard.

4. What is the contribution of a 230 V, 9.2 kW stove (the highest rated appliance), to
the maximum demand on the sub mains of a residential boarding house in which
it is installed?
(a) 20A
(b) 15A
(c) 25A
(d) 40 A.

5. The maximum demand of a large and complex installation is determined by:

(a) Calculation
(b) Assessment
(c) Measurement
(d) Limitation

Page 151 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

6. Use AS3000 to calculate the maximum demand in the consumer’s mains for a
factory with the following load;

18 - high bay MH luminaries rated at 2.6A each (6/phase)

33 - 10A double single phase socket outlets (11/phase)
4 - 32A three phase socket outlets
3 - 20A three phase socket outlets
2 - three phase induction motors rated at 42A
1 - three phase induction motors rated at 28A
2 - 400V single phase arc welders a rated current of 18A.

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

Page 152 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

7. 33 town houses are to be connected to a 3 phase supply, Calculate the maximum

demand for the consumer’s mains of the multiple domestic installation.

Each contains the following load Community load;

22 - Light points 24 - Compact fluorescent (0.22A each) for
Car park lighting
18 - Double 10A Socket Outlets
10 - Bollard lights (0.15A each)
1 - 8.0 kW Range
10 - single 10A socket outlets house power
1 - 4.4 kW storage H.W.S.
1- 14A Air conditioner

No of Units A phase ________ B phase ________ C phase ________

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

Page 153 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

8. Calculate the maximum demand for the single phase sub- main of an individual
unit in the multiple domestic installation.

Load Load Calculation Demand

Group

Page 154 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 155 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 6 - Cable selection based on current

carrying capacity requirements
Topics

• Installation conditions

• De-rating factors

• Current carrying capacity tables in

AS/NZS3008.1.1

• Cable selection

Aim
Learners will be able to select the minimum size cable to supply a given maximum
demand, and determine the current carrying capacity of conductors up to 400A.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 Describe installation conditions for a range of wiring systems and applications.

 Identify external influences that require the use of a de-rating factor.

 Describe the AS/NZS 3000 requirements for coordination of cables and

protection devices.

 Use AS/NZS 3008.1.1 to select conductor size based on the maximum current
requirement for a given installation condition including any applicable de-rating
factors.

Page 156 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 1 - Installation conditions

Current carrying capacity is the maximum continuous current that a particular cable
can carry without overheating.

Installation conditions which affect current carrying capacity, and thus the size of
cable conductor needed for a circuit, are:-

Installation conditions (AS/NZS 3008. 1.1, Clause 3.4)

 ambient temperature;
 cables installed in:
 air;

 thermal insulation;
 conduits, ducts and trunking
 underground.
Table 3 of AS3008.1.1 (2017) gives guidance to installation methods

 Table 3(1) _____________________________

 Table 3(2) _____________________________

 Table 3(3) _____________________________

 Table 3(4) _____________________________

In all tables in AS3008.1.1 only the current carrying conductors are generally shown.
In other words in single phase circuits only the active and neutral conductors are
shown. In three phase circuits the load is assumed to be balanced so the neutral
conductor is not shown to keep the diagram simple.

Single core cables can be configured;

 Trefoil

 Laid flat touching

0.5D
 Laid flat separated

figure 1

The separation between cables improves the heat dissipation of the conductors and
improves current carrying performance. Laying the cables in trefoil reduces magnet
effects. It is important not to confuse separation between conductors with cable
supports systems that space the cable from surfaces such as walls and ceilings. If
cables are installed so that they are in contact with cables of another circuit they are
said to be grouped (see Figure 1 AS3008.1.1.)

Page 157 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 1 - Installation conditions

From AS 3008.1.1. Table 3.1 (only current

carrying conductors are shown)

Draw a free hand picture of ungrouped cables 1 phase 3 phase

installed;

1. Single core cables separated in air and

spaced from a vertical surface or supported
on cable tray

2. Single core cables with minimum cable

spacing in air and spaced from a vertical
surface or supported on cable tray.

3. Single core cables of the one circuit touching

and installed clipped direct to a wall floor,
ceiling or similar surface;

4. Multi core cables with minimum spacing’s in

air spaced from a wall or vertical;
supported on ladders, racks, perforated or
unperforated trays, cleats or hangers:

5. Multi core cables installed in air touching a

surface i.e. clipped direct to a wall, floor,
ceiling or similar surface.

Page 158 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

External influences (AS/NZS 3008.1.1, Clause 3.5)

 grouping of cables;

 ambient temperature;

 depth of laying

 different soil types for underground cables;

 varying loads

 thermal insulation

 direct sunlight.

 Harmonic currents

 Parallel cables.

 Electromagnetic interference.

The circuit protection device selected to protect the cable will also affect the cable
current carrying capacity.

 Circuit Breaker - 100% of current carrying capacity of cable (x 1).

 H.R.C. fuse - 90% of current carrying capacity of cable (x 0.9).

Page 159 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 2 - Installation conditions that cause

de-rating.

Read AS 3008.1.1. sections 3.4 to 3.5

List the “standard” conditions of installation and operation to avoid de-rating;

1. Ambient air temperature

2. Ambient soil temperature

3. Depth of laying cable underground

4. Soil thermal resistivity

5. Cable grouping

6. Harmonic distortion

Read AS 3000 clause 2.5.3.1

7. Circuit protection

If cables are installed as described in activity 1, the cable will not need to be “de-
rated”. If any variation to these installation conditions occurs the cable will have to be
de-rated, this means its current carrying capacity will be lower, a larger cable c.s.a.
may be required.

Page 160 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 2 - De-rating Factors

Tables 2 and 22 to 29 of AS3008.1.1 show the de-rating factors that must be applied
to cables if they have installation conditions that differ from Activity 2. The de-rating
factor for grouping of circuits is listed in the final column of each table for tables 3(1)
to 3(4) as shown in figures 2 and 3.

figure 2.

Foot notes at the bottom tables 3(1) to 3(4) also give guidance to which de-rating
table to use for installation conditions other than the grouping of cables. As shown in
figure 3.

figure 3.

Page 161 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 3 - De-rating factors

Use AS 3008.1.1.

Determine the de-rating factor for De-rating Table/Column

Factor

1. A single phase V75 T+E cable installed

on perforated cable tray in a factory with
a ambient air temperature of 55○C.

2. A three phase V75 4 core +E cable

installed in an underground conduit with
a ambient soil temperature of 35○C.

3. A three phase V75 4 core +E cable

installed in an underground conduit at a
depth of 0.6m.

4. A three phase V75 4 core +E cable

installed in an underground conduit with
a soil thermal resistivity of 1.5○C.m/W

5. A single phase V75 T+E cable installed

on perforated cable tray in a factory
touching 3 other circuits.

6. A three phase V75 T+E cable installed

on perforated cable tray in a factory with
a measured third harmonic content of
20%.

Page 162 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

If more than one de-rating factor is to be applied they are multiplied together e.g.

H.R.C. fuse = 0.9

Grouping of circuits = 0.8

Total de-rating applied to current carrying capacity of conductor

D.R. = 0.9 x 0.8 = 0.72

Installation conditions that avoid de-rating (AS3008.1.1 clause 3.5.2.2)

When cables are secured to supports such as ladder or cable tray it is preferred to
space the cables of different circuits from each other to allow the circulation of air
around the conductors. If cables must be grouped it is better to group cables in small
groups. If say 20 or more circuits are bunched on a surface or enclosed in the same
conduit, they must all be de-rated to 0.38 of their original current carrying capacity.

Activity - 4 - Installation conditions that avoid de-

rating

Read AS3008.1.1 clause 3.5.2.2 (figure 1.)

1. Do unserved MIMS cables in the same wiring enclosure

need to be de-rated due to grouping of cables? Y/N

2. What is the maximum length of groups of copper cables

that enter a switchboard if they are under 150mm2?

3. When installed in free air, and fixed to a wall, what

horizontal distance is required between single core
conductors of different circuits to avoid de-rating?

4. When installed in free air, and fixed to a wall, what

horizontal distance is required between multi core
conductors of different circuits to avoid de-rating?

Page 163 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 3 - Current carrying capacity tables in

AS/NZS3008.1.1
How AS/NZS 3008.1.1 is organised.

Section Purpose
Contents Lists, sections, clause appendices tables and figures.
1 Scope, references and Section definitions.
2 Summary of cable selection procedure.
Cable selection based on current carrying capacity; includes
3
Tables I to 29
Cable selection based on voltage drop; includes Tables 30 to
4
51.
Cable selection based on short circuit performance; includes
5
Table 52 to 55
Appendices Additional information to help apply the standard

Selecting Cable Size Based on Current Rating.

Selection of cable size based on current carrying capacity is based on;

I B ≤ IN ≤ IZ
Determine the minimum current carrying capacity (IZ) by:

 determining the current requirements, maximum demand (IB) for the circuit;

 determine the current rating of the protective device (IN) to be used. Table
8.1, 8.2 and B1 of AS 3000 shows standard protection device ratings up to
200A;

 decide which cable type and installation method to use;

 apply de-rating/rating factor from tables of AS/NZS 3008.1.1 for the

installation environment conditions where applicable;

If a de-rating factor is to be used you will need to look up a cable’s current rating,
then apply the de-rating factor to determine the current rating for the installation
conditions. Or, you can apply the de-rating factor to the required current rating, then
then select the cable with the calculated minimum current rating determined using the
equation:-
IN
I Zmin 
D.R. Factors

Select a minimum conductor size for the look up current rating (or next largest) from
tables of AS/NZS 3008.1.1. The actual current rating of the cable under these
conditions will be the current rating from the table times de-rating factor/s. If there is

Page 164 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

more than one de-rating factor the overall de-rating factor is the product of all de-
rating factors that apply.

Activity - 5 - Applying de-rating factors

A load has a maximum demand of 180A. The circuit will be

protected by a 200A HRC fuse. Determine the minimum
current carrying capacity required for the cable.

1. IZmin =

2. Is the statement IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ true? Y/N

Current Carrying Capacities of Cables

The current carrying capacities for various types of commonly used cables and
installation methods are given in Tables 4 to 21.

Single and Double Table 16 to Table 21

Flexible cords and
insulated cables in air,
Table 4 to Table 15 cables, MIMS cable,
conduit, thermal
and Aerial cables
insulation, direct in
ground or underground
enclosures 75 ,90 and
110 temperature rated

figure 4.

The current carrying capacity of a cable may be reduced or increased when particular
external influences are present. In these cases a de-rating factor or rating factor
must be applied before the correct minimum size conductor can be determined. Tables
22 to 29 provide de-rating/rating factors for various external influences.

Page 165 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

De-rating / rating tables

Table 27 to Table 29 f or variations in ambient
temperature in air or in
Table 22 to Table 26 underground, variations
De-rating tables f or
in depth of burial and
grouping of circuit in
variations in soil
enclosures on a surf ace
resistivity
on cable trays or
underground

figure 5.

Which table to use.

Tables 4 to 15 are the most frequently used current carrying capacity tables, they
cover the most common used cables types and cable grouping arrangements. Tables
16 to 21 cover the more unusual cables such as flexible, MIMS and aerial cables.

Table 3 gives directions to which of these tables to use for various cable
configurations and installation methods. Table 3 is arranged in four parts as follows:

Table 3(3) Table 3(4)

Buried direct UG conduits

Table 3(1) Table 3(2)

Unenclosed Enclosed in
in air conduit or
thermal
insulation

figure 6.

Each Table 3(1) to 3(4) has the same format as shown below.

Row No. Diagram of installation Other installation methods with

method. the same current carrying
capacity

Description of cable Current carrying capacity De-rating table to use

conf iguration ie. No table and column to use. f or grouped circuits.
of cables/cores.
figure 7.

Page 166 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

How to use Table 3.

The following is a guide to using Table 3.

 Look up the Table 3 that applies to how the cable is to be installed. For
example you would you use Table 3(2) enclosed, for a cable enclosed in
conduit.

 Go down column 2 and match a description of the cable configuration you are
to use against a reference drawing in column 3 that shows you how the cable
is to be installed.

For example three single core cables installed in conduit in air:

figure 8.
 Column 4 on the same row gives the current carrying capacity tables and
columns to use to select the minimum conductor size.

figure 9.
 The reference drawing in column 3 may not fully show how you intend to install
the cable. In this case check column 5 for a description of installation methods
deemed to be the same.

Page 167 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 10.

 When cables are to be installed with cables of other circuits, a de-rating factor
must be applied. Column 6 gives the table to use to find the correct de-rating
factor for groups of cables.

For example a three core cable installed unenclosed in air on cable tray with
two other circuits;

figure 11.

figure 11.

Page 168 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

How de-rating (and rating) factors are applied.

The minimum current carrying capacity in a cable (IZ) when installed with cables of
other circuits is decreased according to the de-rating factor that applies. The result
can mean a larger cable is required for the circuit.
 De-rating factor applied to a particular cable results in a reduction in current
carrying capacity for that cable.
 De-rating can be avoided by installing cables with minimum spacing as shown
in Figure 1 of AS/NZS 3008.1.1.
 Remember, when using HRC fuses as the circuit protective device, a de-rating
factor of 0.9 will automatically apply to the current carrying capacity of the
cable.
 Rating factors (Tables 27 to 29) are applied to cables in ambient temperatures
(other than 40○C air temperature or 25○C soil temperature) in the same way as
de-rating factors. Rating tables are not given in the Table 3 schedule.

IZ = Current carrying capacity from AS3008.1.1 x De-rating

factor for installation conditions
Tables 4 to 21.
Table 3 can be used as an index to find which table from 4 to 14 has the equivalent
current carrying capacity for that cable configuration and installation conditions.
Tables 15 to 21 are not mentioned in table 3 as they are for different cable types
(flexible cords, MIMS cables, aerial conductors etc). When selecting conductor size for
these cables, consult the appropriate table directly.
De-rating and rating factor from the appropriate Tables 22 to 29 must be applied
where necessary.

Topic 4 - Cable selection

Activity - 6 - Cable selection based on current
carrying capacity

Read AS3000 clause 3.1

Page 169 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 7 - Limitation of cable temperatures

Read AS3000 3.4.2 and Table 3.2

State the maximum Normal use operating temperature for;

1. Twin + E and orange circular V75 cables

2. Twin + E and orange circular V90 cables

3. XLPE (X90) insulated cables

4. MIMS cable

Activity - 8 - Conductors in parallel

Read AS3000 clause 3.4.3

Page 170 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 9 - Neutral conductor size

Read AS3000 3.5.2

State the minimum size of the neutral conductor for the following circuits

1. Single phase consumers mains,

sub-mains or final sub circuit

2. Multi phase consumers mains,

sub-mains or final sub circuit
not carrying harmonic currents

3. Multi phase consumers mains,

sub-mains or final sub circuit
carrying more than 40%
harmonic currents

4. List 3 loads likely to generate

harmonic currents.

Page 171 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 10 - Protective earthing conductor size

Read AS3000 5.3.3.1.2

State the minimum size of the protective earthing /main earthing conductor for
the following circuits;

1. 2.5 mm2 TPI copper active conductors enclosed in

L.D. PVC conduit.

2. 1.0 mm2 TPI copper active conductors enclosed in

L.D. PVC conduit.

3. 1.0 mm2 TPI copper active conductors in a V90 T+E

cable.

4. A 10mm2 copper, 3 phase XLPE single core final sub-

circuit installed on cable tray.

5. A main earthing conductor, if the consumers mains

are single phase 16mm2 copper XLPE cables.

6. Sub-mains are 3 phase 95mm2 copper XLPE single

core cables installed in underground enclosures.

7. Sub-mains are 3 phase 95mm2 Aluminium XLPE

single core cables installed in underground
enclosures.

8. A main earthing conductor, if the consumers mains

are 3 phase 240mm2 copper XLPE cables.

9. A main earthing conductor, if the consumers mains

are 3 phase 240mm2 aluminium XLPE cables.

Page 172 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 11 - Cable selection

Using AS3008.1.1:2017 determine the

minimum allowable cable size.

The maximum demand current of a submain cable, has been calculated to be 172
amperes. The type of cable to be used is a 4 core, non armoured, V75 insulated
and sheathed circular cable with copper conductors. The cable is to be clipped
directly to a vertical surface, open to the air and is to be protected by a circuit
breaker with fixed current setting.

Minimum Circuit Breaker Rating that could be used

Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Table Number / Column Number

Cable Size

Protective earthing conductor cable size

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (AS3000 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected protective device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of the selected cable after

any de-rating has been considered.

Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Would the cable need to be upgraded?

If so, select the new cable size.

Page 173 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 12 - Cable selection

Using AS3008.1.1:2017 determine the

minimum allowable cable size.

The maximum demand current for the sub-mains of a non-domestic installation

has been calculated to be 135 amperes. The type of cable to be used is four
single core, non-armoured, XLPE insulated, sheathed copper cables laid touching
in open trunking. The cables are to be protected by a circuit breaker.

Minimum Circuit Breaker Rating that could be used

Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Table Number / Column Number

Cable Size / Current rating from table

Protective earthing conductor cable size

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (AS3000 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected protective device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of the selected cable

after any de-rating has been considered.

Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Would the cable need to be upgraded?

If so, select the new cable size.

Page 174 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 13 - Cable selection

Using AS3008.1.1:2017 determine the

minimum allowable cable size.

One circuit, consisting of three single core V75 insulated, unsheathed non-
armoured cables with copper conductors is to carry 155 amperes and be enclosed
in non-metallic pipe buried in the ground to a depth of 1.25 metres below the
ground surface in an ambient soil temperature of 25 degrees Celsius. Protection
for the circuit is via circuit breakers. Determine the minimum permissible cable
size of the circuit.

Minimum Circuit Breaker Rating

Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Table Number / Column Number

Cable Size / Current rating from table

Protective earthing conductor cable size

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (AS3000 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected protective device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of the selected cable after

any de-rating has been considered.

Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Would the cable need to be upgraded?

If so, select the new cable size.

Page 175 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 14 - Cable selection

Using AS3008.1.1:2017 determine the

minimum allowable cable size.

Find the minimum size served MIMS single core cable to supply a distribution
board for safety services with a maximum demand of 80A per phase. The cables
are laid in trefoil on perforated cable tray spaced from other conductors. The
serving of the cable is suitable for a copper sheath temperature of 105○ C. Circuit
protection is C.B.

Minimum Circuit Breaker Rating

Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Table Number / Column Number

Cable Size / Current rating from table

Protective earthing conductor cable size

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (AS3000 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected protective device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of the selected cable

after any de-rating has been considered.

Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Would the cable need to be upgraded?

If so, select the new cable size.

Page 176 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 15 - Cable Current Carrying Capacity

Using AS3008.1.1:2017 determine the

maximum allowable cable current carrying
capacity.

A C.B. protected 4 core + E, 10 mm2 V75 orange circular cable laid flat touching
two other circuits on perforated cable tray.

Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Table Number / Column Number

Initial Current Carrying Capacity

De- rating Table Number / Column Number

De-rating factors

Current Carrying Capacity after de-rating

Maximum Circuit Breaker Rating

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (AS3000 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected protective

device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of the selected cable

after any de-rating has been considered.
Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Page 177 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 16 - Cable Current Carrying Capacity

Using AS3008.1.1:2017 determine the

maximum allowable cable current carrying
capacity.

A H.R.C. fuse protected 4 core + E, 16 mm2 Aluminium XLPE circular cable laid flat
touching one other circuit on perforated cable tray.

Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Table Numbers / Column Numbers

Initial Current Carrying Capacity

De-rating Table Number / Column Number

De-rating factors

Current Carrying Capacity after de-rating

Maximum H.R.C. fuse Rating

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (AS3000 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected protective

device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of the selected cable

after any de-rating has been considered.
Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Page 178 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 17 - Cable Current Carrying Capacity

Using AS3008.1.1:2017 determine the

maximum allowable cable current carrying
capacity.

Two single core, 4 mm2 V75 TPI conductors enclosed in medium duty conduit in a
concrete slab above the ground with three other circuits. C.B. protected

Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Table Numbers / Column Numbers

Initial Current Carrying Capacity

De-rating Table Numbers / Column Numbers

De-rating factors

Current Carrying Capacity after de-rating

Maximum Circuit Breaker Rating

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (AS3000 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected protective

device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of the selected cable

after any de-rating has been considered.
Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Page 179 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 18 - Cable Current Carrying Capacity

Using AS3008.1.1:2017 determine the

maximum allowable cable current carrying
capacity.

A submain to an out building is installed burried direct in the ground, single core
XLPE 120 mm2 Aluminium cables laid in trefoil spaced from another circuit by 300
mm at a depth of 0.5m. The cable is C.B. protected.

Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Table Numbers / Column Numbers

Initial Current Carrying Capacity

De-rating Table Numbers / Column Numbers

De-rating factors

Current Carrying Capacity after de-rating

Maximum Circuit Breaker Rating

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (AS3000 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected protective

device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of the selected cable

after any de-rating has been considered.
Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Page 180 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 19 - Cable Current Carrying Capacity

Using AS3008.1.1:2017 determine the

maximum allowable cable current carrying
capacity.

A single phase submain consisting of two single core 16mm2 V75 Cu cables
installed in an underground enclosure. The enclosure is buried at a depth of 0.5m
and touches two other circuits. All circuits are in separate enclosures. The cable is
C.B. protected.

Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Table Numbers / Column Numbers

Initial Current Carrying Capacity

De-rating Table Numbers / Column Numbers

De-rating factors

Current Carrying Capacity after de-rating

Maximum Circuit Breaker Rating

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (AS3000 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected protective

device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of the selected cable

after any de-rating has been considered.
Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Page 181 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Adjustable Circuit Breakers (200A - 400A)

When a circuit requires a protection device larger than 200A an adjustable circuit
breaker may be used to match the setting of the breaker to the capacity of the cable.
This way no capacity between the preset size of the breaker and the cable is lost.

figure 10. - www.nhp.com.au

Figure 10 shows how the current rating of the device can be adjusted between 100 to
40% of its rated value. Nominal ratings of adjustable circuit breakers are typically 250
and 400A.

I Z 100
Setting % 
IN 1

Circuit Breaker Increment Settings

1.0 0.95 0.9 0.8 0.63 0.5 0.4

Example 1

Four single core 70 mm2 XLPE copper cables are installed laid flat touching as a single
circuit on cable ladder. What size and current setting of an adjustable C.B. will allow
the full optimisation of the cable current carrying capacity.

Table 3(1) Item 5 Tables 8 column 5 to 7 CCC = 240A

I Z 100 240 100

Setting %    = 96 %
IN 1 250 1

A 250 C.B. is now set to 95% of its rated value to match the protection device to the
cable rating. Had a preset C.B. been used a 95mm2 cable would have been required.

Page 182 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 20 - Adjustable circuit breakers

Using AS3008.1.1:2017 determine the

maximum allowable cable current carrying
capacity.

A 150 mm2 Aluminium XLPE 4 core + E cable is installed burried direct in the
ground at depth of 0.5 m, as a single circuit. Select a suitable size and current
setting for a C.B to protect the cable.

Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Capacity Table Numbers / Column Numbers

Initial Current Carrying

De-rating Table Numbers / Column Numbers

De-rating factors

Current Carrying Capacity after de-rating

Maximum Circuit Breaker Rating

Circuit Breaker setting

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (refer to clause 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected protective

device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of the selected cable

after any de-rating has been considered.
Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Page 183 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 21 - Adjustable circuit breakers

Using AS3008.1.1:2017 determine the

maximum allowable cable current carrying
capacity.

Four 120 mm2 copper XLPE single core cables are installed in trefoil touching one
other circuit on a single tier cable ladder. Select a suitable size and setting for a
C.B to protect the cable.

Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Table Numbers / Column Numbers

Initial Current Carrying Capacity

De-rating Table Numbers / Column Numbers

De-rating factors

Current Carrying Capacity after de-rating

Maximum Circuit Breaker Rating

Circuit Breaker setting

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (refer to clause 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected protective

device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of the selected cable

after any de-rating has been considered.
Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Page 184 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Paralleling Cables

To increase the current carrying capacity of a circuit, the conductors may be run in
parallel. Smaller conductors are used allowing a tighter radius when bending, and
easier installation, than one single larger conductor. The cables used in parallel must
be identical in material, c.s.a. and route length. The current rating of the parallel
group is; 2 x the single cable current rating x any de-rating applicable including
grouping.

Activity - 22 - Conductors in parallel

Read AS 3000 clause 3.4.3

What is the minimum size of a cable that can be

connected in a parallel group?

Example 2

Determine the current carrying capacity of two sets of 70mm2 copper single core XLPE
cables laid in trefoil on cable ladder. Each set is touching the other. Protection is by
H.R.C. fuse.

Table 3(1) Item 5 Tables 8 column 5 CCC = 240A

D.R. Gouping Table 23 column 7 2 circuits = 0.95

D.R. H.R.C. fuse 0.9

IZ = 2 x 240 x 0.95 x 0.9 = 410A

Select a 400A H.R.C. fuse as protection device

IB = 400A

IN = 400A

IZ = 410A

Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ? Yes

Page 185 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 23 - Conductors in parallel

Using AS3008.1.1:2017 determine the

maximum allowable cable current carrying
capacity.

Two sets of 4 x 50mm2 single core XLPE copper cables are parallel connected.
They are installed in two seperate 125mm underground ducts spaced 450mm
apart. Select a suitable size and setting for a C.B to protect the cable.

Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Table Numbers / Column Numbers

Initial Current Carrying Capacity

De-rating Table Numbers / Column Numbers

De-rating factors

Current Carrying Capacity after de-rating

Protective earthing conductor cable size

Maximum Circuit Breaker Rating

Circuit Breaker setting

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (refer to clause 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected protective

device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of the selected cable

after any de-rating has been considered.
Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Page 186 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial - Section 6
1. The maximum demand current of a sub-main cable, has been calculated to be 172
amperes. The type of cable to be used is a 4 core, non-armoured, V75 insulated
and sheathed circular cable with copper conductors. The cable is to be saddled
directly to a vertical surface (eg. wall), open to the air and is to be protected by a
circuit breaker.

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

2. The maximum demand current of a single phase domestic installation has been
calculated to be 80 amperes. To select a size cable for the consumer’s mains,
consider the following:

Type of Cable to be used - SDI, non-armoured, XLPE cable with copper

conductors.

Method of installation - the cable is to be enclosed in heavy duty PVC conduit in

ceiling and partially surrounded by thermal insulation.

Circuit protection - Unprotected consumer’s main

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB ≤IN ≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 187 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

3. The maximum demand current for the sub-mains of a non-domestic installation

has been calculated to be 185 ampere. The type of cable to be used is four single
core, non-armoured, V75 insulated, unsheathed copper cables laid touching in
open troughing. The cables are to be protected by H.R.C. fuses.

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB ≤IN ≤IZ (Y/N)

4. The maximum demand current of a non-domestic installation has been calculated

to be 141 amperes. The type of cable selected for the consumer’s mains for this
installation is to be 4 single core, V75 insulated, sheathed cables with copper
conductors which are to be run in non-metallic conduit, which in turn is to be
saddled to an external wall. Determine the size of the consumer’s mains if they
are to be protected by HRC fuses.

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ ME Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB ≤IN ≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 188 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

5. A sub-mains cable size is to be selected for a domestic installation from the

following information:
Type of Cable - 2 core, V75, flat insulated and sheathed, non-armoured cable with
copper conductors including earth conductor.
Method of Installation - Clipped to a ceiling joist in air.
Maximum demand current - 27 ampere
Protection device - Circuit Breaker

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB ≤IN ≤IZ (Y/N)

6. A final sub-circuit is to be run in a non-domestic installation for the purpose of

supplying power to a reverse cycle air conditioner. The full load current of the
appliance has been calculated to be 35A. The type of cable to be used is two
single core, V75 insulated and unsheathed copper cables with earthing conductor
and will be protected by circuit breakers. The cable is to be run in a non-metallic
conduit and saddled to an external wall.

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 189 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

7. Circuit protection and cable size are to be selected from the information given:
Maximum Demand Current - 188 ampere.
Cable type - 4 core, X.L.P.E. circular, insulated and sheathed armoured cable with
aluminium conductors.
Method of installation - To be buried directly in the ground to a depth of 0.5
metres below the ground surface in an ambient soil temperature of 25 degrees
Celsius.
Circuit Protection - Circuit breaker.

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

8. Four single core, V75 insulated, unsheathed copper cables are to be run in non-
metallic PVC conduit installed in the ground to a depth of 0.5 metres below the
ground surface in an ambient soil temperature of 25 degrees Celsius. Each single
core cable is to be installed in its own conduit, laid touching in the ground and be
protected by a circuit breaker. The maximum demand current to be carried by the
cable has been calculated to be 400 ampere. Determine the minimum permissible
cable size for the above;

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 190 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

9. Two circuits of two core V90, insulated and sheathed flat copper cables are to be
installed directly in the ground to a depth of 0.5 metres below the ground surface
in an ambient soil temperature of 25 degrees Celsius and be protected by H.R.C.
fuses. The cables will be laid flat in the ground and spaced at a distance of 0.15
metres apart. Each cable must be able to safely carry a full load current of 20
amperes. From the above information, determine the minimum permissible cable
size.

De-rating Table ____________ Column No________ D.R. _________

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

10. Two circuits of two core V90 non-armoured, insulated and sheathed cables with
copper conductors are to be clipped to the underside of a ceiling in a single layer
formation. The cables are to be touching. Each circuit is to carry a load current of
34 ampere and will be protected by circuit breakers. Determine the minimum
permissible cable size for each circuit from the information supplied.

De-rating Table ____________ Column No________ D.R. _________

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 191 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

11. Four circuits of three core, V90 TPS circular cables with copper conductors are to
be bunched together in closed trunking which in turn is to be fixed to a wall in a
horizontal position and open to air. Each circuit is to carry a maximum demand
current of 54 amperes and will be protected by circuit breakers. Determine the
minimum permissible size of the cables to meet the above requirements.

De-rating Table ____________ Column No________ D.R. _________

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

12. Four circuits of four core HFI-90-TP thermoplastic insulated and sheathed non-
armoured circular cables with copper conductors are to be buried directly in the
ground to depth of 0.5 metres below the ground surface in an ambient soil
temperature of 25 degrees Celsius. The cables are to be laid spaced 0.15 metres
from each other. The circuits are to be protected by HRC fuses and the full load
current of each circuit has been calculated to be 125 ampere. Determine the
minimum permissible cable size for each of the above circuits.

De-rating Table ____________ Column No________ D.R. _________

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 192 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

13. Six circuits, each which consist of three single core XLPE (X-HF-110) unsheathed
PVC insulated copper conductors, are to carry a maximum demand current of 32
ampere and be protected by circuit breakers. Each circuit will have its three single
core conductors enclosed in a separate PVC conduit. i.e. Three conductors to a
conduit. The six conduits will be buried in the ground to a minimum depth as
specified by the requirements of AS/NZS3000 (Note: Not under a continuously
paved concrete area). The soil temperature is assumed to also meet the
AS/NZS3008. 1.1 minimum requirements. Each conduit will be horizontally laid in
single layer formation and spaced a distance of 0.3 metres from each other.
Determine the minimum permissible cable size for each circuit.

De-rating Table ____________ Column No________ D.R. _________

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

14. Two circuits of three single core V90, single double insulated non-armoured cables
with copper conductors, are to be fixed to a single tier horizontally mounted
perforated cable tray in a trefoil formation. Each trefoil formation will be touching.
Each circuit will carry a maximum demand current of 42.5 ampere and will be
protected by circuit breakers.

De-rating Table ____________ Column No_______ D.R. _________

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 193 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

15. One circuit, consisting of three single core V90 insulated, unsheathed non-
armoured cables with copper conductors is to carry 175 amperes and be enclosed
in non-metallic conduit buried in the ground to a depth of 1.25 metres below the
ground surface in an ambient soil temperature of 25 degrees Celsius. Protection
for the circuit is via circuit breakers. Determine the minimum permissible cable
size of the circuit.

De-rating Table ____________ Column No____________

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

16. Two, four core X-HF-90 insulated and sheathed non-armoured circular cables with
copper conductors are to be installed and connected in parallel to feed a three-
phase load that draws a full load current of 400 ampere when in operation. The
two cables form the one circuit that is to be protected by a circuit breaker. Each
cable is to be installed in its own non-metallic conduit and buried in the ground to
a depth of 0.5metres. The conduits are to be touching. Determine the minimum
permissible size for each cable.

De-rating Table ____________ Column No____________

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 194 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

17. A four core non-armoured circular cable, with an insulation temperature R-CPE-90
rating, is to be used to supply a high-rise installation which has a calculated
maximum demand of 390 amperes. The cable is to be installed in heavy duty
approved PVC conduit and buried in the ground to the minimum depth of 0.5m
and protected by a circuit breaker. The ambient soil temperature has been
measured to be 10°C. Show all relevant table and column numbers in determining
the:

(a) minimum permissible cable size required if copper conductors, are to be

used.

De-rating Table ____________ Column No____________

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

(b) minimum permissible cable size required if aluminium conductors are to be

used.

De-rating Table ____________ Column No____________

Table No ______ Column No _______ Cable Size ________ PE Size ________

IB = ________ IN =________ IZ = ________ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 195 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 196 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 7 - Cable selection based on voltage

drop requirements
Topics

• Voltage drop tables in AS/NZS3008.1.1

• Voltage drop calculations

• Cable selection

• Maximum length of cable

Aim
Learners will be able to determine the voltage drop for a variety of different cable
types and select the minimum size cable to satisfy AS3000.2018 voltage drop
requirements.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 Describe the AS/NZS 3000 requirements for maximum voltage drop in an

installation.

 Locate appropriate tables in AS/NZS 3008.1.1 for unit values of voltage drop.

 Calculate the expected voltage drop in a given circuit.

 Select cables to satisfy voltage drop requirements in addition to current

carrying capacity requirements.

 Determine the maximum length of a cable to satisfy voltage drop

requirements.

Page 197 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Introduction
Electrical cables made from either copper (Cu) or Aluminium (Al) have resistance.
When an electric current flows in those conductors a voltage drop across the length of
the cable will occur. This voltage drop will reduce the supply voltage available at the
terminals of the load supplied by the cables.

Activity - 1 - Limiting Voltage Drop

Read AS 3000 clause 3.6.2

1. What percentage of the nominal supply voltage is

permitted as voltage drop between the point of
supply and electrical equipment in a installation?

2. What is value of voltage drop is permitted for a

single phase 230 volt installation?

3. What is value of voltage drop is permitted for a

three phase 400 volt installation?

Excessive voltage drop in an installation may cause:

 a reduction in the effective operation of appliances and lighting;

 overloading of cables if a fault occurs by delaying the operating time of

circuit protection devices;

 over-heating of motors, noticeable when the voltage reduction is more

than 5%.

You must consider the effect of voltage drop when selecting cables, especially for
circuits which have long route lengths (ie. length of cable) and circuits with relatively
high currents.

Voltage drop (V) in the cables of a circuit is caused by the current in the circuits (I)
and the resistance (R) of the circuit

VDROP = I x Rcable

Page 198 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Factors that determine the voltage drop in a cable are the;

 length of the cable.

 c.s.a. of the cable.

 current flowing in the cable.

 type of material of the cable (copper or aluminium).

 operating temperature of the cable and ability to dissipate heat

 installation method of the cable. (trefoil, laid flat or in a multi-core

cable).

The voltage drop on any given combination of the above can be predicted before the
cable is selected and installed by using tables 40 t0 51 of Section 4 of AS3008.1.1
(2017).

Section Purpose
Contents Lists, sections, clause appendices tables and figures.
1 Scope, references and Section definitions.
2 Summary of cable selection procedure.
Cable selection based on current carrying capacity; includes
3
Tables I to 29

4 Cable selection based on voltage drop; includes Tables 30 to 51.

Cable selection based on short circuit performance; includes Table

5
52 to 55
Appendices Additional information to help apply the standard
table 1

Page 199 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 1 - Voltage drop tables in AS3008.1.1 (2017)

Tables 40 to 51 show values of Vc in millivolts per Ampere metre for a number of
copper and aluminium cable configurations. The value of Vc was determined by
passing a current of 1 Ampere, through a 1 metre length of conductor, in sizes from
1mm2 to 630mm2 for both copper and aluminium conductors at operating temperature
ranging from 45○ to 110○ C. as shown in figure 1. The temperature used is the
maximum normal use operating temperature as shown in table 1 AS3008.1.1. The
voltage drop across the 1 metre length of conductor is then recorded as Vc.

mV

1A
cable

1m
mV/A.m

figure 1.

All of the values listed in tables 40 to 51 are 3 phase values of Vc. When performing a
voltage drop calculation the value of Vc is obtained directly from the table.

The 3 phase values of VC were obtained using the line current (IL) of a balanced 3
phase circuit. The 3 phase values of VC require adjustment when applied to a 1 phase
circuit to allow for current flowing in the neutral.

If the voltage drop of a single phase cable needs to be calculated, the 3 phase value
of Vc for a given cable size (from tables), must be converted to a single phase value of
Vc;

3 phase Vc to 1 phase Vc

When the single phase value of Vc has been calculated, the single phase value of Vc
must be converted to a 3 phase value of VC. The c.s.a. of a suitable cable is then
found from a table;

1 phase Vc to 3 phase Vc

Page 200 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

All values of VC in Tables 40 to 51 of AS3008.1.1 are 3 phase values of VC.

A characteristic of a 3 phase circuit is that it has lower ‘losses’, than a single phase
circuit of the same material, length and c.s.a. Voltage drop is a loss. The 3 phase VC
for an equivalent conductor is always smaller than the VC of single phase circuit.

Activity - 2 - Values of Vc

Use AS 3008.1.1 Table 40

1. For the following copper conductor sizes, operating temperature of 75○ C,

covert the 3 phase values of Vc to 1 phase.

a) 1 mm2

b) 4 mm2

c) 16 mm2

2. Convert the following values of single phase Vc, to 3 phase values of Vc and
determine the copper conductor sizes, at a operating temperature of 75○ C.

a) 0.96327 mV/A.m

b) 0.68295 mV/A.m

c) 0.255255 mV/A.m

Page 201 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 2 - Voltage drop calculations using AS3008.1.1

It is possible to predict the voltage drop on a cable using the equations supplied by
AS3008.1.1 on page 91.

To determine the actual voltage drop for a given cable size, use the equation;

where
Vd = the actual voltage drop, in volts
VC = the value found from AS3008.1.1 tables in mV/A.m
L = the route length of circuit, in metres
I = the current to be carried by the cable, in amperes.

Activity - 3 - Calculating voltage drop (Vd)

Use AS 3008.1.1

Calculate the voltage drop on a 6mm2 V90 3 phase multicore copper cable, if
protected by a 32A C.B. with a length of 30m.

To find the total voltage drop for an entire installation the voltage drops of the
consumer’s mains and final sub-circuits are added together.

Page 202 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 4 - Calculating voltage drop (Vd)

Use AS 3008.1.1

Calculate the voltage drop for the installation.

Point of supply
Main Switch
Load
Board
Consumers Mains Final Sub-circuit
16 mm2 XLPE Cu S.D.I. 4 mm2 V90 Cu 4 C+E.
M.D. = 63 A, L = 35m M.D. = 25 A, L = 50m

Does the installation comply with AS3000 clause 3.6.2 (Y / N)

Why ?

Page 203 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Single phase installations

When an installation contains single phase circuits the values of VC must be converted
to single phase values and then used in the voltage drop equation.

Activity - 5 - Calculating voltage drop (Vd)

Use AS 3008.1.1

Calculate the voltage drop for the installation.

Point of supply
Main Switch
Load
Board
Consumers Mains Final Sub-circuit
16 mm2 XLPE Cu S.D.I. 4 mm2 V90 Cu 2 C+E.
M.D. = 63 A, L = 35m M.D. = 25 A, L = 50m

Does the installation comply with AS3000 clause 3.6.2 (Y / N)

Why ?

Page 204 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Three phase installations with single phase circuits

If an installation is supplied by three phase and has single phase circuits within the
installation, both 3 and 1 phase voltage drops must be converted to a common unit
value so they can be added together. Both values can be converted to a percentage of
their nominal value, or the 3 phase Vd may be converted to a single phase Vd, by
dividing it by √3, in the same way a line voltage (VL) of 400V is converted to a phase
voltage (VP) of 230V.

Page 205 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 6 - Calculating voltage drop (Vd) %

Use AS 3008.1.1

Calculate the voltage drop for the installation using the percentage method

Point of supply
Main Switch
Load
Board
Consumers Mains Final Sub-circuit
25 mm2 XLPE Cu S.D.I. 6 mm2 V90 Cu 2 C+E.
M.D. = 80A, L = 25m M.D. = 25 A, L = 50m

Does the installation comply with AS3000 clause 3.6.2 (Y / N)

Why ?

Page 206 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 7 – Calculating Values of Vd (√3)

Use AS 3008.1.1

Calculate the voltage drop for the installation using the √3 method.

Point of supply
Main Switch Distribution
Board Board Load

Consumers Mains Sub Mains Final Sub-circuit

25 mm2 XLPE Cu S.D.I. 10 mm2 V90 Cu 4 C+E. 2.5 mm2 V90 Cu 2 C+E.
M.D. = 80A, L = 25m M.D. = 50A, L = 25m M.D. = 20 A, L = 50m

Does the installation comply with AS3000 clause 3.6.2 (Y / N)

Why ?

Page 207 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 3 - Cable selection based on voltage drop.

To determine the minimum required cable size, use the equation;

where
VC = the value found from AS3008.1.1 tables in mV/A.m
Vp = the permissible voltage drop on the circuit run, e.g. 5% of supply
voltage, in volts
L = the route length of circuit, in metres
I = the current to be carried by the cable, in amperes.

Activity - 8 - Calculating Values of Vc

Use AS 3008.1.1

1. Calculate the maximum permissible value of Vc for a 3 phase V90 copper multi-
core cable, if the permissible voltage drop is 14V, the length of the cable run is
45m and the maximum demand is 25A.

2. Determine the minimum cable size

Page 208 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 9 - Cable selection based on voltage drop

Use AS 3008.1.1

For the installation bellow

Point of supply
Main Switch
Load
Board
Consumers Mains Final Sub-circuit
Vd = 12V V90 Cu 4 C+E.
M.D. = 32 A, L = 30m

1. Calculate the maximum permissible voltage drop (VP) for the f.s.c.

2. Calculate the maximum permissible value of Vc

3. Determine the minimum cable size

Page 209 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 10 - Cable selection based on voltage drop

Use AS 3008.1.1

For the installation bellow

Point of supply
Main Switch
Load
Board
Consumers Mains Final Sub-circuit
70 mm2 XLPE Al S.D.I V90 Cu 4 C+E.
Laid in tref oil. M.D. = 16 A, L = 60m
M.D. = 150A, L = 55m

1. Calculate the voltage drop (Vd) on the consumers mains

2. Calculate the maximum permissible voltage drop (VP) for the f.s.c.

3. Calculate the maximum permissible value of VC for the f.s.c.

4. Determine the minimum cable size for the f.s.c.

Page 210 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Single phase installations

When an installation contains single phase circuits, values of VC must be calculated
using the single phase permissible voltage drop (VP). The calculated single phase VC is
then converted to a 3 phase value by multiplying it by 0.866. The cable size can then
be selected using the appropriate operating temperature for the cable.

Activity - 11 - Calculating Values of Vc

Use AS 3008.1.1

1. Calculate the maximum permissible value of VC for a 230V 1 phase V90 copper
multi-core cable, if the permissible voltage drop is 8V, the length of the cable
run is 45m and the maximum demand is 25A.

2. Determine the minimum cable size

Page 211 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 12 - Cable selection based on voltage drop

Use AS 3008.1.1

For the installation bellow

Point of supply
Main Switch
Load
Board
Consumers Mains Final Sub-circuit
Vd = 6.9V V90 Cu Twin+E.
M.D. = 32A, L = 30m

1. Calculate the maximum permissible voltage drop (VP) for the f.s.c.

2. Calculate the maximum permissible value of Vc

3. Determine the minimum cable size.

Page 212 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 13 - Cable selection based on voltage drop

Use AS 3008.1.1

For the installation below (hint refer to clause 3.6.2 distributed load)

Point of supply
Main Switch
Board
Consumers Mains Final Sub-circuit
16 mm2 XLPE Cu S.D.I V90 Cu Twin+E. Distributed
Enclosed in conduit. C.B. = 20 A, L = 40m Load
M.D. = 80A, L = 15m

1. Calculate the voltage drop (Vd) on the consumer’s mains

2. Calculate the maximum permissible voltage drop (VP) for the f.s.c.

3. Calculate the maximum permissible value of VC for the f.s.c.

4. Determine the minimum cable size for the f.s.c.

Page 213 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Three phase installations with single phase circuits

1. As discussed in topic 2 of this section, the 3 phase Vd is calculated and then
converted to a single phase Vd. This is done by either converting both 3 phase
and 1 phase voltage drops to a percentage, or by dividing the 3 phase Vd by
√3. A single phase VP is then found and used to calculate a single phase VC This
is then converted back to a three phase VC so that the cable size can be
determined by looking up the appropriate table.

Activity - 14 - Cable selection based on voltage drop

Use AS 3008.1.1

For the installation bellow

Point of supply
Main Switch
Load
Board
Consumers Mains Final Sub-circuit
16 mm2 XLPE Cu S.D.I V90 Cu TPI in conduit.
Laid f lat touching. M.D. = 22A, L = 55m
M.D. = 63A, L = 20m

1. Calculate the voltage drop (Vd) on the consumer’s mains

2. Calculate the maximum permissible voltage drop (VP) for the f.s.c.

3. Calculate the maximum permissible value of VC for the f.s.c.

4. Determine the minimum cable size for the f.s.c.

Page 214 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 15 - Cable selection based on voltage drop

Use AS 3008.1.1

For the installation bellow

Point of supply
Main Switch Distribution
Board Board Load

Consumers Mains Sub Mains Final Sub-circuit

25 mm2 XLPE Cu S.D.I. 16 mm2 V90 Cu 4 C+E. V90 Cu 2 C+E.
Enclosed in U/G conduit M.D. = 63A, L = 45m M.D. = 10 A, L = 50m
M.D. = 100A, L = 25m
1. Calculate the voltage drop (Vd) on the consumer’s mains.

2. Calculate the voltage drop (Vd) on the sub mains.

3. Calculate the maximum permissible voltage drop (VP) for the f.s.c.

4. Calculate the maximum permissible value of VC for the f.s.c.

5. Determine the minimum cable size for the f.s.c.

Page 215 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 16 - Cable selection based on voltage drop

Use AS 3008.1.1

For the installation bellow

Point of supply
Main Switch Distribution
Board Board Load

Consumers Mains Sub Mains Final Sub-circuit

16 mm2 XLPE Cu 4 Core. ? mm2 V90 Cu 2 C+E. 4 mm2 V90 Cu 2 C+E.
M.D. = 63A, L = 15m M.D. = 50A, L = 40m M.D. = 25 A, L = 15m

1. Calculate the voltage drop (Vd) on the consumer’s mains.

2. Calculate the voltage drop (Vd) on the f.s.c.

3. Calculate the maximum permissible voltage drop (VP) for the sub-main.

3. Calculate the maximum permissible value of VC for the sub-main.

4. Determine the minimum cable size for the sub-main.

Page 216 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 4 - Maximum length of cable based on voltage drop.

To determine the maximum permissible Length for a given cable size, use the
equation;

where
VP = the permissible voltage drop on the circuit run, e.g. 5% of supply
voltage, in volts.
VC = the value found from AS3008.1.1 tables in mV/A.m
L = the route length of circuit, in metres
I = the current to be carried by the cable, in amperes.

Activity - 17 – Calculating maximum length of cable

Use AS 3008.1.1

Calculate the maximum length of a 3 phase 2.5mm2 V75 multicore copper cable
protected by a 20A C.B, if the permissible voltage drop is 12V.

Page 217 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 18 - Calculating maximum length of cable

Use AS 3008.1.1

For the installation bellow

Point of supply
Main Switch Distribution
Board Board Load

Consumers Mains Sub Mains Final Sub-circuit

Vd = 3V Vd = 5V V90 4mm2 Cu 4 C+E.
C.B.. = 25A, L = ?

1. Determine the maximum permissible voltage drop (VP) for the f.s.c.

2. Determine the value of VC for the f.s.c.

3. Calculate the maximum permissible length for the f.s.c.

Page 218 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 19 - Calculating maximum length of cable

Use AS 3008.1.1

For the installation bellow

Point of supply
Main Switch Distribution
Board Board Load

Consumers Mains Sub Mains Final Sub-circuit

Vd = 2V Vd = 3V V90 6mm2 Cu 2 C+E.
C.B.. = 40A, L = ?

1. Determine the maximum permissible voltage drop (VP) for the f.s.c.

2. Determine the value of VC for the f.s.c.

3. Calculate the maximum permissible length for the f.s.c.

Page 219 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 20 - Calculating maximum length of cable

Use AS 3008.1.1

For the installation bellow

Point of supply
Main Switch
Load
Board
Consumers Mains Final Sub-circuit
70 mm2 XLPE Cu S.D.I V90 1.5 mm2 Cu
Enclosed in U/G conduit. TPI in conduit.
M.D. = 200A, L = 40m C.B. = 16A, L = ?

1. Calculate the voltage drop (Vd) on the consumer’s mains

2. Calculate the maximum permissible voltage drop (VP) for the f.s.c.

3. Determine the value of VC for the f.s.c.

4. Calculate the maximum permissible length for the f.s.c.

Page 220 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial - Section 7
In the following statements one of the suggested answers is best.

1. A 230V final sub-circuit is considered:

(a) S.E.L.V.
(b) P.E.L.V.
(c) L.V.
(d) H.V.

2. A 400V sub-main is considered:

(a) S.E.L.V.
(b) P.E.L.V.
(c) L.V.
(d) H.V.

3. A 11,000 V sub-transmission power line is considered:

(a) S.E.L.V.
(b) P.E.L.V.
(c) L.V.
(d) H.V.

4. The two points in an electrical installation from where the maximum permissible
voltage drop is considered:

(a) Is between any two points in the installation

(b) Is between the point of supply and the main switchboard
(c) Is between the point of supply and any other point in the installation
(d) Is between the main switchboard and the further most final sub-circuit

5. The voltage drop between the point of supply for the low voltage electrical
installation and any point in that electrical installation does not exceed ______ of
the nominal voltage at the point of supply;

(a) 2%
(b) 5%
(c) 7%
(d) 10%

Page 221 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

6. For final sub circuits, with the load distributed over the whole of the length of the
circuit (such as socket-outlets or lighting points), ______ the current rating of the
protective device may be used as the value of current.

(a) 0.9 x
(b) 1.45 x
(c) 1.6 x
(d) 0.5 x

7. An acceptable line voltage drop across an entire 400V installation would be;

(a) 15V
(b) 21V
(c) 30V
(d) 40V

8. Where the point of supply is the low voltage terminals of a substation located on
the premises containing the electrical installation and dedicated to the installation,
the permissible voltage drop may be;

(a) 2%
(b) 5%
(c) 7%
(d) 10%

9. The drop in voltage at any point in an extra-low voltage electrical installation

shall not exceed ______ of the nominal value when all live conductors are
carrying the circuit-operating current.

(a) 2%
(b) 5%
(c) 7%
(d) 10%

10. To convert values of VC listed in the Voltage Drop Tables of AS3008.1.1, to a

single phase values of VC, the table value must be multiplied by;

(a) 1
(b) 1.155
(c) √3
(d) 0.866

Page 222 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

11. For the installation in figure 2 determine the;

Point of supply
Main Switch Distribution
Board Board Load

Consumers Mains Sub Mains Final Sub-circuit

185 mm2 XLPE Cu S.D.I 95 mm2 XLPE Cu SDI. 2.5 mm2 V90 Cu 4 C+E.
Enclosed in U/G ducts. Laid in tref oil M.D. = 20 A, L = 30m
M.D. = 350A, L = 50m M.D. = 250A, L = 60m
figure 2.
(a) Consumer’s Mains Vd
(b) Sub Mains Vd
(c) F.s.c. Vd
(d) Total Vd

Page 223 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

12. For the installation in figure 3 determine the;

Point of supply
Main Switch Distribution
Board Board Load

Consumers Mains Sub Mains Final Sub-circuit

35 mm2 XLPE Cu S.D.I 10 mm2 V90 Cu 2 C+E. 4 mm2 V90 Cu 2 C+E.
Laid f lat touching. M.D. = 50A, L = 25m M.D. = 25 A, L = 31m
M.D. = 125A, L = 38m
figure 3.
(a) Consumer’s Mains Vd
(b) Sub Mains Vd
(c) F.s.c. Vd
(d) Total Vd

Page 224 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

13. For the installation in figure 4 determine the;

Point of supply
Main Switch Distribution
Board Board Load

Vd = ?V Vd = 6V Vd = ?V

Consumers Mains Sub Mains Final Sub-circuit

240 mm2 XLPE Cu S.D.I. V90 Cu 4 C+E. V90 Cu 2 C+E.
Buried direct in tref oil M.D. = 63A, L = 45m M.D. = 32 A, L = 40m
M.D. = 400A, L = 55m
figure 4
(a) Consumer’s Mains Vd
(b) Sub Mains c.s.a
(c) Final sub-circuit c.s.a.

Page 225 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

14. For the installation of figure 5 determine;

Point of supply
Main Switch
Load
Board
Consumers Mains Final Sub-circuit
120 mm2 XLPE Cu S.D.I V90 10mm2 Cu
Enclosed in U/G conduit. SDI in tref oil.
M.D. = 250A, L = 40m C.B. = 50A, L = ?

figure 5.

(a) Consumer’s Mains Vd

(b) Final sub-circuit maximum length.

Page 226 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

15. Calculate the voltage drop on the paralleled consumers mains in figure 6(hint
see AS3000 clause 3.6.3)

Point of supply
Main Switch
Board
Consumers Mains
2 x 120 mm2 XLPE (Al) S.D.I
Parallel connected
Buried direct in tref oil
M.D. = 250A, L = 150m

figure 6.

Page 227 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 8 - Cable selection based on earth fault

loop impedance requirements
Topics

• Cable impedance tables in AS/NZS3008.1.1

• Earth fault loop impedance calculations

• Cable selection

Aim
Learners will be able to determine the maximum permissible impedance and length of
a cable to satisfy AS3000 earth fault loop impedance requirements.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 Describe the AS/NZS 3000 requirements for maximum fault loop impedance in
an installation.

 Locate appropriate tables in AS/NZS 3008.1.1 to determine cable impedances.

 Calculate the expected fault loop impedance for a given circuit arrangement.

 Select cables to satisfy fault loop impedance requirements in addition to

current carrying capacity requirements and voltage drop requirements.

 Determine the maximum permissible length of a conductor based on earth fault

loop impedance.

Page 228 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Introduction.
In previous lessons we have examined the need to select conductor sizes based on
current rating and voltage drop. In this lesson we will examine the effect of fault loop
impedance on the selection of conductor sizes in circuits. Voltage drop limits the
maximum length of conductors when current is flowing under normal operating
conditions i.e. from phase to phase or phase to neutral.

Earth fault loop impedance limits the maximum length of conductors when current is
flowing under earth fault conditions i.e. from phase to earth. The protective earthing
conductor is usually smaller than the active or neutral conductors; its impedance will
be higher than that of the active or neutral conductors. Under earth fault conditions
the combined impedance of the fault path from active to protective earthing conductor
will be higher than the impedance of a fault path from active to active, or active to
neutral. In long cable runs because the higher impedance from active to protective
earthing conductor the fault current will be lower than that of a fault on a cable of a
shorter length. The lower the earth fault current, the longer the circuit protection
device will take to operate. In the time that it takes to operate the circuit protection
device a touch voltage will be present on the exposed conductive parts of the
apparatus under fault. If a person is in simultaneous contact with the exposed
conductive part and earth they said to be in “indirect contact with live parts”

One of the fundamental safety principles required by AS3000 is fault protection

(protection from indirect contact with live parts). The most commonly used method
for providing this protection is automatic disconnection of supply. Automatic
disconnection of the supply (AS3000 clause 2.4.2) shall be achieved by:-

 provision of a system of earthing in which exposed conductive parts are

connected to protective earthing conductors, in accordance with section 5, and

 disconnection of the fault by and overcurrent device or an RCD.

Each circuit in an electrical installation is to be protected such that automatic

disconnection of supply will occur within the specified disconnection time when a fault
of negligible impedance occurs between an active conductor and a protective earthing
conductor or an exposed conductive part anywhere in the electrical installation.

This condition is met when the impedance of the path taken by the fault current,
known as the earth fault-loop, is low enough to allow sufficient current to flow to
cause the protective device to operate within the specified time.

The earth fault-loop in an MEN system comprises as shown in figure B5 of AS3000.

 The fault current flows from the supply transformer to the fault through the
active conductors.

 It returns on the fault side of the installation MEN connection through the

______________________ conductor. (figure B5 of AS3000.)

 From the MEN the fault current returns along the _______________ conductor
to the supply transformer.

Page 229 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 1 - Cable impedance tables in AS/NZS3008.1.1

The total earth fault loop impedance will be the sum of the supply transformer
impedance and the impedance of all cables in the path between the supply and the
fault.
For the purpose of this subject, using cable ratings up to 400A, the reactance will be
treated as negligible, calculations will be done using only the A.C. resistance. Cables
less than (say 120mm2) only have to consider resistance but larger cables should take
reactance into account The A.C. resistance of conductors in any given combination of
cables can be predicted before the cable is selected and installed by using tables 34 to
39 of Section 4 of as 3008.1.1 (2017).

Section Purpose
Contents Lists, sections, clause appendices tables and figures.
1 Scope, references and Section definitions.
2 Summary of cable selection procedure.
Cable selection based on current carrying capacity; includes
3
Tables I to 29

4 Cable selection based on voltage drop; includes Tables 30 to 51.

Cable selection based on short circuit performance; includes Table

5
52 to 55
Appendices Additional information to help apply the standard

The unit values in tables 34 to 39 are given in Ohms per kilometre (Ω/km). To
calculate the A.C. resistance of a given conductor use the equation;

where
R = the resistance of the cable in Ohms (Ω)
RC = the table value in ohms per km (Ω/km)
L = the length of the conductor in meters (m)

Page 230 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 1 - Calculating cable A.C. resistance (RC)

AS 3008.1.1 (tables 34 to 39)

Calculate the A.C. resistance of a single conductor in the Table / Column

following cable types and lengths (use normal operating temp.) Number

1. 1 mm2 SDI V90 (Cu) cable, 30m long.

2. 16 mm2 SDI XLPE (Cu) cable, 45m long.

3. 10 mm2 2C+E V90 (Cu) cable, 45m long.

4. 10 mm2 4C+E V90 (Cu) cable, 45m long.

5. 120 mm2 4C+E V90 (Cu) cable, 55m long.

6. 120 mm2 4C+E V90 (Al) cable, 55m long.

7. 240 mm2 4C+E XLPE (Al) cable, 55m long.

Page 231 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 2 – Total earth fault loop impedances (ZS)

Using AS 3008.1.1 (tables 34 to 39) for the diagram below determine the;

ZTx = 0.019 ohms

Distribution mains
185 mm2 4C XLPE (Al) Consumer’s mains
100m 16 mm 2 S.D.I XLPE (Cu)
15m

Main Switch

C32A C.B.
Load
Customer’s
Neutral Link

f .s.c
6 mm 2 2C+E V90 (Cu)
25m

1. Impedance of the distribution mains.

2. Impedance of the consumer’s mains.

3. Impedance of the final sub-circuit.

4. Total earth fault loop impedance.

Page 232 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 2 – Earth loop impedance calculations

Any circuit protected by an RCD satisfies the requirements of earth fault loop
impedance. RCD’s that protect light and power circuits must have a rated residual
current of not greater than 30mA (AS3000 section 2.6.3). Calculation of earth fault
loop impedance to these circuits is pointless. The low current (<30mA) and extremely
fast operation (<30mS) ensure automatic disconnection of supply within the required
time. Type ‘S’ RCD’s which are have a rated residual current of in the range of 100 to
300mA (AS3000 clause 2.6.2.3) used to protect against the initiation of fire, will also
satisfy earth fault loop impedance requirements.

Circuits that require additional protection by RCD’s (AS3000 section 2.6.3);

Domestic and residential installations

AS3000:2018 clause 2.6.3.2.2 specifies that ‘Additional protection by RCDs with a

maximum residual current of 30 mA shall be provided for all final subcircuits in
domestic and residential installations.’

Non-domestic and non-residential installations

AS3000:2018 clause 2.6.3.2.3.3 specifies that additional protection by RCDs is

required for final subcircuits supplying:
 Socket-outlets not exceeding 32A,

 lighting circuits not exceeding 32 A,

 direct connected hand-held electrical equipment, e.g. hair dryers or tools, and

 direct connected electrical equipment that represents and increased risk of

electric shock. E.g. workshops and particular industrial activities.

Circuits that are not RCD protected, which earth fault loop impedance should be
applied to include;

o Socket outlets exceeding 32A.

o Fixed or stationary (mass exceeds 18 kg) equipment

o Sub-mains

Disconnection times

When an earth fault occurs a touch voltage appears on exposed conductive parts. This
touch voltage will disconnected quickly if the earth fault loop impedance is low enough
to ensure a large current flow occurs to operate the circuit protection quickly. This is
done in miniature C.B.’s by the magnetic trip mechanism. If the fault current is too
low the C.B. will trip by the thermal mechanism. The longer time a person is in
contact with a touch voltage the greater the risk of injury to the person.

Clauses 1.5.5.3(d) and 5.7.2 of AS3000 specify time in which automatic disconnection
of supply must occur.

Page 233 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 3 - Protection by automatic disconnection

of supply.

Read AS 3000 clause 1.5.5.3

List the maximum disconnection times for circuits that supply; RCD
protected
(Y/N)

1. lighting points

2. 10A socket outlets

3. 32A socket outlets

4. Hot plates

5. an air conditioner rated at 18A per phase.

6. a 80A sub-main

7. an induction motor rated at 22A/ phase

8. a hot water system

8. a hard wired electric motor.

Page 234 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

The total earth fault loop impedance (ZS) is calculated by a variation of ohms law
(AS3000 section B4.5);

where
ZS = the total earth fault loop impedance in Ohms (Ω)
UO = the nominal phase voltage in volts (V)
Ia = current causing automatic operation of the protective device in
amperes (A). Figure 2 shows values Ia for 0.4 and 5.0 second
disconnection times.

5.0S

0.4S

I/I N

7.5 x

4.0 x 12.5 x

figure 2 – Clipsal 6 and 10 kA M.C.B. characteristic curve

 Type C circuit breakers - general use (most common)

 Type D circuit breakers - motor protection

Page 235 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

When designing circuits for a 5 second disconnection time, the circuit protection
manufacturers’ data must be used. Calculations and table data in AS3000 refers to a
0.4 second disconnection time. The value of 4 x in figure 2 is the current required to
operate the circuit breaker within 5 seconds. This is not be confused with a type ‘B’
circuit breaker which will operate in 0.4 seconds if 4 times it rated current passes
through it.

Activity - 4 - Total earth fault loop impedance (ZS)

Read AS 3000 section B4.5

1. Calculate the maximum permissible earth fault loop impedance (ZS) of a circuit
supplying a 32A three phase socket outlet that is protected by a type ‘C’ 32A
M.C.B. in a 230/400 volt installation.

2. Calculate the maximum permissible earth fault loop impedance (ZS) of a circuit
supplying a hot water service type ‘C’ 20A M.C.B. in a 230/400 volt non-
domestic installation.

3. Calculate the maximum permissible earth fault loop impedance (ZS) of a circuit
supplying a motor protected by a type ‘D’ 40A M.C.B. in a 230/400 volt non-
domestic installation.

Page 236 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

The maximum value of total earth fault loop impedance (ZS) can also be found using
table 8.1 of AS3000. Only 0.4 second disconnection times are shown for circuit
breakers. If an earth fault loop impedance is required for a fixed or stationary
appliance with a 5 second disconnection time it will have to be calculated.

Activity - 5 - Total earth fault loop impedance (ZS)

Use Table 8.1 of AS3000.

Determine the total earth fault loop impedance for the following
circuits.

1. A 25A socket outlet in data room protected b a 25A type C

circuit breaker.

2. A phase 63 A socket outlet for a welder protected by a 63A

type C circuit breaker.

3. A range circuit protected by a 20A H.R.C. fuse.

4. A sub main protected by a 100A H.R.C. fuse.

Internal Earth fault loop impedance (Zint)

The total earth fault loop impedance is made up of two parts. The External and
Internal earth fault loop impedances (see figure B5 AS3000). In the vast majority of
cases the impedance of the external section will be unknown. To simplify calculations
it is assumed that at the circuit protection device (reference point) as shown in figure
B5 AS3000, that at least 80% (0.8 x) of the nominal supply voltage (230V) is
available under earth fault conditions. When calculating the internal earth fault loop
impedance 80% of the nominal supply voltage is used. If a larger value of voltage is
present, a higher earth fault current will flow. The operating time of the protection
device will be shorter and disconnect the circuit automatically in less time than is
required.

Page 237 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

The internal earth fault loop impedance (Zint) is calculated by a variation of ohms law
(AS3000 section B5.2.1);

where
Zint = the total earth fault loop impedance in Ohms (Ω)
UO = the nominal phase voltage in volts (V)
Ia = current causing automatic operation of the protective device in
amperes (A).

Activity - 6 - Internal earth fault loop impedance

(Zint)

Read AS 3000 sectionB4.5

1. Calculate the maximum permissible internal earth fault loop impedance (Zint)
of a circuit supplying a 32A three phase socket outlet that is protected by a
type ‘C’ 32A M.C.B. in a 230/400 volt installation.

2. Calculate the maximum permissible earth fault loop impedance (Zint) of a circuit
supplying a hot water service type ‘C’ 20A M.C.B. in a 230/400 volt non-
domestic installation.

Once the maximum permissible internal earth loop impedance is known, the
maximum length of the cable can be determined so that the impedance of the cable is
less than or equal to the maximum permissible internal earth fault impedance.

Page 238 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 3 - Cable selection based on earth loop impedance.

The major impact that earth fault loop impedance has on a circuit is to limit its length
for a given C.S.A. Tables 34 to 39 can be used to predict the earth fault loop
impedance of a cable for a given length in the design stage.

In most cases if the cable has been selected correctly based on current carrying
capacity and volt drop the earth fault loop impedance will not be an issue. Normally
voltage drop is the most significant factor that limits the length of a cable. Long cables
which are lightly loaded however can be an issue.

Activity - 7 - Internal earth fault loop impedance

(Zint)

Use Table 35 of AS 3008.1.1.

The circuit supplying the 32A three phase socket in activity 6(1) of this section, is
wired in 4 mm2 4C+e V90 orange circular cable. The length of the cable run is
60m.

1. Determine the impedance of the cable between active and protective earthing
conductors

2. Does the circuit comply with AS 3000 requirement for earth fault loop
impedance (Y/N) and why?

3. Calculate the voltage drop on this section of cable.

Page 239 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 8 - Internal earth fault loop impedance

(Zint)

Use Table 35 of AS 3008.1.1.

The circuit supplying the hot water system in activity 6(2) of this section, is wired
in 2.5 mm2 2C+e V90 orange circular cable. The length of the cable run is 60m.

1. Determine the impedance of the cable between active and protective earthing
conductors

2. Does the circuit comply with AS 3000 requirement for earth fault loop
impedance (Y/N) and why?

3. Calculate the voltage drop on this section of cable.

From the results of activities 7 and 8 it becomes obvious that voltage drop is the
limiting factor on the length of the conductor.

A simpler way to determine the maximum length of a conductor is to use Table B1 of

AS3000

Page 240 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 4 - Maximum length based on earth loop impedance.

Table B1 of AS3000 specifies maximum route lengths for a number of standard circuit
protection device and cable size combinations. Only lengths relating to 0.4
disconnection times are shown.

Circuits supplying socket outlets and lighting points which are R.C.D. protected are
not restricted in length by earth fault loop impedance, the R.C.D. will operate under
active to earth fault conditions despite excessive earth fault loop impedance.

Voltage drop on the circuit must still be considered.

The circuits in the examples of activity 9 are of a type that are typically not R.C.D.
protected and will have a 0.4 disconnection time.

Activity - 9 – Maximum length of conductors

Use Table B1 of AS 3000

Determine the maximum route lengths based on earth fault loop impedance for
the following circuits in a 230/400 volt installation.

1. A 4mm2 Cu 4C+e V90 circuit supplying a 32A three phase

socket outlet that is protected by a type ‘C’ 32A M.C.B.

2. A 25A socket outlet in data room protected b a 25A type ‘C’

circuit breaker wired in 4.0 mm2 Cu V75 twin + E.

3. A phase 63 A socket outlet for a welder protected by a 63A

type ‘D’ circuit breaker wired in 16mm2 Cu 4C+E

Page 241 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Calculation of maximum length of conductors based on earth fault loop

impedance.

If a cable / circuit breaker combination not listed in table B1 of AS3000 or the circuit
supplied has a 5 second disconnection time the earth fault loop impedance must be
calculated.

The maximum route length based on earth fault loop impedance (Lmax) is calculated
by (AS3000 section B5.2.2);

where
Lmax = maximum route length in metres
UO = the nominal phase voltage in volts (V)
ρ = resistivity at normal working temperature in Ω-mm2/m
= 22.5 x 10-3 for copper
= 36 x 10-3 for aluminium
Ia = current causing instantaneous operation of the protective device in
amperes (A).
= the current that assures operation of the protective fuse concerned,
in the specified time
Sph = cross sectional area of the active conductor of the circuit concerned
in mm2
Spe = cross sectional area of the protective earthing conductor concerned
in mm2

This calculation was used to determine the maximum lengths of cables in table B1 of
AS3000. If a circuit has a disconnection time of 5 seconds the mean tripping current
of the protection device must be found from manufactures data (figures 2 to 6). The
multiples of the nominal current are then applied to the nominal current rating to find
Ia.
The characteristic curves of circuit breakers in the 5 second range vary widely.
Activities 10 to 13 demonstrate this. The earth fault loop impedance must be
calculated to suit the characteristic of the brand of circuit breaker actually used.

The 5 second trip characteristics of circuit breakers in the lower current ranges (10-
63A) are very different to the characteristics of circuit breakers in the range of 250-
400A.

Page 242 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 3 - www.clipsal.com

Activity – 10 – Maximum length of conductors

Use Section B5.2.2 of AS 3000 to calculate the

maximum route length based on earth fault
loop impedance for A 4mm2 2C+e V90 circuit
supplying a cook top protected by a C25A
Clipsal M.C.B. in a 230/400 volt non-domestic
installation.

1. Maximum disconnection time

2. Determine from manufactures data (figure 3) the current IA.

3. Calculate the maximum length of the circuit based on earth

fault loop impedance.

Page 243 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

0.4

5x 7.5 x

figure 4 – www.hagerbr.com.au

Activity – 11 – Maximum length of conductors

Use Section B5.2.2 of AS 3000 to calculate the

maximum route length based on earth fault
loop impedance for A 6mm2 4C+e V90 circuit
supplying a 32A three phase socket outlet
that is protected by a Hager C32A M.C.B. in a
230/400 volt installation.

1. Maximum disconnection time

2. Determine from manufactures data (figure 4) the current Ia

3. Calculate the maximum length of the circuit based on earth

fault loop impedance.

Page 244 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 5 – www.nhp.com.au/tembreak2/manuals/asp

Page 245 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity – 12 – Maximum length of conductors

Use Section B5.2.2 of AS 3000 to calculate the

maximum route length based on earth fault
loop impedance for a 16 mm2 2C+E V90 circuit,
supplying a single phase sub main protected by
a single pole 63A Tembreak 2 C.B. in a
230/400 volt installation.

1. Maximum disconnection time

2. Determine from manufactures data (figure 5) the current Ia

3. Calculate the maximum length of the circuit based on earth

fault loop impedance.

Page 246 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 6 - www.nhp.com.au/tembreak2/manuals/asp

Page 247 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity – 13 – Maximum length of conductors

Use Section B5.2.2 of AS 3000 to Determine

the maximum route length based on earth fault
loop impedance for a 150 mm2 single core XLPE
circuit, supplying a three phase sub main
protected by a 400A type ‘C’ M.C.B. in a
230/400 volt installation.

1. Maximum disconnection time

2. Determine from manufactures data (figure 6) the current Ia

3. Calculate the maximum length of the circuit based on earth

fault loop impedance.

Page 248 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

The situation can arise, on a long run of cable, where cable size has been increased to
compensate for voltage drop, the maximum demand (IB) will be much lower than the
current carrying capacity of the cable (IZ). Figure 7 below shows a scenario where
both current carrying capacity and voltage drop comply with AS3000 requirements,
but the earth fault loop impedance does not.

Point of supply 400A

Main Switch Distribution
Board Board Load

Consumers Sub Mains Final

Mains 150 mm2 XLPE Cu Sub-circuit
Tref oil on Cable ladder.
Iz = 403A (T8C5)
M.D. = 150A, L = 300m
figure 7

Clause 2.5.3.1 AS3000 Protection against overload IB ≤IN ≤ IZ.

In this case IB (150A) is less than IN (400A) and IN is less than IZ (403A), so
protection against overload is provided.

Clause 3.6.2 AS3000 Voltage drop should not exceed 5% of nominal supply voltage.
When calculating voltage drop it is permitted to use the lower maximum demand
current rather than the rating of the circuit breaker.

L  I  VC 300 150  0.316

Vd    14.22V
1000 1000

The voltage drop on the circuit is not excessive and complies with AS3000
requirements. While a 160A would be a more suitable rating of a circuit breaker, than
the 400A device, it still complies with AS3000 requirements for overload protection
and voltage drop.

Clause 1.5.5.3 AS300 Protection by automatic disconnection of supply

Circuits under fault conditions between active and earth must be automatically
disconnected from the supply with the specified time. In this case for a sub-main, the
required disconnection time is 5 seconds .

0.8  U O
Clause 5.2.1 AS3000 Determination of maximum length Zint 
Ia

From manufactures data such as the graph shown in figure 6 of this section, the
current required to operate the 400A C.B. in 5 seconds would be 8 x 400A which
equals 3200A.

0.8  UO 0.8  230

Zint    0.0575 
Ia 8  400

Page 249 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

From table 34 of AS3008.1.1

0.160  300
Active 150 mm2 Z PH   0.048 
1000

0.494  300
Protective Earth 50 mm2 Z PE   0.1482 
1000

ZCable  ZPH  ZPE  0.048  0.1482  0.1962 Ω

The combined impedance of the cables (active and protective earthing conductor) is
larger than the permitted internal earth fault loop impedance (Zint). The 400A circuit
breaker would take longer than 5 Seconds to operate. The circuit does not comply.

Solution 1 – Decrease the rating of the circuit breaker to 160A (Ia also changes)

Zint = 0.8 x UO = 0.8 x 230 = 0.1533

Ia 7.5 x 160

The circuit still does not comply. The impedance of the cable is greater than the
permissible internal earth fault loop impedance.

Solution 2 – Decrease the rating of the circuit breaker to 160A and increase the size
of the protective earthing conductor.

ZPE  Zint  ZPH  0.153  0.048  0.105Ω

Increase the protective earthing conductor to 70mm2.

0.342  300
Z PE   0.1026  (AS3008.1.1 T34C5)
1000

ZCable  ZPH  ZPE  0.048  0.1026  0.15062 Ω

The cable impedance (0.15062Ω) is now less than the permissible internal fault loop
impedance (0.1533Ω). The circuit does comply.

Page 250 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial - Section 8
In the following statements one of the suggested answers is best.

1. The internal earth fault loop path is from;

(a) active to neutral conductor

(b) active to phase conductor
(c) active to protective earthing conductor
(d) phase to functional earthing conductor.

2. The external earth fault loop path is from;

(a) active to neutral conductor

(b) active to phase conductor
(c) active to protective earthing conductor
(d) phase to functional earthing conductor.

3. The maximum permissible disconnection time to provide fault protection

(protection against indirect contact), for a circuit supplying 10A socket outlets is;

(a) 0.4 seconds.

(b) 1.45 seconds.
(c) 5 seconds.
(d) 1 hour

4. The device that will operate to provide fault protection (protection against indirect
contact) in the shortest time on a circuit supplying 10A socket outlets is;

(a) a H.R.C. fuse.

(b) an R.C.D.
(c) a thermal magnetic circuit breaker
(d) a thermal overload.

5. The maximum permissible disconnection time to provide fault protection

(protection against indirect contact), supplying lighting points, is;

(a) 0.4 seconds.

(b) 1.45 seconds.
(c) 5 seconds.
(d) 1 hour

6. The device that will operate to provide fault protection (protection against indirect
contact) in the shortest time on a circuit supplying lighting points is;

Page 251 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

(a) a H.R.C. fuse.

(b) an R.C.D.
(c) a thermal magnetic circuit breaker
(d) a thermal overload.

7. The maximum permissible disconnection time to provide fault protection

(protection against indirect contact), for a sub-main rated at 63A, is;

(a) 0.4 seconds.

(b) 1.45 seconds.
(c) 5 seconds.
(d) 1 hour

8. The device that should not be used to provide fault protection, for a sub-main
rated at 63A, is;

(a) a H.R.C. fuse.

(b) an R.C.D.
(c) a thermal magnetic circuit breaker
(d) a electronic circuit breaker

9. When calculating the internal earth fault loop impedance the voltage present at
the circuit protection device (reference point) is;

(a) 230V
(b) 240V
(c) 184V
(d) 400V

10. The maximum value of earth fault loop impedance for a sub main protected by a
63 A H.R.C. fuse is;

(a) 0.55Ω
(b) 0.94Ω
(c) 1.53Ω
(d) 1MΩ.

Page 252 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

For tutorial questions 11 to 13 refer to figure 8.

figure 8 – www.clipsal.com

11. Calculate the total earth fault loop impedance for circuit supplying a hot water
system protected by a Clipsal 20A type ‘C’ circuit breaker.

12. Calculate the internal earth fault loop impedance for circuit supplying a hot water
system protected by a Clipsal 20A type ‘C’ circuit breaker.

Page 253 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

13. If the hot water system of question 12 is wired in 2.5mm2 T+E with a circuit
length of 35 m;

(a) Calculate the internal earth fault loop impedance of the final sub-circuit
(hint use AS3008.1.1 to determine Zph and Zpe)

(b) Does the calculated internal earth loop impedance comply with AS3000?

(c) Calculate the voltage drop on the H.W.S. final sub-circuit.

(d) If 4.6V was lost on the consumers mains, does the final-sub circuit comply
with AS3000 requirement for voltage drop? Y/N

14. A 50 mm2 copper sub-main is protected by a 125A H.R.C. fuse with a route
length of 80 m

(a) Determine from table 8.1 AS3000 the maximum permissible internal
earth fault loop impedance.

(b) Use table B1 of AS3000 to determine if the route length is compliant.

Page 254 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial question 15 refers to figure 8.

figure 8 – www.clipsal.com.au

15. An underground 25mm2 XLPE copper sub main protected by a 100A Clipsal
circuit breaker.

(a) Determine the maximum permissible operating time.

(b) Using figure 8 determine the current Ia.

(c) Calculate the maximum permissible length to satisfy earth fault loop
requirements.

Page 255 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 9 - Selecting protection devices

Topics

• Selecting overload protection devices

• Short-circuit hazards

• Selecting short-circuit protection devices

• Protection against indirect contact

• AS 3000 Requirements

Aim
Learners will be able to determine and meet the requirements of AS3000 when
selecting devices to provide cable overload, short circuit and fault protection
(protection against indirect contact).

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 Explain how the coordination between conductors and protection devices

ensures the protection of cables from overheating due to over current.

 Apply AS/NZS 3000 requirements for selecting devices to protect against

overload current for a range of circuits and loads.

 Describe the possible injuries to persons and livestock from hazards due to a
short circuit.

 Apply AS/NZS 3000 requirements for selecting devices to protect against short-
circuit current for a range of installation conditions.

 Outline acceptable methods of protection against indirect contact.

 Apply the AS/NZS 3000 requirements for selecting methods and devices to
protect against indirect contact for a range of installation types and conditions.

Page 256 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Introduction.
This section will cover 3 types of electrical faults that must be protected against;

o Overload when simply too much load is applied to another wise

undamaged circuit, causing a larger current to flow than under
normal operation.

o Short Circuit when a fault of negligible impedance occurs between live

conductors, usually due to damage to insulation or failure of
equipment. Known as the ‘Prospective Short Circuit
Current’ this is the largest of all electrical faults. Current will
only be limited by the impedance of the cables and will be of an
extremely high value.

o Earth Fault when a live conductor comes in contact with conductive parts
which are ‘earthed’. Usually due to insulation failure. The
current that flows will be of a lower value than the ‘Prospective
Short Circuit Current’ as the earth fault loop impedance will be
higher than the cable impedance of a phase to phase fault.

Clause 1.5.5.1 Fault protection (protection against indirect

contact) requires that one or more methods are used to prevent
a touch voltage occurring on the conductive parts under fault.
Automatic disconnection of supply is the most commonly used
method. A combination of circuit protection and a protective
earthing conductor is used to provide a low impedance path so
that a sufficient current flows to operate the protection device
in the required time.
Normal operation

C32A 4.0mm2 x 60m T+E in air VP = 230V

L1

L2

L3
ZL = 7.2Ω
N
Zs = 0.153Ω Zfsc = 0.3366Ω

figure 1.

Figure 1 shows a normal healthy circuit. The current is limited by the impedance of
the load. Under normal conditions the impedance of the cable is so low it is considered
negligible. The current in the cable is calculated using ohms law. As the circuit is a
balanced three phase load no current flows in the neutral. The current rating of the
cable is 32A (IZ).

The ratio of the current actually flowing through the circuit (I) to the nominal rating of
the circuit protection device (IN) give the multiples of rated current (IM)

I M  I/I N

This ratio is used to predict the operating time of the protection device.

Page 257 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity – 1 – Normal operation

1. Calculate the Line current (IL) for the circuit shown in figure 1.

2. Calculate the multiple of the C32A C.B. rating.

3. Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ Y/N

4. Draw on figure 2 a line to show the multiple of rated current. Max ______

Will the circuit breaker operate (trip), if so in what time? Y / N Min ______

figure 2. – www.clipsal.com

Page 258 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 1 - Selection of overload devices

Overload condition
C32A 4.0 mm2 x 60m T+E in air VP = 230V
L1

L2

L3
ZL = 3.6Ω
N
Zs = 0.153Ω Zfsc = 0.3366Ω

figure 3.

Figure 3 shows the same circuit in an overload condition. By adding more load in
parallel to each phase, the circuit impedance has decreased from 7.2 Ω to 3.6Ω. The
cable impedance is still considered negligible. The circuit line current will increase to a
value higher than the rated current of the cable (IZ).

Figure 4 shows how a small increase in current above the maximum current carrying
capacity will cause a large increase in the operating temperature of the conductor. The
increased operating temperature over time will damage the insulation of the
conductor. It will take several hours at these over loads for the temperature to reach
those shown if figure 4.

Cable Temperature Rise

200

180

160
Degree's Celcius ( OC)

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.8 2

Multiples of Rated Current

figure 4.

The graph of figure 4 is based on a copper V90 cable (maximum temperature 75OC)
installed unenclosed in air with an ambient air temperature of 40OC. Calculated as per
clause 4.4 of AS3008.1.1

Page 259 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A- Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

To protect the cable from an overload the circuit protection device must operate in a
suitable time so the cable does not operate above its maximum (normal) operating
temperature for a prolonged period of time.

In section 6 it was shown that for cables to be protected against overload current
AS3000 rule 2.5.3.1 must be met.

Activity - 2 - AS3000 requirements - Overload

Read AS 3000 clause 2.5.3

If the following equations are true the circuit will operate correctly under normal
conditions and the circuit protection will operate in the required time if the circuit is
overloaded.
I B ≤ IN ≤ IZ
where
IB = the maximum demand of the circuit in Amperes
IN = the current rating of the circuit protection device (fuse or C.B.) in
Amperes.
IZ = the current rating of the conductor after all applicable de-ratings
have been applied.
and

I2 ≤ 1.45 x IZ
where
I2 = the current ensuring effective operation of the protective device
(causes protection device to operate in 1 hour (3600 seconds))
= 1.45 x IN for Circuit Breakers.
= 1.6 x IN for H.R.C. fuses.
IZ = the current rating of the conductor after all applicable de-ratings
have been applied.
As the thermal trip mechanism of a circuit breaker has a similar heating characteristic
to that of the cable it protects, 100% of the cables current rating can be used. The
statement I2 ≤ 1.45 x IZ will always be true if IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ is true.

If a cable is protected by a H.R.C. fuse the cable must be de-rated by a factor of 0.9.
The statement I2 ≤ 1.45 x IZ will always be true if;

IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ x 0.9

Page 260 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity – 3 – Overload condition

1. Calculate the Line current (IL) for the circuit shown in figure 3.

2. Calculate the multiple of the C32A C.B. rating.

3. Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ Y/N

4. Draw on figure 5 a line to show the multiple of rated current. Max ______

Will the circuit breaker operate (trip), if so in what time? Y / N Min ______

figure 5. – www.clipsal.com

Page 261 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
installations.

Activity - 4 – Over load protection

Where possible, complete the following table using minimum possible current ratings.

Use AS 3000 Tables 8.1, 8.2 or B1 as a guide to preferred protection device ratings.

Type Load Max Circuit Minimum De-rating Cable Current IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ I2 ≤ 1.45 x IZ

Demand Protection Cable Current factor Rating after
Rating Rating D.R.
IB IN IZ Y/N Y/N

1 C.B. 20A 20A 20A

2 H.R.C. 20A 20A 20A

Fuse

Page 262 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 4 – Over load protection (con’t)

Type Load Max Circuit Minimum De-rating Cable Current IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ I2 ≤ 1.45 x IZ

Demand Protection Cable Current factor Rating after
Rating Rating D.R.
IB IN IZ Y/N Y/N

3 H.R.C. 20A 20A 25A

Fuse

4 H.R.C. 30A 36A

Fuse

5 C.B. 90A 113A

6 C.B. 150A 160A

Page 263 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 4 – Over load protection (con’t)

Type Load Max Circuit Minimum De-rating Cable Current IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ I2 ≤ 1.45 x IZ

Demand Protection Cable Current factor Rating after
Rating Rating D.R.
IB IN IZ Y/N Y/N

7 C.B. 250A 250A

8 H.R.C. 250A 250A 250A

Fuse

9 C.B. 375A 400A

10 H.R.C. 375A 400A

Fuse

Page 264 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 2 - Short Circuit Hazards

Short Circuit condition

C32A 4.0mm2 x 60m T+E in air VP = 0V

L1

L2

L3
ZL = 7.2Ω
N
Zs = 0.153Ω Zfsc = 0.3366Ω

figure 6

Figure 6 shows a circuit condition known as a bolted symmetrical fault. The impedance
of the fault is considered to be negligible. The only impedance remaining to limit the
circuit current is the impedance of the cable. Interestingly the fault forms a star point
on the supply side of the load, the cable impedances form a balanced star connected
circuit. As the circuit is balanced no current will flow in the neutral, the neutral
conductor impedance is not included when calculating the short circuit current.

The circuit protection device either circuit breaker or H.R.C. fuse must be capable of
breaking this prospective short circuit current without damage to either the cables or
the protection device itself.

Effects of Prospective Short Circuit Current

An un-interrupted prospective short circuit current will result in catastrophic failure

and destruction of the installation, usually resulting in fire. Hazards associated with
short circuit conditions include;

 Extremely large currents.

 Cables reaching very high temperatures.

 Insulation failure.

 Destruction of protection devices.

 Ionisation of enclosures.

 Severe magnetic stresses on conductors and supports.

 Fatal injury to persons and livestock.

 Fire and explosion (Arc blasts).

Page 266 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity – 5 – Short circuit condition

1. Calculate the Line current (IL) for the circuit shown in figure 6.

2. Calculate the multiple of the C32A C.B. rating.

3. Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ Y/N

4. Draw on figure 7 a line to show the multiple of rated current. Max ______

Will the circuit breaker operate (trip), if so in what time? Y / N Min ______

figure 7. – www.clipsal.com

Page 267 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Calculation of Prospective Short Circuit Current.

The supply authority will give you information required to calculate the prospective
short circuit current at the point of supply (their end of your consumer’s mains). This
information will either be:-

 as a prospective short circuit current, in kA or;

 as an impedance per phase, in ohms or;

 as a fault level, in MVA (mega volt amperes) or;

 as an impedance percent (Z%), (similar to voltage regulation percent in a

transformer) normally at the secondary of a transformer where the installation
in fed from its own substation.

Activity - 6 – N.S.W. Service rules requirements

Read N.S.W.S.R. clause 1.17.4

1. List the nominal prospective short circuit current at the point of supply for
services up to 400A in the following locations.

a) Suburban residential areas

b) Commercial and industrial areas

c) Installations on railway land supplied by RailCorp

Service and Installation Rules of New South Wales October 2019

Section 1.17.4 gives guidance on prospective short circuit current
values at various locations. Refer to figures 1.1 to 1.2. for definition
of point of supply.

Page 268 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Once the prospective short circuit current is known ohms law is used to calculate the
impedance per phase of the supply;

Vp
Zp 
Ip
where
Zp = the phase impedance in ohms (Ω)
Vp = the phase voltage in volts (V).
Ip = the phase current in amperes (A).

Activity - 7 – Supply impedance

1. Calculate nominal impedance per phase of the supply

system at the point of supply for services up to 400A in the
following locations.

a) Suburban residential areas

b) Commercial and industrial areas

c) Installations on railway land

supplied by RailCorp

Page 269 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Fault levels are effectively the apparent power supplied to the circuit under short
circuit conditions. Recall the equation for Apparent power (S).

S  3  VL  IL

where
S = the Apparent power in Volt Amps (VA)
VL = the line voltage in volts (V)
IL = the line current in amperes (A)

The equation above is used to calculate apparent power supplied by devices such as
alternators and transformers. It can be transposed to find the line current supplied by
such devices under normal operating conditions. The Apparent power output of supply
authority transformers in usually given in kVA.

S
IL 
3  VL

Activity - 8 – Line current under normal conditions

1. Calculate maximum rated line current (IL) for a 500kVA

400V supply authority distribution transformer.

Page 270 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

The same equation is used to express prospective short circuit values as VA rather
than amperes. As the line current is extremely high in short circuit faults the fault
level is also extremely high and usually specified in MVA rather than kVA.

MVA 10 6
ISC 
3  VL

where
MVA = the Fault Level (Apparent power) in Mega Volt Amps (MVA)
VL = the line voltage in volts (V)
IS/C = the prospective short circuit current (line current) in amperes (A)

Activity - 9 – Prospective short circuit current

1. Calculate the prospective short circuit current for a 500kVA

400V supply authority distribution transformer with a fault
level of 10MVA.

Supply Authority transformers have a percentage impedance rating. To determine the

percentage impedance the primary winding is short circuited and the secondary
winding is connected to a variable supply. The voltage on the variable supply is
increased from zero volts until the current in the primary reaches the maximum rated
current for normal operation. The voltage on the secondary is recorded and converted
to a percentage of the secondary nominal voltage. What has been found is what
percentage of the nominal supply is required to cause the nominal full load current to
flow under short circuit conditions. It can now be predicted what current will flow
under short circuit conditions if the full nominal supply voltage was connected. This
method is much safer and less destructive that shorting the secondary terminals of a
400 kVA transformer and trying to measure a real short circuit current.

Page 271 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

The prospective short circuit current can be calculated using the equation;

100 x kVA 10 3

ISC 
Z%  3  VL

where
IS/C = the prospective short circuit current (line current) in amperes (A)
kVA = the maximum rated output (Apparent) power in kilo Volt Amps (kVA)
VL = the line voltage in volts (V)

Activity - 10 – Prospective short circuit current

1. Calculate the prospective short circuit current for a 500kVA

400V supply authority distribution transformer with
percentage impedance of 5%.

Page 272 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Whatever form the information comes in, it must be converted to an impedance per
phase value at the point of supply (ZS).

Once the impedances of each part of the supply system are known the prospective
fault current may be calculated:-

Supply Authority Transformer

Output rating: 750kVA 400V Δ
Impedance (Zp) = 0.012Ω/phase
Y
Consumer’s mains XLPE (Cu 4 x single core)
C.S.A. = 120 mm2 Route length = 25m
Impedance (Z p) = 0.004925Ω (AS3008.1.1 T34C5)

Main Switch Board

Sub mains V90 (Cu 4C+E)

C.S.A. = 25 mm2 Route length = 50m
Impedance (Z p) = 0.0442Ω (AS3008.1.1 T35C4)

Sub Distribution Board

Final sub V90 (Cu 2C+E)

C.S.A. = 4mm2 Route length = 35m
Impedance (Zp) = 0.19635Ω (AS3008.1.1 T35C4)

figure 8

Figure 8 show 4 short circuit faults at various locations in an industrial installation

Prospective short circuit current at transformer

VP 230
I SC    19166.6A = 19.166kA
ZP 0.012

Prospective short circuit current at Main Switch Board

VP 230
I SC    13589.3A = 13.589kA
ZP 0.012  0.004925

Page 273 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Prospective short circuit current at sub distribution board

VP 230
I SC    5196.6A = 5.196kA
ZP 0.012  0.004925  0.0442

Prospective short circuit current at the end of the final sub-circuit.

VP 230
I SC   = 893A
ZP 0.012  0.004925  0.0442  0.19635

The worked example above shows how as the prospective short circuit (P.S.C.)
decreases as the location at which the fault occurs moves away from the supply
transformer. The greater the distance from the supply transformer, the higher the
impedance of the cable and the lower the prospective short circuit current that can
flow at that location.

When selecting short circuit protection devices, the devices breaking capacity or “kA”
rating, must be higher than the prospective short circuit current; otherwise the device
may not be able to interrupt the fault or may be damaged in the process.

Figure 9 shows the result of selecting a protection device with a breaking capacity
lower than the prospective short circuit current.

figure 9. - www.eleventrading.com.au

Page 274 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 3 - Selecting Short Circuit Protection Devices

In practice the NSWSR requires prospective fault current rating of circuit at least;

 25kA – Industrial / Commercial installations

 10kA – Domestic / Residential installations

 6kA – Railcorp supplied installations at the point of supply.

It is possible that any time, the supply transformer may be upgraded. If the
installation is only designed to withstand the prospective short circuit current supplied
by the smaller supply transformer the installation would also require an upgrade. The
values stated above are the minimum starting point for selecting protection devices
and the cables they protect. Refer to Section 1, figure 1 N.S.W.S.R. – point of supply.

Activity - 11 – Selection of device

1. Calculate the impedance of the supply at the point of supply

shown in figure 10.

2. Calculate the impedance of the active conductor of the consumers mains in

figure 10 using table 35 of AS3008.1.1 (use 900C temperature)

3. Calculate the prospective fault current at the Service protection device.

Page 275 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Connection Point
(pillar / pole)
P.S.C. = 10kA
M
Consumer’s mains Supply Authority Tariff Main Circuit Breaker
XLPE (Cu 4 x core) Service Protective Meter Switch C20A 3kA
C.S.A. = 16mm2 Device (S.P.D.)
Route length = 20m 100A 33kA H.R.C. fuse

figure 10.

The P.S.C. determined in activity 11 is not the worst case example. Had the cable
been unloaded, the cable would be at lower operating temperature than 750C, say an
ambient temperature of 200C, the cable impedance would have been approximately
80% of the stated value. This in turn would have resulted in a larger P.S.C. To
maintain consistency with HB-301 “Designing to the Australian wiring rules”
(Appendix A and B) the initial cable temperature is assumed to be the cables
maximum “Normal use” operating temperature.

Fault Current Limiters

A Fault Current Limiter (F.C.L.) is a device which limits the prospective fault current
when a fault occurs. A suitably rated H.R.C. fuse or fault current limiting circuit
breaker is placed “upstream” in series with protection devices which have a lower fault
current breaking capacity than the F.C.L. This allows the downstream protection
devices to be physically smaller and cheaper.

The fault current limiter protects the downstream protection devices by operating
before the fault current rises above a value that may damage the downstream device.
The fault current that flows until the F.C.L. operates is known as “let through”, this is
shown in figure 11. The downstream devices must be capable of interrupting the let
through current of the upstream device.

figure 11. - www.littelfuse.com

Page 276 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

This is known as co-ordination or Back up protection. Figure 12 shows how the

100A Service protective device (service fuse) is co-ordinated with the 20A 3kA circuit
breaker to limit the current the circuit breaker is exposed to approximately 2.5kA,
lower than its breaking capacity rating.
In a domestic installation the Service Protective Device (S.P.D.), typically a 100A
H.R.C. fuse with a breaking capacity of between 50 to 33kA is also used as a fault
current limiter. The 100A nominal current rating is large enough to cover the
maximum demand of most domestic installations. In figure 10 a 20A 3kA circuit
breaker is located in a main switch board, which, from exercise 11 was found to have
P.S.C. of 4.5kA. If a short circuit occurs in the final sub circuit, close to the main
switch board a high fault current will flow in the final sub-circuit. The service
protective device (S.P.D.) will operate before the 20A 3kA circuit breaker limiting the
let through current to just 1.8kA, a value that will not cause damage to the
downstream circuit breaker. When the S.P.D. operates supply to the entire
installation will be lost.
Most faults occur away from the Main Switch Board. The increased distance from the
main board decreases the fault current to a point where the lower current rated circuit
breaker operates first. The fault is disconnected without loss of supply to the entire
installation. This is known as “Selectivity” (Discrimination).
Fault current limiters are not expected to operate under overload conditions.

Let Through Chart - B.S. Fuses

figure 12. - N.H.P. Fuse characteristics

Page 277 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 12 – Selection of devices

Use figure 12 to determine;

1. The minimum breaking capacity of a M.C.B protected

against a 10kA P.S.C. by a 160A H.R.C. fuse

2. The minimum breaking capacity of a M.C.B protected

against a 25kA P.S.C. by a 160A H.R.C. fuse

Protective device manufacturers provide coordination tables and these demonstrate

the combination of protective devices which may be connected in series to ensure that
the short circuit ratings are achieved. Protection devices used should all be from the
same manufacture. If different brands of protection devices are used the individual
characteristic curves of the upstream and downstream devices must be compared to
ensure effective protection

figure 13. -www.clipsal.com

Page 278 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Cascading (Back-up)

As well as using H.R.C. fuses, Circuit breakers which are rated as fault current limiters
are also used to protect against prospective short circuit current. The nominal current
ratings (IN) of both the upstream and downstream devices must be carefully
considered.

Cascading is achieved by using an upstream device to assist (back-up) a downstream

device in clearing a fault current that happens to be greater than the breaking
capacity of the downstream device.

In Cascading applications, the upstream device may have to trip (unlatch) in order to
give sufficient protection to the downstream device, thus interrupting supply of power
to all devices downstream. Therefore, cascading is generally used in applications
involving the supply of non-essential loads, such as basic lighting. The main benefit of
cascading is that circuit breakers with breaking capacities lower than the prospective
fault level, can be safely used downstream provided it is backed-up by the relevant
upstream breaker. This results in reducing the cost o the installation

Selectivity

Also known as "Discrimination", the most basic form of Selectivity is where two circuit
breakers are connected in series. A higher amperage breaker is installed upstream,
and a lower amperage breaker downstream. Should an overload or short circuit occur
downstream, the downstream breaker will trip, but the upstream breaker will not,
hence feeding parts of the system which are fault-free. This is the concept of
Selectivity.

Selectivity is generally used, for example in critical applications, feeding essential

loads. It is important to ensure total installation power is not lost due to a small or
minor fault in a sub part of the overall electrical system, for example in a local
distribution board. Total power loss could affect vital systems such as in Hospitals or
Computer Centre's etc.

The principle of Selectivity (Discrimination) is based upon an analysis of several types

of circuit breaker characteristics. These include tripping characteristics (time-current
curves), Peak Let Through Current (Ipeak) and Energy Let Through (I2T).

Selectivity can be "enhanced" beyond the breaking capacity of the downstream device
provided it is backed up by an appropriately selected upstream device, which should
not trip (unlatch) under stated conditions.

Figure 14 shows how selectivity of circuit breakers can be achieved using

manufactures tables.

Page 279 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 280 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 14 - www.clipsal.com

Page 281 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

I2t Charts /Curves

The calculation of this current let through the circuit protection device is commonly
referred to as the I2t formula (current let through by the circuit protection device,
squared multiplied by the time in seconds for which the current flows)

Clause 2.5.4.2 of AS3000 states that the energy let through by the circuit protection
device must be less than the heat energy required by the cable to raise its insulation
temperature to values set by AS3008.1.1 clause 5.5.2. (Table 53).

 1600C for V75 and V90 insulated cables.

 2500C for XLPE (X90) insulated cables.

To simplify the equations a series of constants have been assigned to commonly used
cable insulation types in table 52 of AS3008.1.1

 111 - to raise the insulation from a maximum normal use temperature of 750C
to 1600C (V75 and V90).

 143 - to raise the insulation from a maximum normal use temperature of 900C
to 2500C (X90).

The time required for the short circuit current to heat the cable to cause the insulation
to rise from maximum normal use temperature to the maximum permissible is
calculated by the equation;

K 2  S2
t
I2
where

t = time duration in seconds

K = the constant value obtained from standards (111 for copper V90)

S = the cross sectional area of the conductor in mm2.

I2 = the short-circuit current in amps (r.m.s)

The circuit protection device must operate is less time than calculated above. The heat
energy that will be applied to the cable will be limited to an amount that will not cause
the insulation temperature to rise above the limits set by AS3008.1.1. Figure 15
shows let through energy of Clipsal circuit breakers.

Page 282 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 13 - AS3000 requirements - Protection

against short circuit current
Read AS 3000 clause 2.5.4.2

Calculate the time required for the short circuit current to heat the cable to cause
the insulation to rise from maximum normal use temperature to the maximum
permissible for the following copper cables.

1. 1.5 mm2 V75 ISC = 1.5kA

2. 2.5 mm2 V90 ISC = 1.5kA

3. 16 mm2 X90 ISC = 8kA

4. 120 mm2 X90 ISC = 35kA

Page 283 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 15 - www.clipal.com

Topic 4 - Protection against indirect contact

Earth fault condition

C32A 4.0mm2 x 60m T+E in air VP = 230V

L1

L2

L3
ZL = 7.2Ω
N
Zs = 0.153Ω Zfsc = 0.3366Ω
PE
ZPE = 0.54066Ω

figure 16.

Figure 16 shows an earth fault. The current path flows from the active conductors to
the fault, returning via the protective earthing conductors to the M.E.N. connection,
then along the neutral conductors to the supply. The circuit is no longer balanced, so
the impedances of the serial connected neutral and protective earth conductors must
be included (earth fault loop impedance).
The resulting current flow will be much lower than that of a short circuit in the same
cable. The lower current flow will increase the time the circuit protection device takes
to operate. During the time the circuit protection takes to operate a touch voltage will
be present between the earth electrode and the exposed conductive parts connected
to that protective earthing conductor. Section 8 of this book coverers the effects of
earth fault loop impedance.

Page 284 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity – 14 – Earth fault condition

1. Calculate the Line current (IL) for the circuit shown in figure 16.

2. Calculate the multiple of the C32A C.B. rating.

3. Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ Y/N

3. Draw on figure 17 a line to show the multiple of rated current. Max ______

Will the circuit breaker operate (trip), if so in what time? Y / N Min ______

figure 17. – www.clipsal.com

Page 285 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 5 - AS3000 requirements.

Activity - 15 - AS3000 requirements - Fault

Protection

Read AS 3000 clause 2.4.1

1. List 3 recognized methods of

fault methods of fault a) ___________________________________
protection.
b) ___________________________________

c) ___________________________________

Activity - 16 - AS3000 requirements - Fault

Protection

Read AS 3000 clause 2.4.2

1. How is protection by
automatic disconnection of a) ___________________________________
supply achieved?
___________________________________

b) ___________________________________

___________________________________

Page 286 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 17 - AS3000 requirements - Fault

Protection
Read AS 3000 clause 2.4.3

1. May a device that is capable of automatic reclosing be used Y/N

as a device to provide automatic disconnection of supply?

2. List 5 devices suitable to

a) ___________________________________
provide automatic
disconnection of supply.
b) ___________________________________

c) ___________________________________

d) ___________________________________

e) ___________________________________

Page 287 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 18 - AS3000 requirements - Protection

against over current (over load)
Read AS 3000 clause 2.5.1

1. May a H.R.C. fuse be placed in a neutral conductor to protect Y/N

against overload?

2. Under which conditions may

______________________________________
a circuit breaker be placed
in a neutral conductor to
protect against overload? ______________________________________

______________________________________

Activity - 19 - AS3000 requirements - Unprotected

consumer’s mains
Read AS 3000 clause 2.5.1.2

1. What is meant by unprotected

____________________________________
consumer’s mains?

____________________________________

____________________________________

Page 288 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 20 - AS3000 requirements - Unprotected

consumer’s mains (over load)
AS 3000 clause 2.5.1.2 (note 5)

Nearly all installations do not satisfy this requirement. The simple solution to provide
overload protection of the consumer’s mains is to upgrade the installations main
isolation switch to a circuit breaker. Selection of main switches is covered in section
10.

Activity - 21 - AS3000 requirements - Protection

against over current (over load)
Read AS 3000 clause 2.5.1.3

1. At what point should over current devices be placed to

protect sub-mains and final sub-circuits?

Activity - 22 - AS3000 requirements - Protection

against over current (over load)
Read AS 3000 clause 2.5.3

Page 289 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 23 - AS3000 requirements - Protection

against over current (over load)
Read AS 3000 clause 2.5.3.3

1. In a switchboard the section of

____________________________________
cable between the main switch
and each circuit protection
device is not protected against ____________________________________
overload. Why is this
permitted?
____________________________________

____________________________________

_____________________________________

____________________________________

_____________________________________

Page 290 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 24 - AS3000 requirements - Protection

against short circuit current
Read AS 3000 clause 2.5.4.1

1. List 2 methods of determining

____________________________________
the prospective short circuit
current in an installation?
____________________________________

____________________________________

___________________________________

Activity - 25 - AS3000 requirements - Protection

against short circuit current
Read AS 3000 clause 2.5.4.5

1. Under what conditions may

____________________________________
consumer’s mains not be
provided with short circuit
protection? ____________________________________

____________________________________

____________________________________

_____________________________________

Page 291 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial - Section 9

1. The coordination between conductors and protective devices shall be satisfied by

which of the following equations?

(a) IN ≤ IB ≤ I2
(b) IN ≤ IB ≤ IZ
(c) IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ
(d) IN ≤ IZ ≤ IB

2. Every conductor shall have a current-carrying capacity in accordance with the

AS/NZS 3008.1 series. The current carrying capacity that must

(a) be lower than the maximum demand current for which the circuit is
designed (IB)
(b) be equal to or greater than the circuit breaker nominal rating (IN)
(c) be less than the current to be carried by the conductor
(d) be based on an ambient air temperature of 45°C

3. In NSW, the nominal prospective short circuit current at the point of supply for
low voltage services up to 400 Amps in suburban residential areas is:

(a) 6kA unless otherwise advised by the electricity distributor.

(b) 10kA unless otherwise advised by the electricity distributor.
(c) 25kA unless otherwise advised by the electricity distributor.
(d) 30kA unless otherwise advised by the electricity distributor.

4. The maximum permissible cable insulation temperature under short circuit

conditions for V75 cable insulation is;

(a) 750C
(b) 1100C
(c) 1600C
(d) 2500C

5. The maximum permissible cable insulation temperature under short circuit

conditions for X90 (XLPE) cable insulation is;

(a) 750C
(b) 1100C
(c) 1600C
(d) 2500C

Page 292 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

6. When a H.R.C fuse is used to protect downstream circuit breakers and cable with
lower nominal current ratings, the H.R.C. fuse is being used as;

(a) an isolator
(b) overload protection
(c) a fault current limiter.
(d) a sub-main protection device.

7. Selectivity has the same meaning as

(a) back up protection

(b) short circuit protection
(c) cascading
(d) discrimination.

8. Cascading is;

(a) a fault current limiting circuit breaker protects circuit breakers and cables
with lower current ratings.
(b) a fault current limiting fuse protects circuit breakers and cables with lower
current ratings.
(c) a thermal magnetic circuit breaker protects circuit breakers and cables with
lower current ratings.
(d) a fault current limiting circuit breaker protects circuit breakers and cables
with higher current ratings.

9. Selectivity in circuit protection means;

(a) only the protection device of the circuit under fault operates.
(b) the service protection device operates.
(c) the current multiplier on a adjustable circuit breaker is set to match the
current rating of the cable.
(d) all circuit protection devices operate at the same time to reduce the risk of
fire.

10. A short circuit occurs in a final sub circuit with in a switch board, causing a large
P.S.C., the device/s that should operate will be;

(a) the f.s.c. circuit breaker

(b) the fault current limiter
(c) both the f.s.c. circuit breaker and the fault current limiter.
(d) neither.

Page 293 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

11. Complete the table below

Type Load Max Circuit Minimum De-rating Cable Current IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ I2 ≤ 1.45 x IZ

Demand Protection Cable Current factor Rating after
Rating Rating D.R.
IB IN IZ Y/N Y/N

1 H.R.C. 100A 100A

Fuse

2 H.R.C. 180A 230A

Fuse

3 C.B. 60A 0.7

Grouping

4 C.B. 35A 32A 30A

Page 294 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

12. List 4 effects of a short circuit current.

(a) ________________________________________

(b) ________________________________________

(c) ________________________________________

(d) ________________________________________

13. Calculate maximum rated line current (IL) for a 750kVA 400V supply authority
distribution transformer.

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

14. Calculate the prospective short circuit current for a 750kVA 400V supply authority
distribution transformer with a fault level of 15MVA

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

15. Calculate the impedance of 750kVA 400V supply authority distribution transformer
in question 14.

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

Page 295 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

16. For figure 15, calculate the Prospective Short Circuit current at the Service
protective device and the 20A circuit breaker, are the devices suitably rated? Hint
refer to figure 13 of section 9.

Connection Point
(pillar / pole)
P.S.C. = 25kA

Consumer’s mains Supply Authority Main Circuit Breaker

XLPE (Cu 4 x 1core) Service Protective Switch C20A 6kA
C.S.A. = 95mm2 Device (S.P.D.)
Route length = 30m 250A 50kA H.R.C. fuse

figure 15.

Page 296 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 297 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 10 - Selecting devices for isolation and

switching

Topics

• Requirements for provision of isolation

• Need for protection against mechanical

movement

• Selecting devices

Aim
Learners will be able to determine and meet the requirements of AS3000 when
selecting devices to provide isolation and switching.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 Explain the requirements for the provision of the isolation of every circuit in an
electrical installation.

 Explain the need for protection against mechanical movement of electrically

activated equipment.

 Apply AS/NZS 3000 requirements for selecting devices for isolation and
switching for a range of installations and conditions.

Page 298 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 1 - Requirements for provision of isolation

Definition - 1.4.75 Isolation (isolating function)
Function intended to cut off the supply from the whole installation, or a discrete
section of it, by separating it from every source of electrical energy for reasons of
safety.

Activity - 1 - Control and isolation

Read AS 3000 clause 1.5.2

Activity - 2 - DESIGN OF AN ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATION
Read AS 3000 clause 1.6.1(d)

Activity - 3 - Selection and installation

Read AS 3000 clause 2.1.2

Activity - 4 - CONTROL OF ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATION
Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.1

Page 299 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 5 - Common requirements

Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.2.1.1

1. List 3 precautions which may

be used to prevent electrical
equipment from being a) ________________________________
inadvertently energized.

b) ________________________________

c) ________________________________

Activity - 6 - Common requirements

Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.2.1.2

1. In a 3 phase circuit how many active

conductors are required to be
switched by the isolation device?

2. May an isolation device be placed in

the neutral of a consumer’s main or
a P.E.N. conductor.

3. What are the requirements for an

isolation switch or C.B. installed in a
neutral conductor?

4. Is it permitted to place an isolation

switch in an earthing conductor?

Page 300 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 7 - Common requirements

Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.2.1.3

1. In a d.c. circuit how many

conductors are required to be
switched by the isolation device?

2. If one pole is connected to earth?

If E.L.V. circuit?

Activity - 8 - Devices for isolation

Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.2.2.1

1. Is it permitted to semiconductor
as an isolation device?

2. What do the symbols “O” and “I”

indicate?

3. What current should the isolation

device be able to interrupt?

Page 301 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Main Switches
AS3000 rule 2.3.3 states that the purpose of Main (isolation) switches is to provide a
means of disconnection of the electrical supply to the installation in the case of an
emergency by emergency services personnel. Emergency services personnel would
include;
 Fire services
 State Emergency services
 Local Supply Authorities
It is also logical that electricians would use Main switches to isolate supply for the
purpose maintenance or repair.
The same rule also requires Main switches to be arranged so that supply can be cut to
“general” parts of the installation while maintaining supply to safety services such
as;
 Fire and smoke control equipment
 Evacuation equipment
 Lifts

Activity - 9 - Safety Services

Read AS 3000 clause 1.4.104

Activity - 10 - Main switches

Read AS 3000 section 2.3.3

1. Where should main switches be

located?

2. What are the requirements for

Main switches supplying safety
services?

3. How should Main switches be

identified?

Page 302 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Figure 1 shows the relationship between the tariff meter and the main switch.

Consumer’s Mains

Service Protective Device

Tariff Meter
(Domestic) M

MAIN
SWITCH
L,P,R

C.B. C.B. C.B.

Lights Power Range

figure 1.

Figure 2 shows the relationship between general equipment, emergency services and
the corresponding main switches.

Consumer’s Mains

Service Protective Device

Tariff Meter M

MAIN MAIN SWITCH MAIN SWITCH

SWITCH Lifts Evacuation
IN THE EVENT OF FIRE, Equipment
General DO NOT SWITCH OFF IN THE EVENT OF FIRE,
DO NOT SWITCH OFF

C.B. C.B. C.B. C.B. C.B. C.B.

Lights Power Range Lift 1 Lift 2 Evacuation
equipment

figure 2.

Page 303 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 11 - Number of Main switches

Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.3.3

1. What is the maximum number of

main switches per metered
supplies in a domestic
installation?
2. How many main switches will be
required if an installation has
domestic and off peak 1 tariff
meters?

Activity - 12 - Safety Services

See NSWSR page 85 fig 4-5

Activity - 13 - Location of Main switches

Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.3.4

1. What is the maximum permissible

height above the ground floor or
platform for a main switch?

2. Why is it permitted to place the

main switch for traffic lights on a
pole?

3. Is an isolation switch required

within a unit of a multiple
domestic, if the main switch
board is normally locked?

Page 304 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 14 - Identification of Main switches

Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.3.5

1. Would the marking “M/S HWS”

satisfy requirements?

2. What are the requirements if

there is more than one Main
switch?

3. What are the requirements if

“back to grid solar panels” are
installed?

Safety Services
When fire or some other emergency occurs in a building emergency services must
respond quickly and efficiently to prevent loss of life and/or injury. Main switches of
buildings requiring safety services must arranged and identified to aid emergency
services personnel to isolate only the general supply and leave safety services
energised.

Activity - 15 - Scope of Safety services

Read AS 3000 clause 7.2.1.2

1. What other names are safety

services known as in previous
standards or other codes?

Page 305 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 16 - Safety services main switches

Read AS 3000 clause 7.2.3.1 and
7.2.4.1

1. What must main switches that

supply safety services be
separate from?

Activity - 17 - Safety services - Main switches

Read AS 3000 clause 7.2.4.1

1. What is the maximum permitted

number of main switches that
supply safety services?

Activity - 18 - Safety services - Main switches

arrangement
Read AS 3000 clause 7.2.4.2

1. Is it permitted to supply general

electrical equipment from a main
switch that controls safety
services?

Page 306 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 19 - Safety services - Main switches

Identification
Read AS 3000 clause 7.2.4.4

1. List 3 identification
requirements of main
switches controlling safety
________________________________________
services?
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

Isolation Switches
Some items require isolation for maintenance, repair or testing purposes. In these
cases the load is isolated separately to reduce loss of supply and inconvenience.

Activity - 20 - Additional isolating switches

Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.4.1

1. Is an isolation switch required in

the switch board of a granny flat
(outbuilding)?

2. Is an isolation switch required in

a distribution board of a factory
within the same building?

Page 307 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 21 - Sub-mains and final sub-circuits

Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.4.2

1. What is the requirement for a

sub-main or final sub-circuit
greater than 100A?

2. May a circuit breaker used to

protect a sub-main or final sub-
circuit greater than 100A be used
as the isolation switch?

Activity - 22 - Appliances and accessories

Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.4.5

Activity - 23 - Isolation of socket outlets.

Read AS 3000 section 4.4

Activity - 24 - Isolation of Cooking Appliances.

Read AS 3000 section 4.7

Page 308 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 25 - Isolation of water heaters

Read AS 3000 clause 4.8.2.3

1. Where is the permissible location

for a hot water system’s isolation
switch?

2. A C.B. is used as the circuit

protection device on the main
switch board for a H.W.S. Can
the C.B also be used as the
H.W.S. main and isolating
switches?

Activity - 26 - Isolation of Room Heaters.

Read AS 3000 section 4.9

Activity - 27 - Isolation of heating cables.

Read AS 3000 section 4.10

Activity - 28 - Isolation of Electricity converters.

Read AS 3000 section 4.12

Page 309 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 2 - Need for protection against mechanical

movement

Activity - 29 - Protection against mechanical

movement.
Read AS 3000 rule 1.5.13

Activity - 30 - Protection against mechanical

movement - Isolation switches
Read AS 3000 clause 4.13.1.1

1. Isolation switches are not

required for motors with a rating
not greater than?

Activity - 31 - Protection against mechanical

movement - Isolation switches rating
Read AS 3000 clause 4.13.1.2

1. An isolation switch operating directly A.C. D.C.

in the motor control circuit shall be
capable of interrupting what multiple
of the rated full load motor current?
2. Switches suitable for this application
should be marked with the letter?

Page 310 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 32 - Shutting down for mechanical

maintenance
Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.6.1

1. What is are suitable means

of preventing operation of
________________________________________
devices used to shut down
for mechanical
________________________________________
maintenance?
________________________________________

________________________________________

2. When are locking facilities

not required on devices
used to shut down for
mechanical maintenance?

Activity - 33 - Shutting down for mechanical

maintenance - Devices
Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.6.2

1. List 3 requirements of
devices used to shut down
________________________________________
for mechanical
maintenance.
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

Page 311 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 34 - Shutting down for mechanical

maintenance - Installation
Read AS 3000 clause 2.3.6.3

1. List 3 devices that may be

used to shut down for
________________________________________
mechanical maintenance
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

Activity - 35 - Protection against mechanical

movement - Identification.
Read AS 3000 rule 2.3.6.4

Activity - 36 - Functional (control) switching.

Read AS 3000 section 2.3.7

Functional switches do not necessarily provide isolation. For example a lighting

point wired using the loop from the light method is still live at the loop terminal even
when the control switch is open.
Isolating devices such as plug sockets commonly used to isolate commercial cooking
equipment cannot be used in “normal use” as they are not designed to perform a
large number of operations.

Page 312 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 3 - Selecting Devices

Unprotected Consumers Mains

The vast majority of consumer’s mains are installed electrically unprotected. This
means no upstream protection devices are provided. The only protection in fact in
most cases in domestic installations with underground supply, is a 400A H.R.C. fuse,
located some distance away at the distribution substation (transformer). Under fault
conditions the substation fuse will offer no protection to consumer’s mains.

Activity - 37 - AS3000 requirements - Protection

against over current
Read AS 3000 clause 2.5.1.2

To compensate for the lack of electrical protection extra care must be taken to ensure
consumers mains are installed so that the risk of mechanical damage to the
consumer’s mains is greatly reduced. AS3000 2.5.1.2 (c) makes provision that
overload protection is permitted to located at the end of the consumer’s mains rather
than the origin. The requirement for short circuit protection is omitted because of the
increased mechanical protection.

AS3000 clause 3.9.7.1.2. requires that “consumer’s mains not provided with short
circuit protection on the supply side be constructed in such a manner as to reduce the
risk of short-circuit to a minimum”. It lists suggested wiring systems deemed to
satisfy the requirement;

 Insulated and sheathed (XLPE) cables enclosed in heavy-duty insulating

conduit to AS/NZS 2053.

 Insulated and sheathed (XLPE) cables installed in underground wiring

enclosures.

Unprotected PVC cables are not permitted under NSWSR clauses 2.6.1 (underground)
and 3.4 (overhead). In the case of underground consumer’s mains the heavy duty
underground (orange) conduit must be continuous all the way to the switchboard
enclosure (NSWSR clause 2.5.2).

It is the policy of both Energy Australia and Integral Energy to allow Insulated and
sheathed (XLPE) cables without enclosure in heavy duty conduit as long as advantage
of build construction is taken to protect the cable from mechanical damage. In other
words the cable must be concealed in the eaves and cavity of the building. The entry
of the cable into the building construction (facia) at the point of attachment must be
protected with the likes of heavy duty flexible conduit.

Page 313 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Overload Protection of Unprotected Consumer’s Mains

Not all consumer’s mains are unprotected. Examples of protected consumer’s mains
include Consumer’s mains protected by;
 pole fuses.
 inline fuses at the point of supply
 protection devices located in a dedicated substation supplying large
installations.

Activity - 38 - AS3000 requirements - Protection

against over current (over load)
AS3000 clause 2.5.1.2 (note 5)

As stated in previous sections, if the sum of the total of the circuit protection devices
current ratings is greater than the current rating of the consumers mains, overload
protection must be provide or the consumer’s mains. To provide overload protection of
the consumer’s mains, the installations main isolation switch can be upgraded to a
circuit breaker.

The calculated maximum demand (IB) of the installation should be less or equal to
the rating of the circuit breaker (IN).

I B ≤ IN ≤ IZ
The Rating of the circuit breaker (IN) should less or equal to the rating of the XLPE
cable current rating selected from tables in AS3008.1.1.

However with the installation of the circuit breaker the maximum demand of the
installation is now set by limitation. Should the maximum demand be slightly over
the circuit breaker nominal rating, there is no need to increase to the next size circuit
breaker or cable. In the unlikely event of an overload, the circuit breaker will protect
the consumer’s mains from overload (AS3000 clause 2.5.1.2 (note 5)).

If an installation has an off peak hot water system, the sum of the domestic and off
peak circuit breakers / main switches may exceed the current rating of the consumer’s
mains. This situation does not comply with AS3000 clause 2.5.1.2 (note 5).

The solution to this problem is dealt with quite differently by the energy distributors.

Page 314 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Energy Australia and Country Energy Areas

On consultation with Energy Australia and Country Energy, EA and CE require a circuit
breaker to be fitted between the service protective device (service fuse) and the
metering. As the overload protection device is un-metered, its connection terminals
must be sealable. It is marked as an “Unmetered Main Switch”. The current rating is
selected based on the size of the consumer’s mains. Activities 39 to 42 show
examples of how to determine the current rating of the overload device.

Integral Energy Areas

Policy in Integral Energy is the off peak H.W.S. demand should not be included. IE do
not wish to remove supply from electronic meters, decreasing the current rating of the
circuit breaker from say 63A to 40A would cause nuisance tripping, not to mention
problems with discrimination.

Local electrical distributors should be consulted, as it is highly likely for this policy to
change with time.

Activity - 39 – Consumer’s mains over load

protection devices

Use AS3008.1.1 and AS3000 to select

suitable current ratings of circuit breakers to
protect the following size and types of
consumer’s mains.

Single Phase SDI XLPE AS3008.1.1 Table No ___________

Installation Method 16 mm2 Cu 25 mm2 Cu 35 mm2 Cu

Partially Surrounded
by thermal insulation

Unenclosed in Air
(laid flat touching)

Enclosed in Under
ground conduit.

Page 315 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 40 – Consumer’s mains over load

protection devices

Use AS3008.1.1 an AS3000 to select suitable

current ratings of circuit breakers to protect
the following size and types of consumer’s
mains.

Three Phase SDI XLPE AS3008.1.1 Table No ___________

Installation Method 16 mm2 Cu 25 mm2 Cu 35 mm2 Cu

Partially Surrounded
by thermal insulation

Unenclosed in Air
(laid flat touching)

Enclosed in Under
ground conduit.

Activity - 41 – Consumer’s mains over load

protection devices

Use AS3008.1.1 and AS3000 to select

suitable current ratings of circuit breakers to
protect the following size and types of
consumer’s mains.

Three Phase 4 Core XLPE AS3008.1.1 Table No ___________

Installation Method 16 mm2 Cu 25 mm2 Cu 35 mm2 Cu

Partially Surrounded
by thermal insulation

Unenclosed in Air
(laid flat touching)

Enclosed in Under
ground conduit.

Page 316 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 42 – Consumer’s mains over load

protection devices

Use AS3008.1.1 to select suitable current

ratings of circuit breakers to protect the
following size and types of consumer’s
mains. All cables are 3 phase.

Installation method /Cable Circuit Breaker Rating AS3008.1.1Table/Column

95mm2 Cu XLPE SDI

Partially Surrounded

70mm2 Cu XLPE SDI

Unenclosed in Air (laid flat
touching a surface)

240mm2 Al XLPE 4 Core

Buried Direct

Over Current Limiting of Consumer’s Mains

Consumer’s Mains Consumer’s Mains

S.P.D. S.P.D.

Over
Current
Limiter

Tariff Meter Tariff Meter

(Domestic) M (Domestic) M

MAIN MAIN
SWITCH SWITCH
L,P,R L,P,R
Also a C.B.

C.B. C.B. C.B. C.B. C.B. C.B.

Lights Power Range Lights Power Range

figure 3.

Page 317 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Selection of Isolation Switches

When selecting an isolator which is effectively a switch, it is import to understand how

they are rated. The ratings of an isolator are indication of how much current can be
interrupted by the isolator without damage to the device. Unlike circuit breakers
nominal rating (IN) which, if exceeded will cause the device to open circuit
automatically, disconnecting the circuit from the supply. Isolators are not circuit
protection devices. An isolator will not ‘trip’ like a circuit breaker.

In activity 8 of this section we looked at AS3000 rule number 2.3.2.2.1 which stated;

“Where a device for isolation is not capable of interrupting normal load current,
suitable measures shall be taken to prevent it operating while carrying current.”

Effectively this means the typical isolating switch will need to “break’ the normal load
current flowing in the circuit that it isolates. In most cases this will be the maximum
demand of that circuit. Isolators for motors need to break the locked rotor current of
the motor. Figure 3 shows examples and current ratings of isolators up to 100A.

figure 4 - www.clipsal.com.au

In larger isolations switches the utilization category is also specified to match the
isolator to the correct use. Figures 5 and 6 show further examples and technical data
of larger isolators up to 1600A.

Load Break Vs Off Load disconnectors

Some large isolators are not rated to break the load current they can carry. They are
given a Utilization Category of AC-20. Downstream circuit breakers must be opened
first to interrupt the flow of current before the “disconnector” is opened.

A true isolator is given a Utilization Category of AC-21 or higher. Refer to figure 5 for
more information relating to Utilization Categories

Page 318 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 5 - www.hagerbr.com.au

Page 319 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 6 - www.hagerbr.com.au

Page 320 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 43 - Selection of Isolation switches.

Use figures 4, 5 and 6 to select a suitable
isolation switch for the following situations.
Specify the;
 number of poles
 current rating.
 type of device C.B. or Isolator
 utilisation Category

1 An isolation switch for a distribution board in

garage of a single phase domestic
installation with a maximum demand of 33A.

2 A main switch for a three phase domestic

installation with a maximum demand of 50A
per phase.

3 The isolation switch in the distribution board

of a single phase town house with a
maximum demand of 55A.

4 The isolation switch in the distribution board

of a three phase factory unit with a
maximum demand of 100A per phase.

5 The main switch for a factory unit complex

with a maximum demand of 370A per
phase.

Page 321 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Figure 7 shows an example of a typical domestic installation containing a sub main to

a garage or granny flat. Both of these situations would be regarded as a separate
outbuilding (not attached to the main house). The out building is then regarded as
separate installation and requires an Isolation switch. If DB1 was located and
supplying load within the main house an isolation switch within DB1 is not required as
the circuit breakers can be used as isolators. It is however still good design practice to
include the isolation switch as shown.

Consumer’s Mains

Service Protective Device

Tariff Meter
(Domestic) M

MAIN
SWITCH Main Switch Board
L,P,SM

C.B. C.B. C.B.

Lights Power Sub
Main 1

Sub Mains

Isolation
SWITCH
DB1

Distribution Board 1

C.B. C.B. C.B.

Lights Power 1 Power 2

figure 7.

Page 322 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Figure 8 shows 1 unit of a multiple domestic installation. It is assumed the main

switch board is locked. Main switches are required for each metered tariff. Circuit
breakers are used in the M.S.B. as both circuit protection and isolation devices.

Tariff Meter Tariff Meter

(Domestic)
M and Relay
M/R
(Off Peak 1) Main Switch Board

MAIN MAIN
SWITCH SWITCH
Unit 1 Unit 1
L,P, R H.W.S.
50A C.B. 20A C.B.

Sub Mains

Isolation Isolation
SWITCH SWITCH
Unit 1 Unit 1 H.W.S.

Distribution
Board Unit 1
C.B. C.B. C.B.
Lights Power 1 Power 2

figure 8.

Isolation switches are provided in the distribution board of each unit for both the
general and hot water system sub mains. If the units are town houses (outbuildings)
they are treated as separate installations. The general isolation switch is required by
Australian standards. The H.W.S. isolation switch is provided so the H.W.S. can be
isolated without gaining access to the M.S.B.

Page 323 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 9 - www.clipsal.com.au

Circuit breakers that have provisions for either tagging or lock outs may used to
isolate an entire circuit, but this can be inconvenient due to lack of access to the
switch board or the loss of supply to other points on the same circuit.

Individual loads can such as motors, air conditioners, illuminated signs etc for
convenience can be isolated using either plug sockets or isolation switches such as
those shown in figure 9.

Page 324 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Figure 10 shows typical markings of 56 and 66 series isolation switches.

50Hz
500V
20 AMP IP66
M150

figure 10.

20 AMP Indicates current that the switch can carry under normal use for a
prolonged period of time. The current rating is limited by the build up
of heat over time.
50Hz Rated Frequency
500V Voltage Rating
IP66 International Protection Rating
M150 Locked rotor motor current breaking capacity.

figure 11. - www.clipsal.com.au

Care should be taken when selecting isolation switches for motors. A motor which has
a line current of 20A will have a locked rotor current of 8 times the line current. The
locked rotor current will actually be 160A. If an isolation switch rated at 20A is used to
isolate the motor, the “M” rating for the device is only 150A (referring to figure 11).
An isolation switch with a rating of 32A should be used.

Page 325 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 44 - Selection of Isolation switches.

Use figures 11 and 6 to select a suitable
isolation switch for the following situations.
Specify the;
 number of poles
 current rating.
 Utilisation Category

1 An isolation switch for a 230V hot water

system, current rated at 20A.

2 An isolation switch for a shops 230V neon

sign with a primary current of 8A

3 The isolation switch for a group of 3 phase

400V Metal Halide flood lights with a line
current of 25A per phase.

4 The isolation switch for 3 phase motor with

a line current of 25A per phase.

5 The isolation switch for 3phase motor with a

line current of 110A per phase.

Page 326 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial 10

1. The switch used to isolate a 12.5 kW range (cook top and oven) that is connected
to two phases and neutral, would have as a minimum:

(a) one pole.

(b) two poles.
(c) three poles.
(d) four poles.

2. A separate isolating switch must be installed to control a sub-main or final sub-

circuit outgoing from a switchboard if the circuit maximum demand per phase
exceeds:

(a) 25A.
(b) 32A.
(c) 75 A.
(d) 100A.

3. For a single domestic installation, with a maximum demand of less than 100 A,
the maximum number of main switches per tariff is

(a) 1
(b) 6
(c) 10
(d) no limit.

4. A main switch should be located;

(a) as close as possible to the load it isolates.

(b) at the main switch board.
(c) at the distribution board.
(d) point of supply.

5. Which is not a safety service;

(a) Lifts.
(b) Security lighting
(c) fire sprinkler booster pumps
(d) fire and smoke control equipment.

Page 327 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

6. Installations that contain safety services;

(a) have separate main switches for the general supply and each type of
safety service.
(b) are only permitted one main switch that controls the whole installation.
(c) are not required to have main switches for safety services.
(d) have one main switch for the general supply and one main switch that
isolates all safety services.

7. Which device is most commonly used as the isolation switch of a 4.4kw H.W.S in
domestic installation, is a;

(a) plug socket

(b) circuit breaker, located at the main switch board.
(c) functional switch located within 2 meters of the tank.
(d) 10A architrave switch located in the kitchen.

8. The maximum permissible height for a main switch for a main switch above the
ground, a floor or platform is;

(a) 0.6m
(b) 1.2m
(c) 2.0m
(d) 2.5m

9. It is not permitted to install an isolation switch in;

(a) Active conductors

(b) Neutral conductors
(c) Protective Earthing conductors
(d) Switch wires

10. A isolation switch used to isolate a electric motor is required to have a Utilization
Category of;

(a) AC-20
(b) AC-21
(c) AC-22
(d) AC-23

Page 328 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

11. In a A.C. circuit, what conductors must an isolation device operate in?

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

12. Under what conditions may an isolation switch be placed in a neutral conductor?

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

13. What is the difference between Isolation and functional switches?

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

14. Is it permitted to semiconductor as an isolation device?

________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

15. Is it permitted to semiconductor as a functional switch?

________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

Page 329 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

16. An electrical installation has an electric cook top. What are the requirements for
the functional switch and in what position must the switch be located?

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

17. Does a wall oven require a functional switch?

________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

18. You are asked to install the wiring for the pumps of an automatic fire sprinkler
system. The pumps are located a short distance from an existing distribution
board. Is it permissible to run a final sub-circuit from the distribution board?
Give a reason for your answer.

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

19. Main switches controlling fire and smoke control equipment and lifts must
indicate the equipment they control, identified with what other wording?

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number ______________ )

Page 330 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 331 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 11 - Switchboards
Topics
• AS 3000 and local requirements

• Tariff structures

• Main switchboard equipment

• Layout for whole current metering

• Layout for CT metering (up to 400 A per

phase)
Aim
Learners will be able to determine and meet the requirements of AS3000 when
designing switchboards with a current capacity of up to 400A.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 State the AS/NZS 3000 and local supply authority requirements for
switchboards.
 Explain the tariff structures for the supply of electricity.
 List the equipment installed at main switchboards with capacities up to 400 A
per phase.
 Sketch the layout of a main switchboard for an installation supplied with single
phase single tariff whole current metering.
 Sketch the layout of a main switchboard for an installation supplied with single
phase multiple tariff whole current metering.
 Sketch the layout of a main switchboard for an installation supplied with
multiphase single tariff whole current metering.
 Sketch the layout of a main switchboard for an installation supplied with
multiphase multiple tariff whole current metering.
 Sketch the layout of a main switchboard for a multiple tenancy installation with
whole current metering.
 Sketch the layout of a main switchboard, including metering, for an installation
supplied with three phase CT metering

References AS3000:2018

New South Wales Service Rule (Oct 2019)

Page 332 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

The type of switchboard used for a particular installation will depend on:-

 load requirements;

 number of circuits;

 fault level protection requirements;

 metering and equipment arrangement;

 location;

 AS 3000 requirements;

 supply authority requirements.

Topic 1 - AS3000 and local requirements

AS/NZS 3000 Requirements.

The general requirements for switchboards are covered in Section 2.10 of AS3000.

Activity - 1 – Location of switchboards

Read AS 3000 clause 2.10.2.1

1. List 3 requirements for the

location of switchboards
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

Page 333 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 2 – Accessibility and emergency exit

Read AS 3000 clause 2.10.2.2

1. What are the minimum

dimensions of the door to a room
housing a switchboard?

2. What are the dimensions of a

standard door? (general
knowledge)

3. In relation to the switchboard

which way should the door to a
room housing a switchboard
open?

4. Do the requirements for doors of

switch rooms and for emergency
exit facilities apply to single
domestic electrical installations?

Activity - 3 – Location of main switchboard

Read AS 3000 clause 2.10.2.3

1. What are the general

requirements for a main
switchboard, or a panel for the
remote control of main switches?

2. Can the main switchboard be

located within an individual unit
of a group of villas?

Page 334 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 4 – Identification of main switchboard

Read AS 3000 clause 2.10.2.4

1. What must the main

switchboard, of an
installation be marked?

2. Is the main switchboard of

a single domestic
installation required to be
marked?

3. List 3 examples of
installations in which the
main switch board must be ________________________________________
identified?
________________________________________

________________________________________

Page 335 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 5 – Restricted locations

Read AS 3000 clause 2.10.2.5

1. In general what is the

minimum height above
floor or platform or a
switchboard?

2. What are the requirements

for switchboards installed
in cupboards? ________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

3. Is it permitted to install a
switchboard in a fire
isolated stairwell?

Activity - 6 – Construction
Read AS 3000 clause 2.10.3.1

1. Is it permissible in a non-
domestic installation to install a
switchboard less than 1.2m
above the ground, floor or a
platform, if it is lockable?

Page 336 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 7 – Construction
Read AS 3000 clause
2.10.3.4.1

1. What is the requirement

for circuit breakers
mounted in the same row
of a switchboard? ________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

Activity - 8 – Bars and Links

Read AS 3000 clause 2.10.4.2

Where tunnel type terminals are used in a bar or link, if the screws have an
outside diameter of less than 80% of the tunnel diameter, what is the minimum
required number of screws for the;

1. main incoming neutral conductor

2. main earthing conductor

3. connection between the main earthing terminal/connection or

bar and the neutral bar (MEN connection)

4. neutral conductor used as a combined protective earthing and

neutral (PEN) conductor for protective earthing of any portion
of an electrical installation.

Page 337 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 9 – Neutral Bars and Links

Read AS3000 clause 2.10.4.3

1. What is the minimum current carrying capacity of a service

neutral link supplied from a 100A service

2. What is the minimum current carrying capacity of a service

neutral link supplied from a 200A service

3. What is the minimum current carrying capacity of a service

neutral link supplied from a 400A service

4. What is the minimum current carrying capacity of a

consumer’s neutral link for an installation with a maximum
demand of 63A?

5. Is it permitted to mount neutral links on the rear of a hinged

panel? (Y/N)

6. Is it permitted to have the neutral conductors of two different

circuits in the same terminal of a neutral link? (Y/N)

Activity - 10 - Equipment Identification (marking)

AS3000 clause 2.10.5.1

Page 338 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 11 – Relationship of electrical equipment

Read AS3000 clause 2.10.5.2

1. Does the relationship of switches, circuit-breakers, fuses,

RCDs, and similar electrical equipment to the various sections
of the electrical installation need to be marked on the
switchboard itself?

Activity - 12 – Terminals of switchboard equipment

Read AS 3000 clause 2.10.5.4

1. Which terminals require

marking at the consumer’s
main neutral bar or link? _______________________________________

________________________________________

Activity - 13 – Common Neutral

Read AS3000 clause 2.10.5.5

1. What are the requirements

when a common neutral is
used? ________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

Page 339 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

New South Wales Service Rule Requirements

As well as satisfying the requirements of AS3000 switchboards must also be designed

and constructed to meet the requirements of the New South Wales Service Rules

The general requirements for the location of switchboards for single installations up to
100 amperes per phase are covered in Sections 4.1 to 4.13 of the New South Wales
Service and Installation Rules.

Activity - 14 – NSWSR – General Requirements

Read NSWSR clause 4.2

1. To provide and maintain adequate space in front of the

service and metering equipment panel or cabinet, what
vertical distance is required?

2. To provide and maintain adequate space in front of the

service and metering equipment panel or cabinet, what
horizontal distance is required?

3. When a hinged meter panel is extended on its hinge to the

900 open position, what clearance is required between the
front face of the panel and any fixed object?

Activity - 15 – NSWSR – General Requirements

Read NSWSR clause 4.2.1

1. If service and metering equipment is to be located on the

side of a house, what is the maximum permissible distance
from the front corner of the house?

2. Is it recommended that the service and metering equipment

be located on a wall adjacent to a bedroom?

Page 340 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 16 – NSWSR – Metering Locations

Read NSWSR sections 4.2 & 4.3

Answer yes or no if the following locations are suitable for metering and service
equipment.

1. In the general area inside a shop in a single premise that is

open retail hours.

2. A shops display window in a group of retail outlets.

3. A grouped metering point on the 3rd floor of a multi storey

shopping complex.

4. A grouped metering point on the 3rd floor of a block of home

units.

5. A grouped metering point within the yard of an individual unit

of a group of town houses.

6. Within a factory unit within a group of factory units.

7. Remotely read metering within a factory complex.

8. A driveway

9. In pool or spa areas.

10. A carport

11. A dog run

12. On a pole belonging to the supply authority

Page 341 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 17 – Service Protective Devices

NSWSR 4.5.9

Service Protective Devices (S.P.D.) are provided at the end of the consumers mains to
provide

 Prospective short circuit current protection.

 An isolation point.

 Overload protection of whole current metering.

The current ratings of service protective devices are given in table 4.1 of the NSWSR.
Suitable current ratings of service protective devices are selected based on the rating
of the service supplying the installation, which is determined by the maximum
demand of the installation.

Activity - 18 – Service Active Links

NSWSR 4.9

Activity - 19 – Service & Metering Neutral Links

NSWSR 4.10

Page 342 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 20 – NSWSR – Whole current metering

Read NSWSR Table 4.1

1. What is the maximum permissible current per active

conductor when using whole current metering?

Topic 2 - Tariff Structures

The Electricity Supply Act 1995 provides for the Independent Pricing and Regulatory
Tribunal (IPART) to set regulated retail prices for small retail customers (currently
those using less than 160 MWh of electricity per year, equivalent to an annual bill of
around $20,000) that are not supplied under a negotiated contract.

Since the introduction of full retail contestability, the NSW Government has asked the
Tribunal to continue to determine regulated retail prices during the transition to a
competitive market. The reviews on this page relate to these determinations.

Regulated Retail Tariffs

The NSW Government has introduced competition into the retail market. Currently all
customers may choose their supplier of electricity.

The Tribunal has determined regulated retail tariffs for small retail customers (ie,
those customers who use less than 160 MWh per year who do not choose to enter a
negotiated contract). In NSW as of July 2010 there is three regulated retail suppliers;

 Country Energy

 Energy Australia

 Integral Energy

As well the regulated retailers listed above, it is also possible purchase electricity
under a negotiated contract from interstate suppliers. Regardless of which electricity
retailer is used the tariff structures are similar.

Clause 2.3.3.3 (a) of AS3000 states each separately metered supply requires a
separate main switch.

Page 343 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Domestic / Residential

Premises used wholly or principally as private dwellings. A private dwelling is a;

o house

o flat

o home unit

o town house or similar premises

o places of worship and includes

Residential sections of

 Boarding houses;

 Bed and breakfast

 Nursing homes;

 Hospitals;

 Educational institutions; and

 Approved caravan parks whose consumption does not exceed 160MWh

per year.

General / Business Rate

These prices are generally applicable to;

o factories

o warehouses

o hotels

o motels

o shops and offices

o schools

o sheds

o irrigation pumps

o sporting and social clubs whose consumption does not exceed 160MWh
per year.

Page 344 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Off Peak 1 / Controlled Load 1

The supply of electricity is controlled by means of the retailer/distributor’s service

equipment, either a ripple control relay or time clock. The supply will not usually be
available between 7 am and 10 pm Monday to Friday. Supply is usually available
weekends. This tariff is intended for use with;

o Storage hot water systems with a heating element rated at 4.8kW and a
capacity of 250L or more.

o Thermal Storage Space Heaters (Heat Banks) and Under Floor Heaters rating
must be not less than 3 kW.

o Ice Storage Systems rating must be not less than 3 kW.

 Heat pump storage H.W.S. are not permitted or use with this tariff.

Off Peak 2 / Controlled Load 2

The supply of electricity is controlled by means of the retailer/distributor’s service

equipment so that supply will be available for restricted periods generally not
exceeding 17 hours in any period of 24 hours. Generally supply is not available
between 5 p.m. to 10 p.m. Loads which are permitted to be supplied by this tariff
include;

o Storage hot water systems with a heating element rated at 4.8kW and a
capacity of 100L or more.

o Heat pump storage H.W.S.

o swimming pool pumps

o pool heating equipment

o dishwashers

o clothes dryers

o washing machines and other appliances (other than those described above)

Some of these devices may also be connected to off peak 1 tariff, but because the
short time supply is available connection to of peak 2 will not be practical.

Dual Element “Big Blue” Tariff

Special "Big Blue" hot water systems, equipped with two non-simultaneous heating
units, are installed to meet Integral Energy’s minimum tank size requirements as
follows:
Number of Bedrooms Minimum Capacity H.W.S.

1 or 2 250 litres
3 315 litres
4 or more 400 litres

Page 345 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

In this case, supply is made available to the bottom-heating element outside the
period between 7 am and 10 pm. However, the top element can be heated at any
other time (at Off-Peak 1) to satisfy customer needs for hot water.

Time of Use

Time of Use prices (TOU) are available for business or residential supply. The Time of
Use option enables financial benefits for controlled usage at predetermined time,
periods as listed in definitions below.

 PEAK PERIOD is from 7.00 am to 9.00 am and 5.00 pm to 8.00 pm on

weekdays.

 SHOULDER PERIOD is from 9.00 am to 5.00 pm and 8.00 pm to 10.00 pm on

weekdays.

 OFF-PEAK PERIOD is at all other times.

All times are Eastern Standard Time and Summer (daylight saving) Time as
appropriate.

Network Access /Supply charge

A daily charge per tariff is applied to each tariff available to a customer. Typical billing
period for a residential / domestic account is 90 days. The billing period or a business
/ general account is 30 days. Network access / Supply charges vary from retailer to
retailer and can make a substantial contribution to the total bill.

Activity - 21 – Tariffs
Refer to Tariffs for your locality

1. What is the Business / General rate?

2. What is the Business / General

network access / supply charge?

3. What is the Residential / Domestic

rate?

4. What is the Residential / Domestic

network access / supply charge?

Page 346 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 3 - Main Switchboard Equipment

Equipment installed on main switchboards includes;

 Service Protective Device – can be a H.R.C. use or circuit breaker.

 Energy meters - whole current up to 100A per phase
 Load control relays / time clocks
 Main Switch/es
 Active links
 Circuit protection devices
o H.R.C. fuses.
o Circuit breakers
o Residual Current Devices
o over voltage (surge diverters)
 Service and metering neutral links
 Consumers neutral links (unprotected and R.C.D. protected)

Activity - 22 – Conductor sizes

AS3000 clause

A single phase installation has a maximum demand of 60A. It is supplied by a

100A overhead service. The consumer’s mains are unprotected 16mm2 XLPE
SDI copper cables. List the CSA of the flowing conductors.

Conductor CSA AS 3000 Clause

1. Main Earth

2. M.E.N. link

3. Equipotential bond to switchboard

enclosure

4. Equipotential bond to water pipe.

Page 347 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

If the installation has a maximum demand greater than 100A per phase, the main
switch board will also house;

 Energy meters - current transformer type required if > 100A per phase.
 Current transformers
 Potential fuses
 Test links

Activity - 23 – Conductor sizes

AS3000 clause

A three phase installation has a maximum demand of 320A. It is supplied by a

400A underground service. The consumer’s mains are protected 240mm2 XLPE
4 core aluminium cables. List the CSA of the flowing conductors.

Conductor CSA AS 3000 Clause

1. Main Earth

2. M.E.N. link

3. Equipotential bond to switchboard

enclosure

4. Equipotential bond to water pipe.

Page 348 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 4 - Layout Diagrams for Whole Current Metering

Activity - 24 – Whole Current Metering Layouts

NSWSR (2016) Figures 4.4
to 4.6

Single Phase Single Tariff

A
N
Consumer’s Mains

Service Protective Device

Tariff Meter Service

(Domestic) M Neutral Link

MAIN Consumer’s
SWITCH Neutral Link
L,P,R

C.B. C.B. C.B.

Lights Power Range

to f.s.c.

figure 1.
Figure 1 shows the most basic of switchboard arrangements. It is important to be
familiar with it as all other arrangements are simple variations of figure 1.
Figure 2 shows how an additional tariff meter and load control relay are added the
single tariff meter.
Figure 3 shows the connections using a dual tariff “E2” meter.
Figure 4 shows the connections of a three phase single tariff switchboard using 3
separate single phase “E1” meters
Figure 5 show the same switch board connections using a polyphase meter.

Page 349 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 25 – Single Phase Single Tariff

NSWSR (2016) figure 4.5

Draw in the required connections to complete the main switch board.

Hot
MS L,P,R MS Water

Consumer’s
Earth Link Neutral Link

Service
Neutral Link P1
Domestic
Tariff
Meter

SPD

Enclosure Bond

A N Consumer’s Mains

Earth Electrode

Page 350 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Single Phase Dual Tariff

A
N
Consumer’s Mains

Service Protective Device

Tariff Meter Tariff Meter Service

(Domestic) M (Off Peak) M Neutral Link

MAIN Load Control Consumer’s

SWITCH Relay R Neutral Link
L,P,R

C.B. C.B. C.B. Main

Lights Power Range Switch
O.P. H.W.S.

to f.s.c.

figure 2.
Single Phase Dual Tariff “E2” Meter
A
N
Consumer’s Mains

Service Protective Device

Tariff Meter Service

(Domestic) M Neutral Link

MAIN Consumer’s
SWITCH Neutral Link
L,P,R

C.B. C.B. C.B. Main

Lights Power Range Switch
O.P. H.W.S.

to f.s.c.

figure 3.

Page 351 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 26 – Single Phase Dual Tariff

NSWSR (2016) figure 4.5

Draw in the required connections to complete the main switch board.

Hot
MS
L,P,R MS
Water P3 P2
Off Peak Off Peak
Control Tariff
Relay Meter

Consumer’s
Earth Link Neutral Link

Service
Neutral Link P1
Domestic
Tariff
Meter

SPD

Enclosure Bond

A N Consumer’s Mains

Earth Electrode

Page 352 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Three Phase Single Tariff

A B C
Consumer’s Mains N

Service
Protective
Devices

Tariff Meters Service

(Domestic) M M M Neutral Link

MAIN Consumer’s
SWITCH Neutral Link

C.B. C.B.
Air Power
Con

to f.s.c.
figure 4.
Three Phase Single Tariff (Polyphase meter)
A B C
Consumer’s Mains N

Service Protective Devices

Tariff Meter Service

(Domestic) M Neutral Link

MAIN Consumer’s
SWITCH Neutral Link

C.B. C.B.
Air Power
Con

to f.s.c.
figure 5.

Page 353 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 27 – Three Phase Single Tariff E1 Meters

NSWSR(2016) figure 4.4

Draw in the required connections to complete the main switch board.

Hot
MS L,P,R MS
Water P3 P2
Domestic Domestic
Tariff Tariff
Meter Meter

Consumer’s
Earth Link Neutral Link

Service
Neutral Link P1
Domestic
Tariff
Meter

SPD SPD SPD

Enclosure Bond

A B C N Consumer’s Mains

Earth Electrode

Page 354 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 28 – Three Phase Dual Tariff E2 Meters

NSWSR (2016) figure 4.4

Draw in the required connections to complete the main switch board.

Hot
MS L,P,R MS
Water P3 P2
Domestic Domestic
/ Off Peak Tariff
Tariff Meter
Meter

Consumer’s
Earth Link Neutral Link

Service
Neutral Link P1
Domestic
Tariff
Meter

SPD SPD SPD

Enclosure Bond

A B C N Consumer’s Mains

Earth Electrode

Page 355 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Multiple tenancy installation

A B C
Consumer’s Mains N

Service
Protective
Devices
(200A)

Service
Neutral Link

MAIN
SWITCH

Consumer’s
Neutral Link
Un-metered Active Link

Metering
Neutral Link

Tariff Meters
M M M M M (Domestic)
sub-mains.

Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5

Main Main Main Main Main
Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch

figure 6.
Figure 6 shows single phase single tariff multiple domestic installation, only one phase
is show to keep the drawing simple.
Switchboards for multiple domestic installations are usually constructed on banks of
600 x 600 mm hinged or fixed standard panels. Alternately custom built switchboards
can be installed. Distribution boards in each unit are usually self contained load
centres.

Activity - 27 – C.T. Metering Layouts

NSWSR Annexure 2.14

Page 356 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 29 – C.T. Metering NSWSR Annexure Fig. 2-6

Current
Transformer
Meter

Test
Block

Potential
Fuses

S.P.D.
A

N
From To
Supply Load

figure 7.

Page 357 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial 11

1. For the requirements of the NSW Service and Installation Rules, the maximum
number of non-domestic customers that may be connected to a 100 A service fuse
is:

(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 4
(d) No limit

2. Before removing a meter connected to a current transformer, it is essential to:

(a) open circuit the CT secondary at the metering links

(b) short circuit the CT secondary winding at the metering links
(c) short circuit the CT primary winding at the metering links
(d) short circuit the CT primary to the secondary at the metering links.

3. If a three-phase installation (single tariff) has a maximum demand that exceeds

100 A per phase:

(a) CT metering must be installed

(b) Whole current metering must be installed
(c) Off-peak meters must be installed
(d) 125 Amp relays must be installed

4. Generally, the maximum height above ground, floor or platform which a main
switch may be installed on the main switchboard is:

(a) 1.2 metres

(b) 2.0 metres
(c) 2.5 metres
(d) 3.0 metres

5. Generally, the minimum height above ground, floor or platform which a main
switchboard of a domestic installation is;

(a) 1.2 metres

(b) 2.0 metres
(c) 2.5 metres
(d) 3.0 metres

Page 358 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

6. When installing energy meters in low voltage installations not exceeding 100 A per
active conductor, it is important to ensure the top edge of the meter is no more
than:

(a) 1.8 m above the ground, floor or platform and the bottom edge is at least
0.6 m above the ground, floor or platform.
(b) 2 m above the ground, floor or platform and the bottom edge is at least
0.3 m above the ground, floor or platform.
(c) 2 m above the ground, floor or platform and the bottom edge is at least
0.6 m above the ground, floor or platform.
(d) 2.2 m above the ground, floor or platform and the bottom edge is at least
0.5 m above the ground, floor or platform.

7. The minimum current rating of an installations service neutral link is;

(a) 32A
(b) 63A
(c) 100A
(d) 150A

8. According to the NSW service and installation rules, the minimum height of a
service protective device above finished floor (AFFL) level is;

(a) 2.0 metres

(b) 1.2 metres
(c) 0.6 metres
(d) 0.5 metres

9. According to the NSW service and installation rules, a 400A service will require
what type of current transformer;

(a) type ‘S’

(b) type ‘T’
(c) type ‘U’
(d) type ‘W”

10. According to the NSW service and installation rules, the minimum size for a C.T.
meter panel is;

(a) 900mm x 600mm

(b) 600mm x 600mm
(c) 580mm x 580mm
(d) 380mm x 300mm

Page 359 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

11. Draw in all the required connections for a three phase dual tariff main
switchboard. Consumer’s mains are unprotected 4 core XLPE copper cable.

(a) Label all equipment

(b) Specify all cable sizes

MS MS
P3 P2

Is it permissible for a switchboard be installed in a stairwell of a multiple

domestic high rise type building?

P1
Is it permissible for the main switchboard of a multiple domestic installation
to be located in any given unit within the complex?

List forms of identification required when installing fire and smoke control
main switches in multi domestic installations.

What is the minimum current carrying capacity of a neutral link if the

SPD SPD SPD
switchboard is supplied by 100 A active and neutral conductors?

Enclosure Bond

A B C N Consumer’s Mains

Earth Electrode

Page 360 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

12. Draw in all the required connections for a 400A C.T. metering main switchboard
shown in figure 8.

Current
Transformer
Meter

S.P.D.
A

N
From To
Supply Load

figure 8.

Page 361 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

13. The protected consumer’s mains of figure 8 are 240mm2 4 core XLPE Aluminium
cables, protected by 400A H.R.C. fuses in the distribution transformer. The
metering panel is located 12m from the C.T. cubical. Specify the cable size of the;

(a) Main Earth.

(b) M.E.N. link.
(c) Main Switch Board Equipotential Bond.
(d) Metering potential circuit wiring.
(e) Metering current circuit wiring.

Page 362 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 363 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 12 - Selecting equipment for damp

situations and ELV installations
Topics
• Delineation of damp areas

• Selecting equipment for damp situations

• Voltage range for ELV

• SELV and PELV

• Selecting equipment for ELV installations

Aim
Learners will be able to determine and meet the requirements of AS3000 when
selecting and installing electrical equipment in areas with a presence of water.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 Delineate the restricted zones around baths, showers, fixed water containers,
pools, sauna heaters and fountains/water features for given installations.

 Select equipment suitable for installation in given damp situations.

 Describe the voltage range that defines extra-low voltage.

 Describe a 'Separated extra-low voltage (SELV) system' and a 'Protected extra-

low voltage (PELV) system".

 Apply the AS/NZS 3000 requirements for selecting extra-low voltage systems
and devices for a range of installations and conditions.

Page 364 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 1 – Delineation of damp situations

Activity - 1 – Damp Situations

AS/NZS Clause 1.4.44

A damp situation is considered to be anywhere that moisture is permanently or

intermittently present (AS3000 Clause 1.4.44). The requirements of Section 6 of
AS3000 are intended to prevent ingress of moisture to electrical equipment and
minimise risk of shock. Areas considered to be damp situations are swimming and spa
pools, fountains, bathrooms, showers, laundries, kitchens, washrooms, freezers, cold
rooms, abattoirs and dairies.

There is an increased risk in the installation and use of electrical equipment in damp
situations due to the moisture increasing the conductivity of both living things and
building materials such as concrete floors. The increased conductivity increases the
risks of ventricular fibrillation and respiratory arrest. To reduce the risk the installation
of electrical equipment is restricted to specialised equipment or prohibited altogether.

Activity - 2 – Classifications of Zones (baths)

Refer to AS3000 6.2.2 (figures 6.1)

1. What area is described as zone 0 of a bath

with out a fixed barrier?

2. What area is described as zone 1 of a bath

with out a fixed barrier?

3. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

2 of a bath without a fixed barrier extend?

4. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

3 of a bath without a fixed barrier extend?

Page 365 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 3 – Classifications of Zones (baths)

Refer to AS3000 clause 6.2.2 (figure 6.2)

1. What area is described as zone 0 of a bath

with out a fixed barrier?

2. What area is described as zone 1 of a bath

with out a fixed barrier?

3. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 2

of a bath with out a fixed barrier extend?

4. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 3

of a bath with out a fixed barrier extend?

Note: The typical height of a ceiling is 2.4m.

Activity - 4 – Classifications of Zones (showers)

Refer to AS3000 section 6.2.2 (figure 6.3)

1. What area is described as zone 0 of a

shower base without a fixed barrier?

2. What area is described as zone 1 of a

shower base without a fixed barrier?

3. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

2 of a shower base without a fixed barrier
extend?

4. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

3 of a shower base without a fixed barrier
extend?

Page 366 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 5 – Classifications of Zones (showers)

Refer to AS3000 section 6.2.2 (figure 6.4)

1. What area is described as zone 0 of a

shower base without a fixed barrier?

2. What area is described as zone 1 of a

shower base without a fixed barrier?

3. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 2

of a shower base without a fixed barrier
extend?

4. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 3

of a shower base without a fixed barrier
extend?

Activity - 6 – Classifications of Zones (kitchen sinks)

Refer to AS3000 section 6.2.2 (figure 6.13)

1. What area is described as zone 0 of a fixed

water container ≤ 40L?

2. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

2 of a shower base with out a fixed water
container ≤ 40L?

3. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 2

of a shower base with out a fixed water
container ≤ 40L?

Page 367 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 7 – Classifications of Zones (laundry tubs)

Refer to AS3000 section 6.2.2 (figure 6.14)

1. What area is described as zone 0 of a fixed

water container > 40L?

2. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

2 of a shower base with out a fixed water
container > 40L?

3. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 2

of a shower base with out a fixed water
container > 40L?

Activity - 8 – Classifications of Zones (pools)

Refer to AS3000 section 6.3.2 (figure 6.15)

1. What area is described as zone 0 of an in-

ground swimming pool?

2. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

1 of an in-ground swimming pool extend
from the waters edge?

3. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

2 of an in-ground swimming pool extend
from the waters edge?

4. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

3 of an in-ground swimming pool extend
from the waters edge?

Page 368 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 9 – Classifications of Zones (pools)

Refer to AS3000 section 6.3.2 (figure 6.15)

1. What area is described as zone 0 of an in-

ground swimming pool?

2. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 1

of an in-ground swimming pool extend from
the waters edge?

3. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 2

of an in-ground swimming pool extend from
the waters edge?

4. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 3

of an in-ground swimming pool extend from
the waters edge?

Activity - 10 – Classifications of Zones (pools)

Refer to AS3000 section 6.3.2 (figure 6.16)

1. What area is described as zone 0 of an

above ground swimming pool?

2. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

1 of an above ground swimming pool
extend from the waters edge?

3. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

2 of an above ground swimming pool
extend from the waters edge?

4. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

3 of an above ground swimming pool
extend from the waters edge?

Page 369 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 11 – Classifications of Zones (pools)

Refer to AS3000 section 6.3.2 (figure 6.16)

1. What area is described as zone 0 of an

above ground swimming pool?

2. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 1

of an above ground swimming pool extend
from the waters edge?

3. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 2

of an above ground swimming pool extend
from the waters edge?

4. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 3

of an above ground swimming pool extend
from the waters edge?

Activity - 12 – Classifications of Zones (spa’s)

Refer to AS3000 section 6.3.2 (figure 6.18)

1. What area is described as zone 0 of an in-

ground spa pool?

2. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

1 of an in-ground spa pool extend from the
waters edge?

3. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 1

of an in-ground spa pool extend from the
waters edge?

Page 370 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 13 – Classifications of Zones (spa’s)

Refer to AS3000 section 6.3.2 (figure 6.19)

1. What area is described as zone 0 of an

above ground spa pool?

2. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

1 of an above ground spa pool extend from
the waters edge?

3. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 1

of an above ground spa pool extend from
the waters edge?

Activity - 14 – Classifications of Zones (fountains)

Refer to AS3000 section 6.4.2 (fig 6.20 – 6.21)

1. What area is described as zone 0 of a

fountain?

2. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

1 of a fountain extend from the waters
edge?

3. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 1

of a fountain extend from the waters edge?

Page 371 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 15 – Classifications of Zones (saunas)

Refer to AS3000 section 6.5.2 (figure 6.22)

1. To what horizontal distances (↔) does zone

1 of a sauna extend from the sauna heater
edge?

2. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 1

of a sauna extend?

3. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 2

of a sauna extend from zone 1?

4. To what vertical distances (↕) does zone 3

of a sauna extend from zone 2?

Page 372 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 2 – Selection of equipment for damp situations.

Some electrical equipment is not suitable for use in damp situations. Often an I.P.
rating is required

Activity - 16 – International Protection Ratings

Refer to AS3000 section G1 Table G1b

Specify the degree of protection from water for Typical Use

the fllowing I.P. ratings

1. I.P. 20

2. I.P. 53

3. I.P. 66

4. I.P. 68

Activity - 17 – Degree of protection required

Refer to AS3000 clause 6.2.4.1

List the minimum required degree of protection for equipment installed in the
following bath, shower and wash tub zones.

1. Zone 0

2. Zone 1

3. Zone 2

4. Zone 3

Page 373 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 18 – Selection of equipment (bathrooms)

Refer to AS3000 Table 6.1 and figures 6.1 to 6.10

1. What is the minimum horizontal distance (↔) that a

non I.P. rated socket outlet may be installed next to a
bath?

2. What is the minimum horizontal distance (↔) that a

non I.P. rated light switch may be installed next to a
bath?

3. What is the minimum horizontal distance (↔) that a

non I.P. rated socket outlet may be installed next to a
shower screen?

4. What is the minimum horizontal distance (↔) that a

non I.P. rated light switch may be installed next to a
shower screen?

5. What is the minimum horizontal distance (↔) that a

non I.P. rated socket outlet may be installed next to a
hand basin <40L?

6. What is the minimum horizontal distance (↔) that a

non I.P. rated light switch may be installed next to a
hand basin <40L?

7. What is the minimum vertical distance (↕) that a non

I.P. rated socket outlet may be installed above a
bathroom floor?

8. Are E.L.V. down lights permitted to be installed in a

bathroom?

9. Are batten holder lights permitted to be installed in a

bathroom 1.1m (↔) from a shower rose?

Page 374 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 19 – Selection of equipment (kitchen)

Refer to AS3000 Table 6.1 and figure 6.13

1. What is the minimum horizontal distance (↔) that a

non I.P. rated socket outlet may be installed next to a
kitchen sink <40L?

2. What is the minimum horizontal distance (↔) that a

non I.P. rated light switch may be installed next to a
kitchen sink <40L?

3. What is the minimum vertical height (↕) above a

kitchen sink <40L, that a non I.P. rated socket outlet
may be installed?

4. What is the minimum vertical height (↕) above a

kitchen sink <40L, that a non I.P. rated light switch
may be installed?

Activity - 20 – Selection of equipment (laundry)

Refer to AS3000 Table 6.1 and figure 6.14

1. What is the minimum horizontal distance (↔) that a

non I.P. rated socket outlet may be installed next to a
laundry tub >40L?

2. What is the minimum horizontal distance (↔) that a

non I.P. rated light switch may be installed next to a
laundry tub >40L?

3. What is the minimum vertical height (↕) above a

laundry tub >40L, that a non I.P. rated socket outlet
may be installed?

4. What is the minimum vertical height (↕) above a

laundry tub >40L, that a non I.P. rated light switch
may be installed?

Page 375 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 21 – Bonding of shower & bathroom floors

Refer to AS3000 clause 5.6.2.5

1. What is the minimum C.S.A. of the conductor used to

equipotential bond the conductive reinforcing in a
concrete floor?

Page 376 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 1. – AS3000 FAQ’s September 2009

Swimming Pools and Spa’s

Activity - 22 – Degree of protection required

Refer to AS3000 clause 6.3.4.1

List the minimum required degree of protection for equipment installed in the
following pool or spa zones.

1. Zone 0

2. Zone 1

3. Zone 2

Page 377 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 23 – Selection of equipment (pool and spa)

Refer to AS3000 Table 6.2 and figures 6.15 to 6.19

1. Is it permissible to install an I.P. 53 rated 10A socket

outlet at a horizontal distance (↔) of 1.5m from the
internal rim of the pool, to supply the pool pump and
salt water chlorinator?
2. Is it permissible to install an I.P. 53 rated 10A socket
outlet at a horizontal distance (↔) of 1.5m from the
internal rim of the pool to supply general equipment?

3. What are the requirements for light switches installed

in zone 1 of a pool or spa zone?

4. What are the requirements for light switches installed

in zone 2 of a pool or spa zone?

5. What are the requirements for pool lights installed in

zone 0 of a pool or spa zone?

6. Is it permissible to install a 230V light fitting at a

horizontal distance (↔) of 2.1m from the internal rim
of the pool?

7. What is the maximum permissible residual current

rating of R.C.D.s used to protect electrical equipment
installed in pool and spa zones

9. Is it permissible to install a switchboard to supply pool

equipment within a horizontal distance (↔) of 3m
from the internal rim of the pool?

Page 378 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 24 – Equipotential Bonding (pools & spas)

Refer to AS3000 5.6.2.6

1. An above ground pool has a double insulated pump

attached to the side of the galvanized metal frame of
the pool. Is it required to bond the pool frame?

2. A double insulated pool pump and the socket outlet

supplying it are located 3m from the rim of an in
ground pool, no other electrical equipment is installed
within any zone. Is it required to bond the pool shell?

3. The in ground pool above has a colour bond pool

fence 1m from the edge of the rim of the pool. Is it
required to bond the pool fence?

4. What is the minimum CSA of an equipotential bonding

conductor for a pool or spa?

5. Complete figure 2 to show all required equipotential bonding and protective

earthing conductors include the conductor’s size.
Pool Pump
Socket Outlet
Metallic Pool Fence
A N

Concrete Main Link

Pool

Main Earth (6mm 2)

figure 2.

Page 379 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 25 – Equipotential Bonding (pools & spas)

Refer to AS3000 6.3.3.2 and FAQ 011/2009

Activity - 26 – Equipotential Bonding (pools & spas)

Refer to AS3000 6.3.3.2 and FAQ 011/2009

1. Is it required to bond conductive pool

fencing located in a pool zone 2 or 3?

2. Is it required to bond a conductive pool

fence to a 230V class 1 bollard light if
they are both located in zone 3, but at a
horizontal distance of 1m to each other?

Page 380 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Water Features (fountains)

Activity - 27 – Degree of protection required

Refer to AS3000 clause 6.4.1

1. To be considered a water feature or a fountain what is

the minimum depth of the water?

Activity - 28 – Degree of protection required

Refer to AS3000 clause 6.4.4.1

List the minimum required degree of protection for equipment installed in the
following water feature zones.

1. Zone 0

2. Zone 1

Activity - 29 – Selection of equipment (fountains)

AS3000 Section 6.4.4, Table 6.3 and fig. 6.20 – 6.21

1. What is the minimum horizontal distance (↔) that a

non I.P. rated socket outlet may be installed next to a
water feature?

2. What is the minimum horizontal distance (↔) that a

non I.P. rated light switch may be installed next to a
water feature?

3. Is it permissible to install a non IP rated fluorescent

light 2.4m above (↕) a water feature?

Page 381 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Sauna

Unlike bathrooms pool, spa and water feature zone, electrical equipment installed in
sauna zones must be protected from heat rather than water.

Activity - 30 – Degree of protection required

Refer to AS3000 clause 6.5.4.1

List the minimum required degree of protection for equipment

installed in all sauna zones.

Activity - 31 – Selection of equipment (sauna)

Refer to AS3000 Section 6.5.4

List the requirements for equipment installed in the following sauna zones.

1. Zone 1

2. Zone 2

3. Zone 3

Page 382 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 3 – Voltage range of ELV installations

Activity - 32 – Voltage Ranges

Refer to AS3000 clause 1.4.128

List ranges of the following voltage specifications

1. Extra Low Voltage (E.L.V.) A.C

D.C.

2. Low Voltage (L.V.) A.C

D.C.

3. High Voltage (H.V.) A.C

D.C.

Page 383 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 4 – Selecting equipment for ELV installations

Isolation

In low voltage installations using the M.E.N. system the nominal supply voltage of
230V is present between Active and Neutral conductors, and Active to Earth
conductors as show in figure 3.

C.B.

V V = 230V
load
V V = 230V
M.E.N.
connection
N
PE

figure 3.
When a current is supplied through a double wound transformer there is no electrical
connection between the primary and secondary windings. This effectively removes the
M.E.N. on the secondary side of the transformer. With no M.E.N. connection there is
no reference to earth. This means there is no return path for current to flow from
either conductor back to the supply. As a result if a voltage measurement is taken to
earth the result will be zero volts as show in figure 4

C.B.

V V = 0V
load V V = 230V

M.E.N.
connection
N

figure 4.

Page 384 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 34 – Sources of SELV and PELV circuits

Refer to AS3000 clause 7.5.3

List the 4 sources of SELV or

PELV circuits.
a) ____________________________________

b) ____________________________________

c) _____________________________________

d) _____________________________________

Activity - 35 – Segregation
Refer to AS3000 clause 7.5.4

What is meant by the term

segregation?
____________________________________

____________________________________

_____________________________________

_____________________________________

Page 385 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 36 – Arrangement of SELV circuits

Refer to AS3000 clause 7.5.5

1. List the 4 items SELV

circuits must not be
connected to. a) ____________________________________

b) ____________________________________

c) _____________________________________

d) _____________________________________

2. Is basic protection against

electric shock (insulation)
required in dry indoor
locations, if the supply
voltage does not exceed
25VA.C. or 60VD.C. ?

As the name implies SELV circuits are “separated” from all other circuit connections as
shown if figure 5.

C.B. fuse

230VA.C. ≤ 50VA.C. load

M.E.N.
connection
N

figure 5.

Page 386 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Through the transformer the supply voltage is reduced to 50V or less. At these
voltages the risk of direct contact to persons or livestock is greatly reduced. As the
circuit is not connected to exposed conductive parts the risk of indirect contact is
eliminated. Figure 6 shows an example of ELV lighting where the supply conductors
are not insulated.

figure 6.

Activity - 37 – Arrangement of PELV circuits

Refer to AS3000 clause 7.5.6

1. In a PELV circuit how many conductors are

connected to earth?

2. Below what voltages is basic protection against

electric shock (insulation) not required when
equipment supplied by the circuit is in a dry A.C.
location and large area contact is not expected?

D.C.

3. Below what voltages is basic protection against

electric shock (insulation) not required in all other
cases? A.C.

D.C.

Page 387 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Figure 7 shows a PELV circuit.

C.B. fuse

230VA.C. ≤ 50VA.C. load

M.E.N.
connection
N

figure 7.

Activity - 38 – Voltage drop in SELV & PELV circuits

Refer to AS3000 clause 7.5.7

1. What is the maximum permissible percentage of

voltage drop in a SELV or PELV circuit?

Activity - 39 – Switches in SELV & PELV circuits

Refer to AS3000 clause 7.5.8.2

1. How many conductors must a switch

operate in a SELV circuit?

2. How many conductors must a switch

operate in a PELV circuit?

Page 388 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 40 – Switches in SELV & PELV circuits

Refer to AS3000 clause 7.5.9.1

1. In general are SELV and PELV circuits required to be

protected against overload and short circuit currents?

2. How many conductors must circuit protection operate

in, for SELV and PELV circuits?

Activity - 41 – Socket outlets in SELV & PELV circuits

Refer to AS3000 clause 7.5.10

Page 389 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial 12

1. The International Protection Rating (IP) indicates the degree of protection of

electrical equipment enclosures against penetration by:

(a) hazardous gases

(b) solid objects and water
(c) unauthorized persons
(d) flammable liquids and gases

2. The minimum IP rating required for a socket outlet installed in a bathroom within
the area designated as zone 0:

(a) IPX4
(b) IPX7
(c) IP56
(d) socket outlets are not permitted in Zone 0

3. Underwater pool lighting may be supplied with:

(a) A PELV or SELV supply of 12 V a.c. or less

(b) An SELV system not exceeding 30 V d.c.
(c) An earthing conductor connected to the light
(d) Only a PELV system where the supply is installed close to the light

4. The maximum permitted voltage drop in an ELV installation is:

(a) not specified

(b) 5% of the its nominal voltage
(c) 10% of the its nominal voltage
(d) 100% of the its nominal voltage.

5. Name two systems suitable for extra-low voltage electrical installations.

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

Page 390 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

6. Where may socket outlets be installed in a pool zone for the connection of pool
equipment?

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

7. Describe one method of supply for luminaires immersed in pool water.

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

8. State two alternative supply requirements for a circuit that supplies a pool filter
pump.

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

9. Describe the installation requirements for low voltage fixed wiring that terminates
in a pool zone.

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

Page 391 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

10. What is the minimum size equipotential bonding conductor used to bond steel
reinforcing of a pool?

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

11. How must the connection of bonding conductors in a pool zone be protected if
affected by pool water?

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

12. Under what circumstances does steel fence around a pool need to be bonded to
exposed metal in the pool zone?

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

13. What type of switch may be used for surface mounting in the restricted zone of a
bathroom?

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

Page 392 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

14. Complete the following table. Indicate the minimum IP rating of accessories
permitted in the following locations.

Location IP rating

Within 2 metres of the water of a pool (Zone 1).

External to any building and exposed to the

weather.

Appliances in the pool zone but not in contact

with the circulating water.

Appliances immersed in the pool water.

A switch installed within 500 mm of a 500 litre

spa installed in a bathroom.

15. Is it permissible to install unenclosed socket outlets within zones 1 or 2 of a

bathroom?

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

16. Describe an acceptable method for installing a socket outlet within a restricted
zone in a bathroom.

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

Page 393 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

17. Complete the following table by determining the minimum horizontal clearance
between a normal socket outlet and the following water containers.

Water Container Distance Reference

Bath.

Washtubs up to 40 litres.

Washtubs over 40 litres.

Spa of 6500 litre capacity.

Spa of 620 litre capacity.

Unenclosed shower rose.

Near the sliding door of a shower recess.

Hand basin.

18. What is the minimum depth for the installation ELV cables underground?

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

Page 394 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

19. Is it permissible to use a standard 10A socket outlet on a SELV or PELV circuit?

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

20. Do PELV circuits require a protective earthing conductor?

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

AS 3000 Reference (Clause number _______________ )

Page 395 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 13 - Special situations (Construction

and demolition sites; Caravan
parks)
Topics
• Other requirements and standards that
apply

• AS/NZS 3012 requirements

• AS/NZS 3001 requirements

Aim
Learners will be able to determine and meet the requirements of AS3000 when
selecting and installing electrical equipment in demolition sites and caravan parks.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 List the standards that apply to specific electrical installations.

 Outline the additional requirements for construction and demolition sites.

 Select wiring systems and cable sizes for the electrical installation in a given
caravan park.

Page 396 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 1 – Other requirements and standards

Section 7.8 of AS3000 lists other standards that relate to specific types of
installations. These installations because of the type/use of electrical equipment or
environmental conditions may require additional measures to decrease risk. Additional
information is detailed in appendix A of AS3000.

Activity - 1 – Other standards

Refer to AS3000 section 7.8

List the Australian standard for the following situations

1. Construction and demolition sites

2. Caravans and camping areas

3. Marinas and recreational boats

4. Shows and carnivals

5. High voltage installations

Section 7.7.2 of AS3000 covers areas classified as hazardous locations. Areas which
contain or may contain explosive liquids, gasses or dust. This section refers to the
following standards;

 Classification of Hazardous Areas are contained in AS/NZS 60079.10 and

AS/NZS 61241.10 and examples are outlined in the AS/NZS 2430.3 series of
standards.

 Selection and installation of electrical equipment in hazardous areas shall

comply with the appropriate requirements as specified in AS/NZS 2381.1 or
AS/NZS 61241.14.

Section 15 of this book will cover hazardous locations in more detail.

Page 397 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 2 - AS/NZS 3012 Electrical Installations Construction

and demolition sites)
Supply and arrangement.
Electrical installations on construction sites may consist of permanent wiring or fixed
construction wiring. Either system must comply with AS 3000 and AS 3012.

All appliances and equipment must be fed via an RCD protected final sub-circuit or a
portable RCD. Each final sub-circuit can only supply one type of equipment.

Polarization - AS3012 Section 2.1.5

All plugs, fixed socket-outlets and cord extension sockets of single and multiphase
shall be connected so the polarity of the single phase complies with the requirements
of AS/NZS 3000 and the phase sequence of multiphase is the same for all fixed
socket-outlets and cord extension sets on a construction or demolition site.

Maximum demand - AS3012 Section 2.2

Maximum demand for any circuit is calculated in accordance with AS/NZS 3000.

Switchboards - AS3012 Section 2.3

Switchboards are to comply with AS/NZS 3000 Clauses 2.9. In addition they must be
constructed to standards set in AS 1939 and AS 3100. Switchboards are to be fitted
with at least one 15 A socket outlet and have a cover which is only removed by use of
a tool.

At each switchboard, a fixed secure and stable means shall be provided to prevent
mechanical damage to flexible cords and cables and prevent the transfer of
mechanical strain to the cable connections (see Clause 2.5.3). An example of such a
means is to support flexible cords and cables above the floor or ground on stands,
cross-arms or similar, covered with material that is non-conducting.

Control and protection - AS3012 Section 2.4

Each switchboard has one main isolating device (except varied in AS3012), which is to
be provided with a securing mechanism.
 Protection of sub-mains is provided by any recognised circuit protection
method except semi-enclosed rewireable fuses.
 Final sub-circuits must have circuit breaker protection.
 Socket outlets in site sheds must have double pole switches
Fixed construction wiring - AS3012 Section 2.5
Wiring systems are to comply with AS /NZS 3000 with the following general variations
required by AS 3012:

 Construction wiring shall not be tied, bundled or grouped with permanent

wiring.

 unarmoured cable generally not permitted on metal roofs;

 all aerials to be insulated;

 underground wiring to be buried at least 600mm deep.

Page 398 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 2 - Calculation of sub-mains maximum

demand (construction sites)
Use AS3000 to calculate the maximum demand in the
consumer’s mains in a construction site with the flowing
load;

30 – 500W Halogen flood lights rated at 2.0A each (3 circuits)

20 - twin 36W fluorescent lights 0.333A each (1 circuit)
12 - 10A double single phase socket outlets (3 circuits 4 points per)
4 - 20A three phase socket outlets
2 – 32A 3 phase outlets.

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

Page 399 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Flexible cords - AS3012 Section 2.6

Flexible cords, cord extension sets, flexible cables and accessories shall comply with
AS 3012. In general, the following conditions apply:

 Extension leads must not be laid on the ground or floor except near where the
work is being carried out. In other positions on the route to the supply point,
the lead must be held on stands above ground or floor level.

 Extension leads must have plug tops and cord extension sockets with clear
castings, for visual checking of the cable connections and polarity;

 Extension leads must not exceed the lengths specified in table 1 of AS3012.

Luminaires - AS3012 Section 2.7

All lighting equipment must comply with AS 3000 (general requirements) and AS 3012
(specific requirements).

2.7.5 Edison screw type lamp holders, every low voltage edison screw lamp holder
shall be connected to the supply so that, where a neutral conductor is required, it
shall be connected to the outer contact.

Page 400 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

2.7.6 Festoon lighting

 lamp holders shall be permanently moulded to their supply cable and shall be
provided with a non-conductive mechanical guard for the lamp.
 The maximum permitted operating voltages for festoon lighting in Australia is
extra-low voltage (≤50 VA.C.).
 Festoon lighting shall be supported at least 2.5 m above any floor, ground,
platform or working area or be installed immediately below a ceiling.

Site Sheds - AS3012 Section 2.9

Electrical installations of transportable structures and their site supplies shall comply
with AS/NZS 3001 and with the following:
 Transportable structures shall be supplied by one of the following methods:
o Sub-mains originating at a circuit-breaker on a switchboard and
installed as construction wiring.
o Final sub-circuits originating at a circuit-breaker on a switchboard and
installed as construction wiring.
o Flexible cord and plug connected to a final sub-circuit via a socket-
outlet in accordance with the requirements of AS 3001 including—
 each socket-outlet shall have a degree of protection not less
than IPX4, both when the plug is inserted and when it is not;
 each socket-outlet shall be individually protected by a circuit-
breaker;
 the circuit-breaker shall not have a rating greater than that of
the socket- outlet, except where a 16 A circuit-breaker is
protecting a 15 A socket-outlet; and
 each socket-outlet shall be protected by an RCD with an
operating current not exceeding 30 mA that operates in all live
conductors (active and neutral).
It is recommended that a separate RCD is provided for each socket- outlet to
minimize the impact of the operation of a single RCD.
 Where supplied by flexible cord the minimum cross-sectional
area of the flexible cord shall be 2.5 mm2 and the maximum
length of flexible cord shall be 15 m.
Socket-outlets installed inside transportable structures shall
 be protected by RCDs, with a maximum rated residual current of 30 mA, that
operate in all live (active and neutral) conductors
 be used only to supply electrical equipment and lighting within that
transportable structure; and
 where the structure is supplied by flexible cord and plug, be controlled by
double-pole switches.
 Socket-outlets installed on the outside of transportable structures shall

Page 401 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

 be protected by 30 mA RCD that operates in all live (active and neutral)

conductors.
Testing requirements.
AS 3012 details stringent requirements for the testing of fixed construction wiring,
flexible cords, extension sets, portable outlets, portable equipment and RCDs used on
construction sites. General requirements include periodic testing, record keeping,
testing by authorised personnel, repair procedures documentation, tagging of tested
appliance and extension leads, and all electrical appliances brought on site to a
construction project must either have evidence of recent testing (tagged), or be
tested and tagged before being used. Table 3 of AS 3012 shows the frequency of
required testing.

Page 402 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 3 - AS/NZS 3001 Electrical installations—Relocatable

premises (including caravans and tents) and
their site installation
Introduction.

In this topic you will be introduced to the requirements for special installations, such
as caravans, caravan parks, boating marinas and shows and carnivals and the supply
and distribution arrangements and requirements for these installations. These
installations have special requirements due to the method of connection to the supply
and the additional hazards due to the special nature of the installation.

Caravan Parks.

The supply of electricity to a caravan, although regarded as a temporary

arrangement, must be provided at the same level of safety as expected in other
installations. Some special requirements involve the added protection of wiring
systems due to vibration during transport, the need to switch all live conductors,
including neutrals (double pole switching), due to ease of incorrect connection etc.
The additional requirements are specified in AS 3001.

figure 5 – www.k-mac.com.au

Page 403 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Method of Supply.
As with any installation the entire caravan park is supplied by consumer’s mains to a
M.S.B. Sub-mains then run to groups of service pillars. Service pillars may be treated
as separate out buildings. Figure 5 shows a service pillar also known as a power head.
Combination 16A R.C.D. / M.C.B.’s are located in weather proof enclosures at each
service pillar. Only one 15A socket outlet per R.C.D. / M.C.B. is permitted (AS 3001
Clause 2.2.7.4). Each caravan site can be supplied by one or more separate final sub-
circuits. Final sub-circuits are terminated by a socket inlet (AS 3001 Clause 3.2.2).
Figure 6 shows a caravan socket inlet.

figure 6 – www.clipsal.com.au

Underground Wiring AS 3001 Clause 2.2.2

Sub-mains suppling service pillars are typically underground. Generally category A

underground wiring system can be used with a minimum depth of laying of 1m, to
avoid damage from tent pegs. Otherwise a modified category B underground wiring
system with increased mechanical protection is required to;

 have a thickness of not less than 100 mm (increased from 75mm AS3000);

 be placed not more than 75 mm above the wiring system; and

 be not less than 150 mm wide and overlap the wiring system by at least 40
mm on each side.

NOTE: This mechanical protection substitutes for the additional mechanical protection
usually required by AS 3000 for a Category B system.

Overhead Wiring AS 3001 Clause 2.2.3

Further to the requirements for aerial wiring specified in AS/NZS 3000, overhead
wiring shall be installed so that cables are maintained at a height of not less than 6 m
above the ground or relevant elevated area and located at a minimum of 2 m outside
the vertical plane extending from the horizontal boundary of any site. Overhead wiring
shall consist of either;

 insulated aerial conductors (bare arial conductors are not permitted); or

 cable supported by a catenary.

Page 404 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Maximum Demand of Mains and Submains AS 3001 Clause 2.2.5

Clause 2.2.1 AS 3001 specifies the contribution to the maximum demand of various
numbers of points. Maximum demand of a final sub-circuit is taken as the rating of
the circuit protective device. An extract of appendix A, AS 3001 is shown below.

Page 405 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 3 – Maximum demand / cable selection

Refer to AS3001 clause 2.2.5

1. Determine the maximum demand of a

single phase sub-main supplying 12 x
15A socket outlets in service pillars
suitable for light duty load.

2. Select the minimum rating of a circuit

breaker to protect the sub-main

3. The sub-main is to be wired in V75 TPI cable in H.D. PVC U.G. conduit at a
depth of 1.0m. Determine the minimum required cable size?

Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Table Number / Column Number

De-rating Table Number / Column Number

De-rating factors

Required Current Carrying Capacity

Required Cable size

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (AS3000 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected

protective device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of cable

after de-rating has been applied.

Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Page 406 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Voltage Drop.

Voltage drop is in accordance with AS 3000 and is a consideration for wiring from the
consumers terminals to connection outlets.

MEN System of Earthing AS 3001 2.2.4

When an MEN system is used, poles and standards supporting distribution boards may
be regarded as outbuildings and may be treated as separate MEN installations. If this
is the case no protective earthing conductor is run from the supply. A earth electrode
and MEN connection are provided at each service pillar.
The caravans earthing system is connected to the protective earthing conductor of the
final sub-circuit supplying the caravan by the inlet socket. Connection to earth by an
independent earth stake is not permitted. (AS 3001 Clause 3.5.1.1)

Earthing of Relocatable Premises AS 3001 3.5.1.2

Equipment required to be connected to the protective earthing conductor includes;

 the frame of the caravan.

 all sections of the outer skin

 Window and door frames of conductive material where any part of the
relocatable premises’ electrical installation is within 100 mm of the frame.

 The earthing contact of all socket-outlets.

 The exposed conductive parts of electrical equipment required to be earthed in

accordance with AS/NZS 3000.

Isolation of wiring systems AS 3001 3.4.4.1

On premises to be registered for road travel, the wiring system supplying any lights,
signal devices, etc required during road travel shall be separate and isolated from all
other electrical wiring systems within the premises.

Switches and Socket outlets AS 3001 Clauses 3.6.2 & 3.6.3

All light switches and L.V. socket outlets installed within the caravan must be double
pole that is switch all live conductors active and neutral
In the case of three phase outlets a four pole switch is required.

Testing of Wiring AS 3001 3.10

The completed relocatable premises electrical installation shall be tested as detailed in

AS 3000 and as modified by the requirements of this Standard.

Page 407 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial 13

1. The Australian standard specific to construction and demolition sites is;

(a) AS 3000
(b) AS 3001
(c) AS 3004
(d) AS 3012

2. The Australian standard specific to camping and caravan sites is;

(a) AS 3000
(b) AS 3001
(c) AS 3004
(d) AS 3012

3. According to Australian standards extension leads used on construction sites must

be tested and tagged;

(a) daily
(b) monthly
(c) every 3 months
(d) yearly

4. According to Australian standards fixed R.C.D.s installed on construction sites

must be tested using the trip button;

(a) daily
(b) monthly
(c) every 3 months
(d) yearly

5. The minimum current rating of the circuit breaker protecting a caravan site final
sub-circuit is:-

(a) 8 A;
(b) 10 A;
(c) 16 A;
(d) 20 A.

Page 408 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

6. A suitable underground wiring system for a caravan park where pegs are not likely
to be driven is:-

(a) category A at a depth of 0.5m

(b) category A at a depth of 1.0m
(c) category A at a depth of 1.5m
(d) category A at a depth of 2.0m.

7. A suitable underground wiring system for a caravan park where pegs greater than
400mm are likely to be driven is:-

(a) category A at a depth of 0.5m

(b) category A at a depth of 1.0m
(c) category A at a depth of 1.5m
(d) category A at a depth of 2.0m.

8. A type of cable not suitable for overhead wiring in a caravan park is:-

(a) hard drawn bare copper;

(b) orange circular on a catenary cable
(c) neutral screened;
(d) parallel webbed.

9. The minimum height above ground level for overhead wiring above a caravan park
roadway is:-

(a) 6.0 m;
(b) 5.5 m;
(c) 4.5 m;
(d) 4.1m.

10. The minimum mounting height of a caravan park site non lockable switch board
is:-

(a) 1.6m;
(b) 1.2m;
(c) 0.9 m;
(d) 0.6m.

Page 409 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

11. Describe a suitable method and frequency for testing a portable RCD on a
building site by a qualified person.

_____________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

12. Describe a suitable method for fixing TPS cable to a catenary wire, to form a
catenary wiring system.

_________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

13. Is it permitted to cable tie construction wiring to the mesh of free standing
temporary fencing?

_____________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

14. Describe a method used to prevent strain on the connection plug of a connection.

_____________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

15. Is RCD protection mandatory for supplies on construction site?

_____________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

16. What is the minimum height above ground level at which festoon lighting can be
installed?

_____________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

17. What is the maximum permissible supply voltage for festoon lighting?

_____________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

Page 410 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

18. What is the maximum permissible percentage voltage drop from the point of
supply to socket outlets mounted in service pillars.

_____________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

19. What is the minimum mounting height for socket outlets and associated devices
mounted on service pillars in a caravan park?

_________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

20. Is a caravan treated as a separate MEN installation

_________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

21. List the items of equipment in a caravan that need to be earthed.

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

22. Describe the precautions to be taken where wiring passes through a caravan
frame.

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

Page 411 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

23. Determine the maximum demand of a sub-main suppling a distribution board in a

caravan park with the following load;

Camping Grounds
36 – socket outlets in service pillars for light duty loads
24 – socket outlets in service pillars for heavy duty loads
4 - 32A three phase socket outlets in service pillars for heavy duty loads
Amenities Block
3 x 20A C.B.s Lighting
3 x 20A C.B.s Power
3 x 20A C.B.s H.W.S.

Load Calculation A B C

Page 412 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 413 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 14 - Special situations (Marinas, Shows

and Carnivals)
Topics
• AS/NZS 3004 requirements

• AS/NZS 3002 requirements

Aim
Learners will be able to determine and meet the requirements of AS3000 when
selecting and installing electrical equipment in Marinas; Shows and carnivals.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 Outline the additional requirements for marinas and pleasure craft at low
voltage.

 Outline the additional requirements for shows and carnivals.

Page 414 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 1 - AS 3004 Electrical installations—Marinas and

Recreational boats
Boating Marinas.
A boating marina is any jetty, wharf, pier or pontoon capable of accommodating more
than one pleasure craft. A pleasure craft is any boat, motor launch, vessel, yacht or
houseboat used for pleasure. The corrosion problems associated with salt water and
the natural environment of boating marinas / pleasure craft are provided for in AS
3004. This is additional to the requirements of AS 3000.

Note: pleasure craft are referred to as 'boats' throughout AS 3004.

Method of Supply.
Similar to caravan parks the whole installation is supplied by consumer’s mains to a
M.S.B. The supply is then fed to a number of distribution boards, sub-mains are then
run to marine grade service pillars for connection to ‘boats’. Combination
R.C.D./M.C.B. ‘T off’ final sub-circuits to supply boats through 15A single phase or 32A
three phase outlets. Figure shows a typical Marina layout.

Service
Consumer’s Pillar
Sub-mains Sub-mains
mains Main Switch Dist.
S.P.
Board Board
point
of
supply

f.s.c. Sub-mains
Load S.P. S.P.

f.s.c. f.s.c.

Load Load

figure 1.

Maximum Demand.
Maximum demand is determined in accordance with AS 3000 for office and workshop
areas on shore. AS 3004.1 clause 2.2.1 and appendix D applies to areas supplying
boats. Below is an extract of appendix D of AS 3004.1. You will notice the similarity to
the method used to determine the maximum demand in caravan parks.

Voltage Drop.
Voltage drop is in accordance with AS3000 and is a consideration for wiring from the
consumer’s terminals to boat connection sockets.

Page 415 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 416 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 1 – Maximum demand / cable selection

Refer to AS3004.1 Appendix D

1. Determine the maximum demand of a

single phase sub-main supplying 6 x 15A
socket outlets in service pillars suitable
for heavy duty load.

2. Select the minimum rating of a circuit

breaker to protect the sub-main

3. The sub-main is to be wired in V75 2C+E TPS cable in M.D. PVC conduit. The
circuit is run next 1 other circuit in a separate conduit. Determine the minimum
required cable size?
Table Number 3(?) / Item Number

Table Number / Column Number

De-rating Table Number / Column Number

De-rating factors

Required Current Carrying Capacity

Required Cable size

Coordination between conductors and protective devices (AS3000 2.5.3.1)

IB = Maximum demand current

IN = Nominal current rating of the selected

protective device

Iz = Current Carrying Capacity of cable

after any de-rating has been applied.

Is IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ?

Page 417 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Distribution Boards / Service Pillars

Distribution boards must comply with AS3000

and have additional environmental protection by
virtue of position or construction method of
I.P.X6 (AS3004.1 Section 2.4)

Rating (AS3004.1 clause 2.4.2.4.2)

Connection to boats may be either terminals for

direct connection or socket outlets rated at;

 15A single phase 3 pin, flat pin plug

socket with earthing contact

 20A single phase 3 pin, round pin plug

socket with earthing contact

For lager craft a 3 phase 32 A round pin plug

socket with earthing contact is used.

Circuit protection at service pillars is provided by

figure 2 - www.patronpower.com.au
suitably rated 30mA combination R.C.D/M.C.B’s
as shown in figure 2.

Wiring Systems

Acceptable wiring systems (AS3004.1 clause 2.1.2.1)

Wiring systems for recreational boats berth supplies shall be one of, or a combination
of, the following types:

 Thermoplastic or elastomer insulated and sheathed copper cables enclosed in;

o flexible non-metallic conduit; or

o heavy duty rigid non-metallic conduit; or
o medium or heavy galvanized tube.
o Mineral-insulated, copper-sheathed cables, protected by a serving of
PVC or polyethylene.
o Armoured, thermoplastic or elastomer insulated and sheathed copper
cables protected by a serving of PVC or polyethylene.
o Other approved arrangements affording equal protection to that
specified above.
Prohibited systems and materials (AS3004.1 clause 2.1.2.2)

 Aerial conductors or catenary wiring of any type shall not be used on the
pontoon or jetty portions of a marina, nor over slipway, haul-out or hard-stand
areas.

 Conductors of aluminium or aluminium clad with other metals shall not be used
as part of a wiring system.

Page 418 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Earthing system

General (AS3004.1 clause 2.1.3.1)

 A protective earthing conductor or equipotential bonding conductor shall be

incorporated in each circuit and connected to each item of electrical equipment
as appropriate.

Prohibited practices (AS3004.1 clause 2.1.3.2)

 Metallic pipes or conduits shall not be used as protective earthing conductors.

Where the MEN system of earthing is used, poles or stands used to support
switchboards providing low-voltage electrical supply (service pillars) shall not
be regarded as ‘outbuildings or detached portions of an installation’, and the
method of earthing detailed in AS/NZS 3000 for a separate MEN installation
shall not be employed.

Bonding of metallic pipes and conduits (AS3004.1 clause 2.1.3.3)

 All metallic pipes and conduits shall be bonded to earth.

Boat Connections.
Isolation Transformers
The isolation transformer does not reduce the nominal voltage from 230V. The
isolation transformer effectively removes the M.E.N. connection. This removes any
reference back to the marina earthing system. Any earth leakage current flowing from
the boat to the shore with cause a slight voltage drop in the protective earth of the
connecting cable. The hull of the boat with be at a difference in voltage to the general
mass of earth. This will cause galvanic corrosion to the hull of the ship and its fittings.
The isolation transformer breaks the path between the boat and the shore earthing
system to prevent corrosion.

Isolation transformers will also decrease the risk of indirect contact for a person
stepping from shore to boat, or from boat to boat.

Earthing (AS3004.1 section 3.3)

There are three approved methods of connection of boats
 Supply through a shore-mounted isolating transformer (AS3004.1 clause
3.3.2) The shore protective earthing conductor is not connected to the boats
earthing system as shown in figure 3.
 Supply through an on-board isolating transformer (AS3004.1 clause 3.3.3) The
shore protective earthing conductor is not connected to the boats earthing
system as shown in figure 4.
 Supply without an isolating transformer (AS3004.1 clause 3.3.4) The shore
protective earthing conductor is connected to the boats earthing system as
shown in figure 5.

Page 419 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Below is an extract of AS3004.1. Supply boats by:-

figure 3 – AS3004.1

figure 4 – AS3004.1

Page 420 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 5 – AS3004.1

Testing and Verification of Marinas

RCDs protecting final sub-circuits constituting part of the low-voltage electrical supply
to a berth for recreational boats should (AS3004.1 clause 4.1.1.) be;

 operated monthly by means of their in-built test facility (push button); and

 tested at least once every calendar year for correct response to a leakage
current (i.e. current imbalance/tripping time test) in accordance with AS/NZS
3760; and

 periodically inspected visually for damage, corrosion and excess wear and tear.

NOTES: Period to be as stated in local regulations or five years if no period is

stated.This test can be performed with an appropriate RCD tester.

Boat Wiring and Equipment.

Requirements for the electrical installation in any boat is detailed in AS 3004.2 Section
10. Environmental effects such as salt, moisture, electrolysis and movement when
connected to shore supply are considered.

Note that a hazardous area may be created due to fuel dispensing arrangements at
marinas and to fuel storage and use on boats.

Page 421 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 2 - AS 3002 Electrical installations – Shows and

Carnivals
Shows and Carnivals.

The supply of electricity to shows and carnivals, although often temporary, must be
provided as safely as expected in other installations. Some special requirements
involve the added protection of wiring systems due to the environment and the risk to
public safety. The additional requirements specified in AS 3002 apply to temporary
‘events’ with a duration of no longer than 4 weeks. Events longer than 4 weeks
must comply with AS3000.

Method of Supply. (AS3002 Clause 2.1.1).

Permanent wiring must comply with AS3000 and AS3002.

Underground Wiring. (AS3002 Clause 2.1.2).

Underground wiring should be run where pegs are not expected to be driven, the
cable shall be located at a depth of not less than 1.0 m; or where the depth of burial
is less than 1.0 m, mechanical protection greater than that required by AS/NZS 3000
shall be provided by—

a continuous pour of concrete, which shall—

 be placed not more than 75mm above the wiring system; and

 have a thickness of not less than 100mm (cat B AS3000 requires 75mm); and

 be not less than 150mm wide and overlap the wiring system by at least 40 mm
on each side; or

an alternative that provides an equivalent level of mechanical protection detailed

above; or

 where rock is encountered closer to the surface than 1.0 m, the cable may be
enclosed in heavy gauge galvanized steel tube or heavy duty insulating conduit
installed in a Category C underground wiring system as specified in AS3000; or

 supplementary protection of the underground site supply by an RCD Type S

with a maximum rated residual current of 100 mA (protection of property not
persons or livestock)

Overhead Wiring. (AS3002 Clause 2.1.3).

Overhead wiring systems must be either;

 Insulated aerial conductors or

 double insulated catenary wiring

Page 422 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Wiring must have a minimum ground clearance of 6 metres over areas where rides
are used or where vehicles may be used or parked (AS3000 only requires 4.6m). The
maximum height of vehicles in N.S.W. is 4.3m.

Maximum Demand of Mains and Submains. (AS 3002 Clause 2.2).

This is generally determined by the application of AS3000, bearing in mind the non
domestic nature of the load, except for accommodation caravan loading.

Connection Facilities. (AS3002 Clause 2.3.).

Connections to low voltage wiring may be made by socket outlets, links or terminals
similar to those used in caravan parks, enclosed in IPX3 enclosures that still provide
adequate protection when the connections are in place. Socket outlets must be 15A
flat 3 pin or 20A round 3 pin for single phase or round pin 32A for three phase. Links
must be rated not less than 15A for single phase or 30A for three phase.

Control, Isolation and Protective Devices. (AS3002 Clause 2.3.5-7).

Protection up to 50A is by circuit breakers. Circuit Breaker or HRC fuses with a degree
of protection IP2X are allowed on loads over 50A per phase. Every connection facility
must have its own control/isolation device. The circuit breaker may be used to provide
this function. Socket outlets up and including 20A must be RCD protected.

Switchboards. (AS3002 Clause 2.3.5-7).

Switchboards must be rated IPX4, have doors that cannot be removed, be lockable
and able to be fixed in the open position. Switchboards are not to be installed less
than 0.8m from the ground or platform and not higher than 2m from the ground or
platform. It must have a tie bar for anchoring flexible cords and cables terminating at
the switchboard.

Supply by Generator.

Generators or solar panels and inverter may used to supply all or part of shows and
carnivals. AS3002 Section 3 specifies the requirements for supply by generators.

Additional requirements for the connection of transportable generators complying with

the principles of AS2790 are as follows:

 Switchboards supplied directly by the generator shall provide protection to all

submains and final subcircuits (see figure 6).

 Isolated winding generators may be used to supply multiple items of electrical

equipment if the requirements for ‘protection by electrical separation’ in
AS3000 are satisfied by the use of double pole switches (see figure 7).

 Generators providing low-voltage electrical power supply via RCDs with a

maximum rated residual current of 30 mA, operating in all live (active and
neutral) conductors, and located on the generator as per figure 8, may be used
to supply multiple items of electrical equipment.

Systems shown in figures 7 and 8 are equipotentially bonded systems, intentionally

not earthed. Earthing of the generator frame, or equipotential bonding system, by the
use of an electrode or stake is not required and not recommended.

Page 423 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 6. – AS3002 - Stand alone system from a single phase generator.

Page 424 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 7 – AS3002 – Isolated winding generator with integral socket outlet

figure 8 – AS3002 - Stand alone system single phase generator protected by a RCD

Permanently Connected Site Wiring.

AS 3002 Section 4 specifies the requirements for temporary wiring employing direct
connections. This include temporary submains, switchboards and larger supplies to
loads such as large rides and decorative lighting. Cables must have adequate current
rating and be installed so that they do not obstruct pedestrians and so that they are
not subject to mechanical damage or excessive temperature by location or mechanical
protection. Temporary switchboards, other than main switchboards, may be installed
above 2 metres from the ground or platform.

Equipment Using Detachable Connections.

AS3002 Section 5 specifies the requirements for temporary wiring employing
detachable connections (plugs and sockets). All of these types of loads rated at 32A or
less, must be protected by 30mA RCDs at the origin of the circuit. Plugs must be of a
type and current rating to suit the approved sockets. Cables connecting equipment
must be approved flexible cord or cable with a maximum length governed by
conductor size as given in Table 5.1 of AS3002 (10m for 1.0mm2, 25m for 1,5mm2,
30m for 2.5mm2, and 40m for 4.0mm2).

Outlet Boxes.
Section 5.6 of AS3002 outlines the requirements for the construction, terminations,
types of connection devices, earthing, protection methods, control devices and
marking of outlet boxes.

Sections 5.7, 5.8 and 5.9 of AS3002 outline requirements for electrical portable outlet
devices, festoon and decorative lighting and rides.

Page 425 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Appendix A contains recommendations for testing of equipment.

Tutorial 14

1. The minimum current rating of the circuit breaker protecting a marina final sub-
circuit is:-

(a) 8A
(b) 10A
(c) 16A
(d) 20A

2. A suitable wiring system or use for the connection of service pillars in a marina
would be;

(a) orange circular on perforated cable tray

(b) thermo plastic insulated cable in M.D. P.V.C. conduit.
(c) orange circular on catenary support.
(d) orange circular cable in H.D. P.V.C. conduit.

3. The minimum depth of laying for a category A underground wiring system to a

carnival site is:-

(a) 0.5 m
(b) 1.0 m
(c) 1.2m
(d) 1.5m

4. Where a category B underground wiring system is to be installed in a carnival site

the minimum depth of concrete cover of the conduit is:-

(a) 50mm
(b) 75mm
(c) 100mm
(d) 150mm

5. When portable generators are used to supply portions of carnivals what type of
switches must be used to control and isolate equipment;

(a) single pole

(b) double pole
(c) intermediate
(d) 2 way

Page 426 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

6. What portions of a marina cannot have catenary wiring?

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

7. Describe the environmental conditions peculiar to a marina.

__________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

8. Under what circumstances may a pontoon distribution board mounting height be

reduced to 0.3 m?

__________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

9. Describe three methods of shore supply for boats at a marina.

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

Page 427 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

10. What is the minimum current rating of a plug socket for supply to a boat?

__________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

11. Describe the general requirements for the arrangement of a shore supply flexible
cord.

__________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

12. Can steel pipe be used as a earthing conductor in a marina?

__________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

13. Describe a suitable overhead wire system hat may be used in a carnival.

__________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

14. What is the minimum height of aerials above areas where vehicles may be used in
a carnival?

__________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

Page 428 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

15. Is it required to earth a portable generators used to supply portions of carnivals

through a earth electrode

__________________________________________________________________

Reference _____________ (Clause number _______________)

Page 429 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 15 - Special situations (HV installations;

Hazardous areas) and documenting
Topics
• High voltage installations

• Defining hazardous areas

• Responsibilities

• Mandatory documentation

• Design Documentation

Aim
Learners will be able to determine and meet the requirements of AS3000 when
selecting and installing electrical equipment in high voltage installations and
hazardous areas.

Learning objectives:
Learners should be able to meet the following learning objectives:

 Define the term ‘high voltage’.

 Outline suitable safety measures that should be applied in the presence of high
voltage electricity.
 List applications that require a high voltage electrical supply.
 Outline AS3000 requirements for HV installations.
 Define a hazardous area and outline the reasons for the need for special
requirements for electrical wiring and equipment associated with these areas.
 Classify a given hazardous area.
 Outline the types of suitable equipment for installation in hazardous areas.
 Outline AS3000 requirements for hazardous areas.
 Outline the responsibilities of those engaged in working with fixed wiring and
equipment (electrical installations).
 Apply the requirements to complete mandatory
documentation in relation to work on electrical installations.
 Explain the need to record the reasons for particular
installation design decisions.
 Document the design decisions and equipment selected for a given installation.

Page 430 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 1 – High Voltage Installations

Due to higher voltage levels the risks involved when working with ‘High Voltage’ are
also increased. Electrical equipment requires increased insulation integrity. Isolation
procedures require a different type of test equipment.

Activity - 1 – High Voltage - Definition

Refer to AS3000 section 1.4.128

1. Above what voltage is regarded as High A.C. D.C.

Voltage

High Voltage Safety

The following is an extract from the Code of Practice - Electricity transmission and
distribution asset management (www.dwe.nsw.gov.au)

Qualifications and Training (H.V. C.O.P. clause 7.2)

No work to which this shall be carried out unless the employee:

 has received training which is appropriate for the type of work concerned, and
has been authorised by their employer after the training has been satisfactorily
completed.

 is capable to safely perform the work required to be undertaken, has

demonstrated competency of the relevant work procedures and safety
instructions.

 has during the previous 12 months, received appropriate instruction in the

following procedures that are relevant to the nature of the work;

o resuscitation

o releasing a person from live electricity works

o rescuing a person from a pole

o structure or elevating work platform.

o and rescuing a person from confined space.

Page 431 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Basic Safety Principles (H.V. C.O.P. clause 7.3.1)

All HV electricity works shall be regarded as live until isolated, proved to be de-
energised, earthed and short-circuited, and an Access Permit issued according to the
Network Operator approved live line working techniques shall be used. All LV
electricity works shall be regarded as live until isolated and proved to be de-
energised, in accordance with procedure, otherwise approved safe live working
procedures shall be used.

Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment (H.V. C.O.P. clause 7.3.2)

All hazards shall be identified and the associated risks assessed, in writing, prior to
working on or near any electricity works. The hazard identification and risk
assessment system shall be regularly audited to ensure compliance.

Hazard Control (H.V. C.O.P. clause 7.3.3)

Appropriate control measures shall be adopted for identified hazards, taking into
consideration the associated risks.

Minimum Safe Working (H.V. C.O.P. clause 7.3.4)

No part o a persons body and no material or equipment not insulated or the voltage
concerned must come closer than the following minimum safe working distances for
live exposed electricity works specified in table 1, unless specific procedures approved
by the Network Operator, including fixing barriers or live working techniques, are
utilised:

Table 1

Nominal Voltage (U) Minimum Safe

Volts Working Distance
(mm)

U < 1 000 500

1 000 < U < 11 000 700

11 000 < U < 66 000 1000

66 000 < U < 132 000 1500

132 000 < U < 220 000 2500

220 000 < U < 330 000 3000

U > 330 000

4000

Page 432 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Correct Labelling & Recording of Electricity Works (H.V. C.O.P. clause 7.3.5)

All electricity works shall be clearly identified by labels, which shall be updated if any
network alteration has taken place. Temporary labelling and danger tags are required
as a warning against inadvertent and unauthorised operation of electricity works.
Records, diagrams, maps and the like shall be kept as to the location, type and
installation details.

Hazardous Electrical Occurrences or Effects (H.V. C.O.P. clause 7.3.6)

The hazardous electrical occurrences or effects which can develop on or around

electricity works are summarised under the following categories:

 lightning

 induction

 transfer voltage

 voltage gradient

 line energising

 and neutral and earthing system currents.

Precautions shall be taken to avoid danger from electrical occurrences or effects.

Precautions for Energisation and Re-energisation of Electricity Works (H.V.

C.O.P. clause 7.3.7)

Electricity works shall not be energised or re-energised unless:

 the employees are trained and authorised to carry out the energisation or re-
energisation of the electricity works
 all work on the electricity works is complete
 all equipment (including testing equipment), plant, tools and materials are
removed
 all earths, short-circuits and equipotential bonds, if used, are removed,
appropriate checks and tests are carried out to ensure safety, precautions are
taken to ensure all persons are clear of the electricity works
 and all relevant Access Permits are cancelled.

High Voltage Applications

Applications of High Voltage include;

 power transmission lines

 substations
 high output electric motors
 arc furnaces.

Page 433 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

AS3000 Requirements
The requirements of High Voltage (H.V.) are detailed in section 7.6 of AS3000.

Activity - 2 – High Voltage Installations

Refer to AS3000 section 7.6.2.1

1. In Australia electrical equipment operating

at high voltage must comply with which
Australian standard.

Activity - 3 – High Voltage Installations

Refer to AS3000 7.6.3

Page 434 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 2 – Hazardous Locations

In this topic you will be introduced to the requirements for hazardous locations, where
flammable materials are generated, prepared, processed, handled, stored or
otherwise used, and which are therefore potentially hazardous.

Activity - 4 – Definition - Hazardous Location

Refer to AS3000 1.4.15

Typical installations include, but are not restricted to:

 spray painting areas.

 petrol and gas refuelling stations.
 grain storage facilities.
 dry cleaning vats etc.
 sump pumps and drainage systems of car parks.
If you are asked to install electrical equipment in hazardous areas you should:

o have the area assessed and classified as to the class and zone of hazard that
exists. The responsibility for classification of a hazardous area generally rests
with the occupier, though they will need to have an expert carry out the
classification.

o have the work carried out by tradesmen that have undertaken the special
training course required to be undertaken for installing equipment in hazardous
areas.

Classification of Hazardous Locations

Hazardous locations standards are now spread over several volumes. Read in
conjunction with section 7.7 of AS3000.

Two general hazardous areas are recognised: (AS3000 clause 7.7.2.2)

 Gas hazardous areas, in which flammable gases or vapours may be present in

sufficient quantities to produce an explosive gas atmosphere. Within gas
hazardous areas, three Zones (Zone 0, Zone 1, Zone 2) (defined in AS
2430.1).

o Zone 0 - flammable gases or vapours present at all times.

o Zone 1 - flammable gases or vapours present occasionally.

Page 435 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

o Zone 2 - flammable gases or vapours present on rare occasions for

short periods of time.

o NH - Not Hazardous (flammable gases or vapours not present at

sufficient quantities to be of risk)

 Dust hazardous areas, which are hazardous because of the presence of

combustible dust, fibres or flyings. Within dust hazardous areas, three Zones
(Zone 20, Zone 21, Zone 22) are recognised (defined in AS 61241.3)

o Zone 20 - combustible dust, fibres or flyings present at all times.

o Zone 21 - combustible dust, fibres or flyings present occasionally..

o Zone 22 - combustible dust, fibres or flyings present rare occasions for

short periods of time.

o NH - Not Hazardous (combustible dust, fibres or flyings not present

at sufficient quantities to be of risk)

In determining the classification of an area, you must consider:

 The quantity and type of the material.

 The natural tendency of vapours to disperse.
 The location and its ventilation.
 The degree of maintenance.

Activity - 5 – Hazardous Locations - Classification

Refer to AS60079.10 (figure 1) and AS2430.1

1. What zone is the refuelling area of a petrol station

classified?

2. What zone is a spray painting booth classified?

3. What zone is the sump of a underground car park be

classified?

4. What zone is the area adjacent to a LPG decanting bottle?

5. What zone is the interior of a petrol storage tank

Page 436 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 1 - Extract from AS60079.10 2005

Page 437 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

figure 2 - Extract from AS61241 2005

Page 438 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Activity - 6 – Hazardous Locations - Dust

Refer to AS61241.3 (figure 2) & AS2430.1

1. What zone is the floor of a wheat silo classified?

2. What zone is the inside of a coal hopper classified?

3. What zone is the inside of a cement batching unit classified?

4. What zone is a wheat handling conveyor belt classified?

You should also consider:

o Heavier-than-air gases and vapours will tend to spread outwards and

downwards. Watch for pooling of escaped gases and vapours.

o Lighter-than-air gases move upwards, so care must be taken with pooling in

tops of roof spaces etc.

o Combustible dusts maybe hazardous in suspension or as settled dust.

o A liquid whose flammability is normally low or moderate is likely to be more

hazardous under increased or decreased pressure.

During preliminary design stages it is often possible to reduce the hazard by studying
plant layout and product enclosure to maximise the use of natural ventilation to
disperse and diffuse any flammable material that may be released.

Electrical equipment AS3000 Clause 7.7.2.4

Electrical equipment for use in hazardous areas shall comply with the requirements of
the AS 2381 series.

Electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance with the installation requirements

of the various parts of the AS 2381 series.

Once it has been decided that an area is hazardous and it has been classified, suitable
electrical apparatus can be chosen.

Page 439 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

The first step is to consider whether the electrical apparatus can be located outside
the hazardous area. If not then step two is to provide for its location in the least
hazardous area since:

o Apparatus is more likely to be available for non-hazardous areas or areas of

low hazard.

o The cost of apparatus and installation for hazardous areas will almost certainly
be higher.

o The delivery times on apparatus for hazardous areas may be very long,
especially if modification or certification is needed for a certain Standard.

The risk of an explosion is greater when apparatus is used in a hazardous area

compared with an area of lower hazard, or non-hazardous area.

EXPLOSION PROTECTION TECHNIQUES

Explosion protection technique describes the use of particular types of construction of

electrical apparatus for use in hazardous areas. Each technique has a name and is
identified by the symbol Ex, followed by a letter corresponding to the type of
protection. The exception is DIP (where the symbol Ex is not used).

There are several techniques which may be grouped by their principal method of
protection. These can be summarised as follows:-

 Exclusion: Excludes the hazardous material, either gas or dust, from the
apparatus so that a spark or hot surface inside the apparatus cannot cause
ignition. This is achieved by sealing the enclosure, by the use of enclosed
devices or by filling the apparatus with some substance, which may be solid,
liquid or inert gas. e.g. mercury switches or oil filled apparatus.

 Explosion containment: Contains an explosion, if it does occur, in the

apparatus. A flameproof enclosure is probably the best known and most widely
used of all techniques, but it is only appropriate for gas hazards. This method
has a controlled vent to the atmosphere designed specifically for the type of
hazardous substance. If an explosion does occur inside the enclosure the
gasses from the explosion are vented and cooled as they leave the chamber so
that they cannot cause ignition outside the chamber.

 Energy limitation: Limits the energy in the electrical circuit below the minimum
ignition energies required to cause an explosion. Intrinsic safety is the most
common technique used to achieve this. Equipment used within the hazardous
space (normally sensors etc) have limited energy available which is inadequate
to cause ignition in the hazardous area.

 Dilution: Dilutes the hazardous gas atmosphere below the lower flammable
limit by forced ventilation, reducing the hazard. It is not used for combustible
dust areas as the draft may increase the amount of dust in suspension,
increasing the risk of an explosion.

 Avoidance of ignition source: Prevents an ignition source from occurring. The

most common technique is increased safety, used for apparatus such as
terminal boxes, that do not arc or spark in normal service.

Page 440 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

The two ignition sources from electrical equipment are:-

o explosion due to sparks and

o ignition due to surface temperature.

Installation and maintenance personnel must be trained and competent in the

installation and maintenance of all Ex apparatus. The following sections deal with each
of the various types of explosion protection techniques.

FLAMEPROOF ENCLOSURE (Ex d)

The flameproof Ex d is a containment explosion protection technique for electrical

apparatus in which the enclosure will withstand an internal explosion of flammable
mixture without suffering damage and without causing ignition, through any joints or
openings in the enclosure. As the pressure within the enclosure forces its way through
the gaps in the enclosure the flame is carried with it. The gaps and joints in the
enclosure are designed to act as energy sinks and reduce the level of energy in the
explosion flame below the level needed to ignite the surrounding explosive
atmosphere.

A particular flameproof enclosure may not be suitable for all gases. Various gases
produce different pressures and require different minimum flamepath lengths and
gaps. The correct enclosure must be used for the type of gas present. Flameproof
enclosures are commonly available for methane (coal mines), propane, ethylene,
hydrogen and acetylene.

There is a wide range of flameproof apparatus in use by industry, such as control

stations, switches, motor starters, lighting fixtures, plugs and socket-outlets, junction
boxes and instrument enclosures.

INCREASED SAFETY (Ex e)

The Ex e explosion protection technique is one of avoidance of arcs or sparks or hot

surfaces. It applies only to electrical apparatus of which no parts produce arcs or
sparks or exceed the limiting temperature in normal service.

o Insulation materials must be of higher integrity than normal. This is achieved

using better quality materials, or additional insulation or by derating
conventional insulating materials (eg. for motors).

o Minimum distances are specified for clearances between live parts and
creepage across the surface of insulation to avoid arcing or tracking.

o Requirements for protection against ingress of solid bodies or water are

specified.

o All unprotected surfaces of the apparatus must be kept within temperature

limits appropriate to the Standard.

INTRINSIC SAFETY (Ex i)

Intrinsic safety is an energy limitation technique - a circuit in which any spark or

thermal effect produced is not capable of causing ignition of a given explosive gas
atmosphere.

Page 441 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

A typical intrinsically safe electrical system could be an instrument loop in a hazardous

area, which consists of two or more pieces of electrical apparatus connected together
to measure certain parameters. Before the safe area wiring enters the hazardous area
it passes through energy limiting apparatus. The combined capability of all the
individual pieces of electrical apparatus, including the wiring, to cause ignition must be
assessed to ensure that the system complies with the installation requirements.

Because of its design complexity and dependence on the circuit precision, component
specification and on the precise materials of construction, AS/NZS 3800 prohibits the
repair of intrinsically safe apparatus by anyone other than the manufacturers or their
authorised agents.

Intrinsic safety has become one of the major explosion protection techniques,
particularly in the instrumentation area. It originated in the coal mining industry but
now finds application in all hazardous areas.

ENCAPSULATION (Ex m)

In this method of protection electrical components are enclosed in a resin in such a

way that an explosive atmosphere cannot be ignited during operation by either
sparking or overheating which may occur within the encapsulation. The surface
temperature of the encapsulated apparatus must not exceed the certified temperature
classification. The method is not often used on its own but is usually combined with
other techniques. An example would be a Ex m certified ballast in an Ex e certified
fluorescent luminaire. Repair of Ex m apparatus is not permitted, since it is almost
impossible to repair encapsulated components without damage to the components.

NON-SPARKING (Ex n)

Non-sparking apparatus is not capable of igniting a surrounding explosive gas

atmosphere and a fault capable of causing ignition is not likely to occur. Non sparking
apparatus is only permitted in Zone 2 areas where the probability of a coincidence of
an explosive mixture of gas and a fault In the apparatus is considered to be
acceptably low. Non-sparking is really a collection of various techniques and covers
both non-sparking apparatus and apparatus which in normal operation arcs, sparks or
produces hot surfaces, required to be protected by one of the following methods:-

 Enclosed break device. (Maximum rating of 660 V and 15 A).

 Non incendive component. (Maximum rating of 250 V and 15 A).

 Hermetically sealed device. (Cannot be opened in normal service, with free

internal volume not exceeding 100 cm3, and provided with external
connections, eg. flying leads or external terminals).

 Energy limited apparatus and circuits. (Must be assessed and, where

necessary, tested).

 Restricted breathing enclosure. (Restricted breathing enclosures are limited to

use with the heavier gases and vapours, not with gases such as acetylene,
hydrogen or isoprene).

 Ordinary industrial type apparatus do not meet the requirements for Ex n, only
apparatus certified specifically as Ex n, meet such requirements.

Page 442 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

The major concerns in the Ex n explosion-protection are the temperature of the

hottest part of the assembly and the prevention of the ingress of dust and water in
quantities that could be harmful to the electrical components inside. For example an
IP rating of not less than IP54 is required for terminal boxes on Ex n motors.

OIL-IMMERSION (Ex o)
The oil-immersion protection technique is one in which the electrical apparatus or
parts of the electrical apparatus are immersed in a protective liquid in such a way that
the explosive atmosphere which may be above the liquid or outside the enclosure
cannot be ignited.

The presence of oil permits moving parts such as the contacts of circuit breakers and
is helpful in quenching the arcs produced during operation. The oil must not give off
toxic or hazardous fumes, particularly when subjected to heat and arcing conditions.

PRESSURISED ROOMS OR PRESSURISED ENCLOSURES (Ex p)

The pressurised enclosure is an enclosure in which pressurisation is used to guard
against the ingress of the external explosive atmosphere by maintaining the internal
pressure of an enclosure for electrical apparatus above that of the external explosive
atmosphere, or by maintaining a sufficient flow of air or inert gas through a room or
enclosure to reduce any concentration of flammable material within to a safe level.

Pressurisation is a reasonably popular method of making enclosures or rooms safe for

use in hazardous areas. It has the advantage that commercial apparatus can often be
more readily modified to meet the requirements of Ex p than other techniques.

POWDER-FILLING (Ex q)

The powder-filled apparatus is a type of protection in which the parts capable of

igniting an explosive atmosphere are fixed in position and completely surrounded by
filling material to prevent the ignition of an external explosive atmosphere.

Powder filling is achieved by the use of quartz or solid glass particles of between 0.5
and I mm sieve size. These are poured around the components in such a way as to
eliminate any voids, usually by special vibration techniques. If an explosive
atmosphere penetrates and ignition takes place propagation to the outside
atmosphere is prevented by the quenching action of the tortuous paths in the filling
material.

SPECIAL PROTECTION (Ex s)

Special protection is a concept which has been adopted to permit the certification of
those types of electrical apparatus which, by their nature, do not comply with the
constructional or other requirements specified for apparatus with established types of
protection, but which nevertheless can be shown, where necessary by test, to be
suitable for use in prescribed zones or hazardous areas.

VENTILATION (Ex v)
Requirements for protection by ventilation is divided into two sections:-

 Section 1 - Ventilation of buildings and rooms - Gas or vapour dilution and

 Section 2 - Ventilation of electrical power apparatus - Heat dissipation.

Page 443 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

There are two important definitions in Section 1:-

o Naturally ventilated areas - an area where there are no obstacles to free

natural diffusion of gases or vapours likely to be released in the atmosphere
such as outdoor situations or a building, room or space substantially open, and
free from obstruction.

o Mechanically ventilated area - an area where uncontaminated air is

continuously introduced in sufficient quantity to prevent formation of an
explosive gas-air mixture.

In both cases the requirement is for sufficient air to be available to dilute the gas in
the area. This should not be confused with the pressurisation technique, which
excludes the gas.

Section 2 defines heat dissipation as:-

A process of supplying electrical power apparatus with ventilation at sufficient flow to

maintain the temperature of the exposed surface of the electrical apparatus at a safe
level. The technique is aimed at reducing the temperature of the electrical apparatus
to a required temperature.

DUST IGNITION PROTECTION (DIP)

A DIP enclosure is sealed against dust and the surface temperature must be
maintained below the cloud or layer ignition temperatures of the dust. About 70
percent of dusts produced by industrial processes are flammable. Dusts differ from
gases in that energy levels required to cause ignition are higher, typically millijoules
rather than micro joules, and the ignition temperature is generally lower. DIP design
limits the build up of dust on the exterior surfaces of the enclosure by avoiding flat
horizontal surfaces. Dusts do not disperse with time and ventilation can convert dust
layers into dust clouds rendering the hazardous area more dangerous.

A suitably certified DIP enclosure may be used in Zone 20, 21 and 22 areas. All light
fittings, with the exception of fluorescent fittings, must be clearly marked to indicate
the maximum wattage of the lamp that may be used in the fitting without exceeding
the maximum surface temperature of the enclosure.

MIXED TECHNIQUES

It is quite common for more than one explosion protection technique to be used on a
single item of apparatus. An example is a flameproof motor with an increased safety
terminal box. In addition, flameproof apparatus is often designed to also meet DIP
requirements by including gaskets in such a way that they do not affect the flame
paths.

Increased Safety (Ex e) apparatus is actually a combination of explosion protection

techniques.

Page 444 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 3 – Responsibilities
The Electricity (consumer safety) ACT 2006 details the legal responsibilities of persons
involved in the installation of electrical equipment.
The Act makes it an offence for a person to carry out electrical installation work that is
not in accordance with;

 Australian/New Zealand Wiring Rules.

 New South Wales Service and Installation Rules

The following electrical installations, or parts of electrical installations, may not be

energised unless the relevant distribution network service provider first authorises it:

(a) any new electrical installation that has not previously been energised,

(b) any alteration of, or addition to, an electrical installation that will require a

change to the network connection or metering arrangements.

An electrical installation, or part of an electrical installation, must not be energised

unless its safe operation and compliance with the Australian/New Zealand Wiring
Rules have been established by a safety and compliance test.

Safety and compliance tests

A safety and compliance test on electrical installation work on an electrical installation,
or part of an electrical installation, must be carried out by a qualified person (holder of
a Qualified Supervisors licence) in accordance with the requirements of this clause
after the completion of the work.
A safety and compliance test on electrical installation work must verify that the work
complies with the requirements of the Australian/New Zealand Wiring Rules.

Notification of results of safety and compliance tests

Notices relating to network connected electrical installations must be provided no later
than 7 days after the completion of any safety and compliance test on an electrical
installation (CCEW), the results of the test are to be notified as follows:

 to the owner of the installation,

 to the distribution system of a distribution network service provider

if the electrical installation work concerned involves:

o a new electrical installation, or

o any alterations or additions to an existing electrical
installation in relation to the network connection or metering
arrangements for the installation, or

o work on a switchboard or associated electrical equipment

(other than work to repair or replace equipment that does
not alter the electrical loading), Work on a switchboard or
associated electrical equipment includes, the addition of new
subcircuits or submains and any work that increases the

Page 445 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

rating of existing subcircuits or submains.

 the installing contractor is also to keep a copy.

The notice must be in written form using a Certificate of Compliance Electrical Work

If the results of the test are not notified, the responsible person for the electrical
installation work is guilty of an offence.

Maximum penalty:

 40 penalty units (in the case of a corporation)

 20 penalty units (in any other case).

One penalty unit is $110.00 in the 2010/11 financial year (1 July 2010 to 30 June
2011). The rate for penalty units is indexed annually, so that it is raised in line with
inflation. Any change to the value of a penalty unit will happen on 1 July each year.

A person who notifies the results of a test:

 must keep a copy of the notice for at least 5 years from when
the notice was given, and

 must produce a copy of the notice to any of the following persons

on demand made by them at any time during that 5 year period:

o the Director-General,

o the relevant distribution network service provider,

o an authorised officer.

Maximum penalty:

 40 penalty units (in the case of a corporation)

 20 penalty units (in any other case).

Unqualified persons not to carry out safety and compliance tests

A person must not carry out a safety and compliance test on an electrical installation if
the person is not a qualified person.

Maximum penalty:

 500 penalty units (in the case of a corporation)

 200 penalty units (in any other case).

Page 446 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 4 – Mandatory Documentations

Activity - 6 – Certificate of Compliance Electrical

Work (CCEW)

Complete the CCEW provided for the installation below

22 - Light points
24 - Double 10A Socket Outlets
1 - 15A socket outlet
1 - 6.0 kW cook top
1 - 3.9 kW wall oven
1 – 0.8 kW heat pump storage H.W.S.

Consumer’s Mains 16mm2 XLPE Cu U/G

A Notification of Service Work (NOSW)

Authorised Service Providers must notify the distribution network service provider
within 48 hours of completing service work. The person performing the connection
work must first test and/or verify the installation to be free of defects, prior to
energising. Connection without completely testing the installation can only be effected
if the Authorised Person has met with and have in their keeping the original CCEW
from the installing Electrical Contractor. The Authorised Person is then responsible for
the lodgement of both notices concurrently.

Page 447 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 448 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 449 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Topic 5 – Design Documentation

The Need to Record Design Decisions

In larger installations in which the maximum demand exceeds 100A addition

information is required by the local Supply Authority / Distribution Network Service
Provider so they can asses the impact the new additional load will have on the existing
distribution system. In some cases upgrades to the distribution system may be
required, at cost in most cases to the customer.

The Distribution Network Service Provider will require the installations:

 The Maximum Demand

 Voltage drop

 Fault level and details of fault current limiting

 A single line diagram of the installation showing cable sizes and protection /
isolation devices.

A written record of the installation will also assist in any disputes with customers over
performance of the installation at the completion of the installation.

Page 450 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial 15

1. High Voltage is defined as a A.C. voltage above;

(a) 50V
(b) 230V
(c) 400V
(d) 1000V

2. The minimum safe working distance to 33kV is;

(a) 0.5m
(b) 1.0m
(c) 1.5m
(d) 2.0m

3. In Australia electrical equipment operating at high voltage must comply with

which Australian standard;

(a) AS 2067
(b) AS 3003
(c) AS 3004
(d) AS 3012

4. In Australia electrical equipment installed in hazardous locations must comply with

which Australian standard;

(a) AS 3003
(b) AS 3004
(c) AS 3012
(d) AS 2381

5. A light installed within a petrol pump would have a hazardous location

classification of:

(a) NH
(b) Zone 0
(c) Zone 1
(d) Zone 2

Page 451 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

6. A light installed in the awning of a petrol station would have a hazardous location
classification of:

(a) NH
(b) Zone 0
(c) Zone 1
(d) Zone 2

7. A Certificate of Compliance Electrical Work (CCEW) must be submitted within;

(a) 48 hours
(b) 7 days
(c) 14 days
(d) 21 days

8. A Notice of Service Work (NOSW) is submitted for work done by the;

(a) installing electrician

(b) electrical contractor
(c) electrician that tested the installation.
(d) level 2 service provider

9. A copy of the Certificate of Compliance Electrical Work (CCEW) must be held by

the person who submitted it for;

(a) 14 days
(b) 1 year
(c) 2 years
(d) 5 years

10. A copy of the Certificate of Compliance Electrical Work (CCEW) is not required to
be supplied to the;

(a) department of fair trading

(b) local supply authority / distribution service provider
(c) customer
(d) installing electrical contractor

Page 452 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Tutorial Answers
Section 1

16. Methods
1 D
(a) Automatic disconnection of supply
(b) Class II
2 D
(c) Separation

3 D (d) Limit fault current

(Clause number 1.5.5.2)
4 C
17. Factors in Designing an Installation (any 3)
5 A
(a) protect persons, livestock and property
from harmful effects
6 D
(b) function correctly as intended
(c) connect, operate safely and be compatible
7 C
with the electricity distribution system, or
other source of supply, to which the
8 B electrical installation is to be connected
(d) minimize inconvenience in the event of a
9 D fault
(e) facilitate safe operation, inspection,
10 D testing and maintenance.
(clause number 1.6.1)
11 C
18. Protection against direct contact by enclosures or
12 A barriers.

(a) IP2X or IP4X for horizontal surfaces

13 B
(Clause number 1.5.4.4)
(b) 12.5mm for IPX2, 1.0mm for IP4X
14 D
(Clause number Table G1a)

15 A

Page 453 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

switchboards, enclosed
19. Factors in Determining the number against external influences,
of circuits (any 3) and located in accessible
positions.
(a) The relationship of the
equipment, (e) Provide for switchgear and
control gear to be grouped
(b) The load and operating
and interconnected on
characteristics
switchboards
(c) The limitation of
(f) enclosed against external
consequences of circuit
influences, and located in
failure including loss of
accessible positions.
supply
(clause 2.1.2)
(d) The facility for maintenance
work
22. Redundant cables must be
(clause 2.2.1.1) terminated at both ends the same
as live cables.
20. Methods of determining maximum
demand (clause 1.5.11.4)

(a) calculation 23. Protection of equipment at different

(b) assessment voltages

(c) measurement (a) segregation

(d) limitation (b) devices for protection
against overvoltages.
(clause 2.2.2) (clause 1.5.11.2)

21. Selection and installation of 24. Protection against mechanical

equipment (any 2) movement – devices must
disconnect or isolate electrical
(a) Provide control or isolation equipment, as may be necessary to
of the electrical installation, prevent or remove danger.
circuits or individual items
(clause 1.5.13)
(b) Enable automatic disco of
supply in the event of an
25. Maximum hole is 50mm
overload, short-circuit or
excess earth leakage current (clause 3.9.9.3)
(c) Protection of the electrical
installation against failure
from overvoltage or
undervoltage conditions.
(d) Provide for switchgear and
controlgear to be grouped
and interconnected on

Page 454 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 2
11. Point per final sub circuit
1 C

Circuit Purpose / load Protection Number

2 C number Device / of points
Rating per circuit
(A)
3 B

4 B 1 Light 1 10A 11

5 D 2 Light 2 10A 11

6 C 3 Power 1 – 10A S/O 20A 16

7 C 4 Power 2 – 10A S/O 20A 16

8 C 5 Power 3 – 15A S/O 16/20A 1

9 B 6 A/C 20A 1

10 A 7 H.W.S 20A 1

12. Schedule

Pos. Amps Designation Pos. Amps Designation

1 10A Light 1 (RCD) 2 10A Light 1 (RCD)

3 20A Power 1 (RCD) 4 20A Power 2(RCD)

5 20A Power 3(RCD) 6 20A Air Conditioner

7 20A Hot Water System 8 Spare

Page 455 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

13. Factory points per final sub circuit

Circuit Purpose / load Protection Number

number Device / of points
Rating per
(A) circuit

1 Light 1 – High Bays 16A 5

2 Light 2 – High Bays 16A 5

3 Power 1 – 10A S/O 20A 4

4 Power 2 – 10A S/O 20A 4

5 Power 3 – 10A S/O 20A 4

6-9 15A 3ф S/O 20A 1

10-13 20A 3ф S/O 20A 1

14-15 32A 3ф S/O 32A 1

Page 456 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

14. Factory points per final sub circuit

Pos. Amps Designation No. Amps Designation

1 16A Light 1 – High Bays (RCD) 2 20A 20A 3ф Socket outlet 1 (RCD)

3 16A Light 2 – High Bays (RCD) 4 20A 20A 3ф Socket outlet 1 (RCD)

5 Spare 6 20A 20A 3ф Socket outlet 1 (RCD)

7 20A Power 1 (RCD) 8 20A 20A 3ф Socket outlet 2 (RCD)

9 20A Power 2 (RCD) 10 20A 20A 3ф Socket outlet 2 (RCD)

11 20A Power 3 (RCD) 12 20A 20A 3ф Socket outlet 2 (RCD)

13 20A 15A 3ф Socket outlet 1 (RCD) 14 20A 20A 3ф Socket outlet 3 (RCD)

15 20A 15A 3ф Socket outlet 1 (RCD) 16 20A 20A 3ф Socket outlet 3 (RCD)

17 20A 15A 3ф Socket outlet 1 (RCD) 18 20A 20A 3ф Socket outlet 3 (RCD)

19 20A 15A 3ф Socket outlet 2 (RCD) 20 20A 20A 3ф Socket outlet 4 (RCD)

21 20A 15A 3ф Socket outlet 2 (RCD) 22 20A 20A 3ф Socket outlet 4 (RCD)

23 20A 15A 3ф Socket outlet 2 (RCD) 24 20A 20A 3ф Socket outlet 4 (RCD)

25 20A 15A 3ф Socket outlet 3 (RCD) 26 32A 32A 3ф Socket outlet 1

27 20A 15A 3ф Socket outlet 3 (RCD) 28 32A 32A 3ф Socket outlet 1

29 20A 15A 3ф Socket outlet 3 (RCD) 30 32A 32A 3ф Socket outlet 1

31 20A 15A 3ф Socket outlet 4 (RCD) 32 32A 32A 3ф Socket outlet 2

33 20A 15A 3ф Socket outlet 4 (RCD) 34 32A 32A 3ф Socket outlet 2

35 20A 15A 3ф Socket outlet 4 (RCD) 36 32A 32A 3ф Socket outlet 2

Page 457 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 3

1 C 11 A 21 C

2 A 12 B 22 D

3 B 13 A 23 C

4 D 14 C 24 B

5 C 15 D 25 A

6 C 16 B

7 D 17 A

8 A 18 B

9 B 19 C

10 C 20 C

Page 458 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 4

11. Maximum demand single domestic (AS3000 Table C1

1 D
Col2)

2 B Load Load Calculation Demand

Group
3 C Lights
A(i) 3+2= 5
(32 points)

4 A External Lights
A(ii) 1500/230 x 0.75 = 4.9
(3 points)

5 D Socket outlets +
B(i) A/C 10 + 5 + 5 = 20
(59 + 1 points)
6 B

F H.W.S. 4400/230 19.1

7 A

C Range 10200/230 x 0.5 = 22.1

8 B

D A/C included in load group (Bi) -

9 B

10 D

Maximum Demand 71.1A

Page 459 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

12. Maximum demand - multiple domestic (AS3000 Table C1 Colum 5)

No of Units A phase ___21___ B phase __21____ C phase ___21___

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

A(i) Lights 21 x 0.5 = 10.5 10.5 10.5

B(i) Socket 50 + (21 x 1.9) = 89.9 89.9 89.9

outlets

C Range 21 x 2.8 = 58.8 58.8 58.8

F H.W.S 100 + (21 x 0.8) = 116.8 116.8 116.8

Community
H (48 x 0.22) + (10 x 0.15) = 12.06
Lighting

I Community 2x2= 4
Power

292A 276A 276A

Maximum Demand = 292A (balance complies less than 25A)

Page 460 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 5

1 D

2 A

3 C

4 D

5 B

6. Non Domestic maximum demand (AS3000 Table C2 Colum 3)

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

A Lights - high bays 6 x 2.6 = 15.6 15.6 15.6

10A socket 1000 + (21 x 750) =

B(i) 72.8 72.8 72.8
outlets 230

4 x 32A socket
B(iii) 32 + (3 x 32 x 0.75) = 104 104 104
outlets

3 x 20A socket
B(iii) 3 x 20 x 0.75 = 45 45 45
outlets

D motor 1 42 x 100% = 42 42 42

D motor 2 42 x 75% = 31.5 31.5 31.5

D motor 3 28 x 50% = 14 14 14

H welder 1 full rated current 18 18

H welder 2 18 18

Total 342.9 360.9 342.9

Maximum Demand = 360.9A (balance complies less than 25A)

Page 461 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

7. Maximum demand multiple domestic (AS3000 Table C1 Colum 4)

No of Units A phase ___11___ B phase __11____ C phase ___11___

Load Load Calculation A B C

Group

A(i) Lights 5 + (11 x 0.25) = 7.75 7.75 7.75

Socket
B(i) 15 + (11 x 3.75) = 56.25 56.25 56.25
outlets

C Range 11 x 2.8 = 30.8 30.8 30.8

F H.W.S 11 x 6 = 66 66 66

D A/C 11 x 14 0.75 = 115.5 115.5 115.5

Community
H (24 x 0.22) + (10 x 0.15) = 6.78
Lighting
Community
10 x 2 = 20A (15A max) 15
Power

Total 276.3 298 276.3

Maximum Demand = 298A (balance complies less than 25A)

8. Maximum demand single domestic (AS3000 Table C1 Colum 2)

Load Load Calculation Demand

Group
Lights
A(i) 3+2= 5
(22 points)
Socket outlets
B(i) 10 + 5 = 15
(36 points)

C Range 8000/230 x 0.5 = 17.4

F H.W.S. 4400/230 19.1

D A/C 14 x 0.75 = 10.5

Maximum Demand 67A

Page 462 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 6
1.

No _13___ Column No ___5_ Cable Size 95mm2 PE Size 25mm2

IB = _172A___ IN =__200A___ IZ = _213A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

2.

No _5___ Column No ___18_ Cable Size 25mm2 PE Size 6mm2

IB = _80A___ IN =__80A___ IZ = _90A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

3.

IN 200
I   222A
D.R. 0.9

IZ  230 x 0.9  207A

No _7__ Column No ___8_ Cable Size 95mm2 PE Size 25mm2

IB = _185A___ IN =__200A___ IZ = _207A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

4.

IN 160
I   177.8A
D.R. 0.9

IZ  183 x 0.9  164A

No _7__ Column No __15____ Cable Size 95mm2 PE Size 25mm2

IB = _141A___ IN =__160A___ IZ = _164A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 463 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

5.

No _10___ Column No ___15_ Cable Size 6mm2 PE Size 2.5mm2

IB = _27A___ IN =__32A___ IZ = _35A____ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

6.

No _4___ Column No ___15_ Cable Size 6mm2 PE Size 2.5mm2

IB = _35A___ IN =__40A___ IZ = _41A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

7.

No _14__ Column No ___24__ Cable Size 95mm2 PE Size 16mm2

IB = _188A___ IN =__200A___ IZ = _234A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

8.

No _7__ Column No __27____ Cable Size 240mm2 PE Size 95mm2

IB = _400A___ IN =__400A___ IZ = _422A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 464 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

9.

IN 20
I   25.6A
D.R. 0.9 x 0.87 0.5m

IZ  30 x 0.9 x 0.87  23.5A

0.15m

De-rating Table ___25(2)_____ Column No__3___ D.R. _0.87__

No _10_ Column No __23___ Cable Size 2.5mm2 PE Size 2.5mm2

IB = _20A___ IN =__20A___ IZ = _23.5A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

10.

IN 40
I   49.4A
D.R. 0.81

IZ  60 x 0.81  48.6A

De-rating Table ___22_____ Column No__5___ D.R. _0.81__

No _10_ Column No __5___ Cable Size 10mm2 PE Size 4mm2

IB = _34A___ IN =__40A___ IZ = _48.6A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

11.

IN 63
I   96.9A
D.R. 0.65

IZ  112 x 0.65  72.8A

De-rating Table ___22_____ Column No__7___ D.R. _0.65__

No _13_ Column No __11___ Cable Size 50mm2 PE Size 16mm2

IB = _54A___ IN =__63A___ IZ = _72.8A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 465 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

12.

HFI-90-TP =75◦C (table 1 AS3008.1.1)

IN 125
I   187.7A
D.R. 0.9 x 0.74

IZ = 219 x 0.9 x 0.74 = 145.8A

De-rating Table ___25(2)_____ Column No__3___ D.R. _0.74__

No _13_ Column No __23___ Cable Size 70mm2 PE Size 25mm2

IB = _125A___ IN =__125A___ IZ = _145.8A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

13.

IN 32
I   39A
D.R. 0.82

IZ  46 x 0.82  37.8A

De-rating Table ___26(2)_____ Column No__3___ D.R. _0.82__

No _9___ Column No __16___ Cable Size 4mm2 PE Size 2.5mm2

IB = _32A___ IN =__32A___ IZ = _37.8A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

14.

IN 50
I   56.2A
D.R. 0.89

IZ  58 x 0.89  51.6A

De-rating Table ___23_____ Column No__7___ D.R. _0.89__

No _7___ Column No __5___ Cable Size 10mm2 PE Size 4mm2

IB = _42.5A___ IN =__50A___ IZ = _51.6A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 466 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

15.

I = IN = 200 = 222.2A
D.R. 0.9

IZ = 252 x 0.9 = 226.8A

De-rating Table ___28(2)_____ Column No__2___ D.R. _0.9__

No _7___ Column No __24___ Cable Size 120mm2 PE Size 50mm2

IB = _175A___ IN =__200A___ IZ = _226.8A__ IB≤IN≤IZ

(Y/N)

16.

IN 400 444
I   444A  222A
D.R. 0.9 2

IZ  233 x 0.9 x 2  419A

De-rating Table ___26(2)_____ Column No__2___ D.R. _0.9__

No _14___ Column No __25___ Cable Size 95mm2 PE Size 25mm2

IB = _400A___ IN =__400A___ IZ = _419A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

17(a).

IN 400
I   360.4A
D.R. 1.11

IZ  411 x 1.11  456.2A

De-rating Table ___27(2)_____ Column No__2___ D.R. _1.11__

No _14___ Column No __25___ Cable Size 240mm2 PE Size 95mm2

IB = _390A___ IN =__400A___ IZ = _456.2A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 467 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

17(b).

IN 400
I   360.4A
D.R. 1.11

IZ  365 x 1.11  405A

De-rating Table ___27(2)_____ Column No__2___ D.R. _1.11__

No _14___ Column No __27___ Cable Size 300mm2 PE Size 70mm2

IB = _390A___ IN =__400A___ IZ = _405A__ IB≤IN≤IZ (Y/N)

Page 468 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 7

11.
1 C
(a) Consumer’s Mains
2 C
VC = 0.285 mV/A.m (T41C8)

3 D L x I x Vc 50 x 350 x 0.285
Vd    4.98V
1000 1000
4 C
(b) Sub Mains
5 B
VC = 0.457 mV/A.m (T40C10)

6 D L x I x Vc 60 x 250 x 0.457
Vd    6.86V
1000 1000
7 A
(c) Final Sub Circuit
8 C
VC = 15.6 mV/A.m (T42C6)

9 D L x I x Vc 30 x 20 x 15.6
Vd    9.36V
1000 1000
10 B

(d) VT = VCM + VSM + Vfsc

= 6.86 + 9.36 + 9.36

= 21.2V

Installation does not comply VT > 5% of 400V

(20V)

Page 469 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

12.

(a) Consumer’s Mains

VC = 1.18 mV/A.m (T41C8)

L x I x Vc 38 x 125 x 1.18
Vd    5.6V
1000 1000
(b) Sub Mains

VC = 3.86 x 1.155 = 4.4583mV/A.m (T42C6)

L x I x Vc 25 x 50 x 4.4583
Vd    5.6V
1000 1000
(c) Final Sub Circuit

VC = 9.71 x 1.155 = 11.215mV/A.m (T42C6)

L x I x Vc 31 x 25 x 15.6
Vd    8.69V
1000 1000
VC M 5.6
(d) VT = + VSM + Vfsc = + 5.6 + 8.69 = 17.5V
3 3

Installation does not comply VT > 5% of 230V (11.5V)

13.

(a) Consumer’s Mains

VC = 0.227 mV/A.m (T40C10)

L x I x Vc 55 x 400 x 0.227
Vd    4.99V
1000 1000
(b) Sub Mains

1000 x Vd 1000 x 6
Vc    2.116mV/A.m
L xI 45 x 63

C.S.A. = 25mm2 (1.54mV/A.m) T42C6

(c) Final Sub Circuit

Vp =
5% x 400 - (VC M  VSM) = 20 - (4.99  6) = 5.2V
3 3

1000 x Vd 1000 x 5.2

Vc    4.06mV/A.m x 0.866 = 3.52 V/Am
LxI 40 x 32

C.S.A. = 16mm2 (3.86mV/A.m) T42C6

Page 470 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

14.

(a) Consumer’s Mains

VC = 0.385mV/A.m (T41C8)

L x I x Vc 55 x 400 x 0.385
Vd    3.85V
1000 1000
(b) Final Sub Circuit length

Vc = 3.86 1.155 = 4.4583mV/A.m (T40C6)

5% x 400 - VC M 20 - 3.85
Vp = =  9.32V
3 3

L x I x Vc
Vd   Vd x 1000  L x I x Vc
1000

Vd x 1000 9.32 x 1000

L   41.8m
I x Vc 50 x 4.4583

15.

Consumer’s Mains – use 0.5 x of maximum demand (I) because of parallel

connection.

VC = 0.582 mV/A.m (T43C10)

L x I x Vc 150 x 125 x 0.0.582

Vd    10.912V
1000 1000

Page 471 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 8

11.
1 C

2 A
mean tripping
time
3 A

4 B

5.0S
5 C

6 B

7 C

8 B

9 C
I/IN

4.0 x
10 B
figure 8

mean tripping current ≈ 4 x C.B. Rated current

(Ia = 4 x IN)

Uo 230
ZS    2.875 
Ia 4 x 20

12.

mean tripping current ≈ 4 x C.B. Rated current

(Ia = 4 x IN)

Uo x 0.8 230 x 0.8

Zint    2.3 
Ia 4 x 20

or

Zint  Zs x 0.8  2.875 x 0.8  2.3 

Page 472 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

13.

(a) Active and Protective earthing conductor impedance

2.5mm2 Rc = 9.01Ω/km (AS3008.1 T35 C4) assume 75◦C

R = Rc x L x 2 =9.01 x 35 x 2 = 0.631
1000 1000
(b) Yes less than 2.3Ω (from question 12)

(c) VC = 15.6 x 1.155 = 18.018mV/A.m (T42C6)

L x I x Vc 35 x 20 x 18.018
Vd    12.6V
1000 1000
(d) Vd = Vcm + Vfsc = 4.6 + 12.6 = 17.2V > 11.5V Does Not comply with AS3000

14.

(a) 5 second disconnection time (AS3000 clause 1.5.5.3(d)

ZS = 0.4Ω (AS3000 Table 8.1)

Zint = ZS x 0.8 = 0.4 x 0.8 = 0.32Ω

(b) Lmax = 90m (0.4 second trip time) (AS3000 Table B1)

80m complies with A3000 for 0.4 second trip time (and, therefore, 5 second trip
time).

15.

(a) 5 section disconnection time (AS3000 clause 1.5.5.3(d)

(b) Ia ≈ 4 x IN = 4 x 100 = 400A

Uo x 0.8 x Sph x Spe

(c) L max  mean tripping
Ia x  x (Sph  Spe ) time

= 230 x 0.8 x 25 x 6
400 x 22.5 x 10-3 x (25 + 6)
5.0S
= 98.92m

I/IN

4.0 x

Page 473 of 489

 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

10
A
A
A
B
B

C
C
C

D
D
Section 9

Page 474 of 489

11.

Load Minimum Cable IB ≤ IN ≤ IZ I2 ≤ 1.45

Circuit
Max Cable Current x IZ
Protectio De-rating
Type Deman Current Rating Y/N
n Rating factor Y /N
d Rating after D.R.
IN
IB IZ

H.R.C. Y
1 100A 100A 111.1A 0.9 x 100A Y
Fuse

H.R.C. Y
2 180A 200A 222.2A 0.9 x 200A Y
Fuse

3 C.B. 60A 63A 90 0.7 x 63A Y Y

Grouping

4 C.B. 35A 32A 30A 1x 30A N N

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.
 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

12.

4 effects of short circuit (any 4)

 Extremely large currents.  Ionisation of enclosures.

 Cables reaching very high  Severe magnetic stresses on

temperatures. conductors and supports.

 Insulation failure.  Fatal injury to persons and

livestock.
 Destruction of protection
devices.  Fire

 explosion (Arc blasts).

13.

S 750 x 103
IL    1,082.5A
3 x VL 3 x 400

14.

MVA 15 x 106
IS /C    21,650A
3 x VL 3 x 400

15.

V 230
ZT x    0.0106Ω
IS /C 21650

16.

(a)
V 230
ZS /C    0.0092Ω
IS /C 25000

(b) Rc = 0.247Ω/km (AS3008.1 T34C6) @90◦C

ZCM = Rc x L x 2 = 0.247 x 30 x 2 = 0.01482

1000 1000

(c) ZT = ZS/C + ZCM = 0.0092 + 0.01482 = 0.01661Ω

(d) ISC = V = 230 = 13847A = 13.846kA

ZT 0.01664
(e) No the 20A 6kA does not have the breaking capacity to interrupt 13.8kA and the
fault current limiter should not be rated at more than 200A. A larger kA rating is
required.

Page 475 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 10

11.
1 B
All active conductors of an a.c. circuit shall be capable of being
isolated by a device for isolation.
2 D
(clause number 2.3.2.1.2(a))

3 A 12.

4 B A switch in a neural conductor is not permitted in consumer’s

mains and all types of PEN conductors. In all other cases the
isolator must switch all active conductors at the same time as
5 B the neutral conductor.
(clause number 2.3.2.1.2(b))
6 A
13.

7 B Functional switching is required for operational control only

and not for safety reasons. Functional switches do not
necessarily isolate the supply. Functional switches must be
8 C capable of a very large number of operations compared to a
isolation switch.
9 C
(clause number 2.3.7.1)

10 D 14.

No.

(clause number 2.3.2.2.1)

15.

Yes

(clause number 2.3.7.1)

16.

The cook top must be provided with a switch, operating in all

active conductors, mounted near the appliance in a visible and
readily accessible position. The switch should be mounted
within two metres of the cooking appliance, but not on the
cooking appliance, in such a position that the user does not
have to reach across the open cooking surface.

(clause number 4.7.1)

Page 476 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

17.

No.

(clause number 4.7.1)

18.

No. The safety service must be controlled by a separate main switch. General
equipment is not permitted to be supply controlled by a safety service main switch

(clause number 7.2.4.1)

19.

Main switches controlling safety services shall be marked “IN THE EVENT OF FIRE, DO
NOT SWITCH OFF”

(clause number 7.2.4.4)

Page 477 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 11

11.
1 C

2 B

16mm2
3 A
Hot
MS L,P,R MS
Water P3 P2
4 B Domestic Domestic
/ Off Peak Tariff
Tariff Meter
5 A Meter
4mm2

6 C

Consumer’s
7 C Earth Link Neutral Link

Service
8 D Neutral Link
P1
Domestic
9 A 6mm2
16mm2 Tariff
Meter
16mm2
10 C all 4mm2
SPD SPD SPD

Enclosure Bond

A B C N Consumer’s Mains
16mm2
Earth Electrode

Page 478 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

12.

Current
Transformer
Meter

S.P.D.
A

N
From To
Supply Load

13.

(a) 50mm2 (AS3000 Table 5.1)

(b) 50mm2 (AS3000 Table 5.1)
(c) 50mm2 (AS3000 Table 5.1)
(d) 2.5mm2 (NSWSR metering annexure Table 2.4)
(e) 4.0mm2 (NSWSR metering annexure Table 2.5)

Page 479 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 12
1 B

2 D

3 A

4 C

5.

SELV and PELV (clause number 1.4.105 & 1.4.96 or 7.5.2)

6.

In zone 1, not less than 0.45 m above ground level and not less than 1.25 m from the
internal rim of the pool water or not less than 0.5 m from the edge of a fixed
continuous horizontal barrier that is not less than 1 .25 m wide measured from the
internal rim of the pool water.
(clause number 6.3.4.3 (b))

7.

Each pool light must be supplied from an individual source installed outside Zone 0, at
a nominal voltage not exceeding 12 V a.c. or 30 V ripple- free d.c. and as an SELV or
a PELV system, in accordance with Clause 7.5.

(clause number 6.3.4.5)

8.

supplied individually as a separated circuit, in accordance with Clause 7.4; or supplied

as an SELV or a PELV system, in accordance with Clause 7.5; or protected by a 30mA
R.C.D. (most common); and controlled by a switch that requires manual operation
and does not operate automatically by the insertion or withdrawal of a plug.

(clause number 6.3.4.3)

9.

Wiring systems shall be installed so as to prevent—

(a) entry of moisture to any connection; and

(b) water siphoning through any wiring enclosure or cable.
Bare aerial conductors shall not be installed over Zones 0, 1 or 2.

(clause number 6.3.4.2)

Page 480 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

10.

4mm2 unless incorporated in a multi core cable.

(clause number 5.6.3.2)

11.

Must be accessible and protected against corrosion.

(clause number 5.6.2.6.3)

12.

If there is electrical equipment installed within any pool zone or the pool equipment is
not separated from the pool water by double insulation. A conductive pool fence is
within arm’s reach (1.25m) of the rim of the pool must be bonded.

(clause number 5.6.2.6.5)

13.

Zone 0 switches are not permitted, Zone 1 IPX4, Zone 2 IPX4.

(clause number 6.2.4.3 and Table 6.1)

14.

Location IP rating

Within 2 metres of the water of a pool (Zone 1). IPX5

External to any building and exposed to the

weather. IPX3

Appliances in the pool zone but not in contact

with the circulating water. IPX5

Appliances immersed in the pool water.

IPX8

A switch installed within 500 mm of a 500 litre

spa installed in a bathroom. IPX5

15.

Page 481 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

No, unless it is a shaver socket outlet in zone 2.

(clause number 6.2.4.2 and Table 6.1)

16.

Zones 0 & 1 socket outlets are not permitted. Zone 2 socket outlets must be in a
cupboard and R.C.D. protected or a shaver outlet. Zone 3 not ≤ 300mm above the
floor and R.C.D. protected.
(clause number 6.2.4.2 and Table 6.1)
17.

Water Container Distance Reference

Bath. 600mm fig 6.1 & 6.2.4.2

Washtubs less than 40 litres. 150mm fig 6.13 & 6.2.4.2

Washtubs over 40 litres. 500mm fig 6.14 & 6.2.4.2

Spa of 6500 litre capacity. 2.0m fig 6.2 & 6.3.2.1

Spa of 620 litre capacity. 1.25m fig 6.14 & 6.3.2

Unenclosed shower rose. 1.8m fig 6.3 & 6.2.4.2

Near the sliding door of a shower recess. 600mm fig 6.8 & 6.2.4.2

Hand basin. 150mm fig 6.13 & 6.2.4.2

18.

There are no depth-of-burial requirements for the safety of extra-low voltage cables.
(clause number 7.5.11.3)
19.
No, plugs shall not be able to enter sockets of other voltage systems. Sockets shall
not accept plugs of other voltage systems. Sockets shall not have a contact for a
protective earthing conductor.
(clause number 7.5.10)
20.
No. While one of the conductors of the supply is connected to earth, the exposed
conductive parts of the load are not.

(clause number 7.5.10)

Page 482 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 13

11.
1 D
With a suitable RCD testing device every 3 months
2 B Reference AS3012 (clause number 3.5 & T3)

12.
3 C
Provided with uniform support AS3000 3.13.2 (a) ie. Cable
4 B tied at a suitable distance to prevent undue sagging.
Reference AS3012 (clause number 2.5.8)
5 C
13.

6 A No, not a free standing fence

Reference AS3012 (clause number 2.5.3)

7 B
14.
8 A
Support cables on stands, cross-arms or similar, covered with
material that is non-conducting.
9 A
Reference AS3012 (clause number 2.3.5)

10 B 15.

Yes, all final sub-circuits must be protected by a 30mA RCD.

Reference AS3012 (clause number 2.4.6.1)

16.

2.5m above ground floor or platform

Reference AS3012 (clause number 2.7.6)

17.

ELV ≤ 50V a.c..

Reference AS3012 (clause number 2.7.6.)

18.

5% of the nominal supply voltage ie 11.5V and 20V

Reference AS3000 (clause number 3.6.2)

Page 483 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

19.
1.5 m above the surface to which the operator would stand.
Reference AS3001 (clause number 2.2.7.8)
20.
No,
Reference AS3001 (clause number 3.5.1.1(i))
21.
 Any conductive material that forms part of the chassis or frame regardless
 The exterior shell (including attached rigid annexes) if constructed of
conductive material.
 Window and door frames constructed of conductive material where any part of
the electrical installation is within 100 mm of the frame.
 The earthing contact of all socket-outlets except socket-outlets supplied by a
separation (isolating) transformer.
 The exposed conductive parts of any electrical equipment that is required to be
earthed in accordance with AS 3000.
Reference AS3001 (clause number 3.5.1.2)

22.
Wiring that passes through any conductive material, the hole should be effectively
flared to protect the wiring, or the wiring should be protected by means of suitable
bushings or grommets that are securely fixed in position.
Reference AS3001 (clause number 3.4.2)

23.
36 socket outlets for LD load split over 3 phases = 12/phase

24 socket outlets for HD load split over 3 phases = 8/phase + 4 32A outlets per phase
= 12 outlets per phase

Load Calculation A B C

12 L.D.S/O per phase 36 + (4 x 6) 60 60 60

4 x 32A S/O 32 85.3 85.3 85.3

4  10
15
Last 2 of 1st 6 H.D S/O 2x6 12 12 12

Last 6 of H.D S/O 6x6 36 36 36

Total 193.3 193.3 193.3

Page 484 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Section 14

6.
1 C
Aerial conductors or catenary wiring of any type shall not be
used on the pontoon or jetty portions of a marina, nor over
2 D
slipway, haul out or hard stand areas.
Reference AS3004 (clause number 2.1.2.2)
3 B
7.
4 C
Corrosive salt-laden atmosphere, water spray, water level
variation (e.g. tidal and wave action), high temperatures and
5 B prolonged exposure to ultraviolet radiation.
Reference AS3004 (clause number 1.6.3)

8.

As per AS 3000 clauses 2.9.2.5 and 2.9.3.1 minimum height

of switch board is 1.2m, but may be reduced if access to live
parts is restricted enclosures, in accordance with the
provisions of AS 3000 Clause 1.5.4.

Reference AS3004 (clause number 2.4.2.6.2)

9.

Methods of supply

 Supply through a shore mounted isolation transformer.

 Supply through a on board mounted isolation

transformer.

 Supply without isolation transformer

Reference AS3004 (clause number 3.3.2-4)

10.
15A Reference AS3004 (clause number 2.4.2.4.2)

11.
It is recommended that the supply lead comprise a single
length of flexible cord or cable without any intermediate joins.
If joins are necessary they should be constructed and located
so as to have a degree of protection of not less than IPX6.

Reference AS3004 (clause number 2.4.2.4.2)

Page 485 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

12.

No, Metallic pipes or conduits shall not be used as protective earthing conductor.

Reference AS3004 (clause number 2.1.3.2)

13.
insulated aerial conductors or cable supported by a catenary.
Reference AS3002 (clause number 2.1.3)

14.
6m
Reference AS3002 (clause number 2.1.3)

15.
No. A protective earthing conductor is run between the generator and the load.
Reference AS3002 (clause number 3.2 Fig 3.1)

Section 15
1 D

2 B

3 A

4 D

5 B

6 A

7 B

8 D

9 D

10 D

Page 486 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 487 of 489

 UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Resource Evaluation Form

Unit Code, Unit Name and Version Code

Please take the time to complete this evaluation form and either post/fax to

TAFE NSW
Training and Education Support Industry Skills Unit, Meadowbank
Locked Bag No. 6 MEADOWBANK NSW 2114
FAX: 02 9942 3257
Your feedback can assist us in our continual improvement process. Please
add additional comments on the back of this form, if necessary.

Your campus __________________The date this unit was completed _________

Please circle your responses to the following:

Did you find this resource easy to use? Yes No
Why ____________________________________________________________
Was the content clear and relevant? Yes No
If not, why not ____________________________________________________
Did the resource adequately prepare you for assessment? Yes No
If not, why not ____________________________________________________
What other type of resources did you use to complete this course?
Internet Library Work colleagues Other (please specify)
_________________________________________________________________
Please indicate how you used this resource:
I used it in addition to attending face-to-face classes
I used it as a self-paced learner, with occasional phone contact with a
designated teacher
I used it as a self-paced learner, supported by a study group of other
students studying the same unit of competency
I used it as a self-paced learner and was supported by workshop
participation
I used it as a self-paced learner and was supported by a tutor visiting my
workplace
I used it during my traineeship

Other ____________________________________________________________
Thank you for taking the time to give us your valuable feedback.
Please add your suggestions to improve this resource.

TAFE NSW
© 2009

Page 488 of 489

UEENEEG103A/UEENEEG1O7A - Select & arrange equipment for general electrical installations.

Page 489 of 489